JP6687858B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  Regarding gaming machines.

  Pachinko gaming machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening (start chucker), the symbol called "special symbol" is variably displayed on the display section such as 7 segment, and the special symbol is specified. In the case of a mode (for example, "7"), a special game state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal game state (a game in which a large winning opening (attacker) that is normally closed is opened under a predetermined condition) }, A type of so-called "digital pachi" (conventional "first-class game machine") of the type that shifts to "} is common. Here, in order to reduce the load of the display control of the special symbol that is directly connected to the profit of the player, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol", it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for production to enhance the interest of the game. In some cases, the symbol to be displayed may be variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol also has a predetermined mode (for example, in accordance with this). It will stop at "777"). In many cases, the player can clearly recognize that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative pattern in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the rotating drum type gaming machine (slot machine) is a plurality of rows in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery when the game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals. The spinning drum (reel) rotates, and as a result of stopping the spinning drum by making full use of the spinning drum stopping device (stop button) for stopping the rotation, a predetermined combination of symbols on the effective line (for example, When "777") are lined up, it is a type that generally shifts to a special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit than the normal gaming state Target. Here, in the slot machine, an image for production for enhancing the interest of the game may be displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation operation and the stop operation of the reel, In many cases, when the stop button or the like is operated, the result of the game is predicted and enjoyed by comparing the design displayed on the reel with the effect image displayed on the display.

  This kind of mechanism is common to many gaming machines of this type, but the program capacity that controls the operation control of the gaming machines is to prevent the mixture of illegal programs (to ensure the correctness of the programs provided by the gaming machine manufacturers). From the point of view, the upper limit of the capacity is strictly regulated, and in addition to the program for implementing the game play specification, cheating is performed on the game machine (for example, the radio wave information is transmitted to the starting opening sensor. There are many programs to prevent fraudulent activity to prevent unauthorized access to the game media slot or payout port to obtain the game media by unauthorized means, etc.) It is implemented.

  Further, due to the reason that the angle of the game nail changes due to the collision of the game balls flowing down the game board surface (game area), the efficiency of entering the game balls into a certain winning opening is assumed at the time of shipment of the game machine. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to determine how much the ball entry efficiency is, even in such a case.

JP, 2011-147675, A JP, 2016-16898, A JP, 2010-158405, A

  However, under the present circumstances, it is often the case that a program for implementing the game play specification and a program for preventing fraud are mixedly arranged on the ROM, and as a result, it is difficult to verify the legitimacy of these programs. There is a problem that has become.

The gaming machine according to this aspect,
A gaming machine including a ROM, a RAM, and a CPU,
The ROM stores a program that controls commands to the CPU, and data read according to the program,
The ROM is
A first control area in which a program is stored,
A first data area in which data is stored,
A second control area in which a program is stored,
A second data area in which data is stored,
The RAM is
A first information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the first control area,
A second information storage area for storing the processing result data by the program stored in the second control area,
Data stored in the register can be saved, the first stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the first control area,
The data stored in the register can be saved, and the second stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the second control area
Is equipped with
Of the processing by the program stored in the first control area and the processing by the program stored in the second control area, the program stored in the first control area to the program stored in the second control area is a is Ru processing performed when it is called, in a series of processing route including the saving of a predetermined register used in the first control area is stored a program by the program stored in the second control region A pachinko game machine characterized in that the usage amount of the second stack area is maximized only when processing is executed.
Also,
The gaming machine 2 according to this aspect,
A gaming machine including a ROM, a RAM, and a CPU,
The ROM stores a program that controls commands to the CPU, and data read according to the program,
The ROM is
A first control area in which a program is stored,
A first data area in which data is stored,
A second control area in which a program is stored,
A second data area where data is stored
Have
The RAM is
A first information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the first control area,
A second information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the second control area;
Have
Data stored in the register can be saved, the first stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the first control area,
The data stored in the register can be saved, and the second stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the second control area
Is equipped with
Of the processing by the program stored in the first control area and the processing by the program stored in the second control area, the program stored in the first control area to the program stored in the second control area is A process that is executed when called, and is performed by a series of process routes including saving of a predetermined register used by the program stored in the first control area by the program stored in the second control area Is configured to maximize the usage of the second stack area only when executing
It is a rotating-body type gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of this aspect, it is possible to easily verify the legitimacy of the program for implementing the game play specification and the program for preventing fraudulent activity.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an operation diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram relating to prize ball payout commands and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board reception control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a payout abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of ball path abnormality detection error control processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a payout motor abnormality detection error control process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (starting prize ball payout / motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the time of motor drive execution) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of processing at the time of a motor error on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the error notification execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of award ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a base determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a memory map configuration diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 76 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of a main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of a main game starting opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of a backup execution control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of a sub game entrance confirmation process on the sub main controller side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a sub-game entry determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of a sub game side discharge number confirmation process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the RAM clear backup process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a ball entry state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a ball entry information backup image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a display example of a ball entry state display device in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a ball entry state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of password generation processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of password authentication processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 115 is an arrangement example of a main game starting opening and a general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 116 is a list 1 of a structure relating to information on entering a ball, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 117 is a list 2 of configurations related to information relating to ball entry, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 118 is a list 3 of configurations related to information on entering a ball, which is applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 119 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of award ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of non-time saving prize number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the time saving award ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of a ball entry state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a display example of a ball entry state display device in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the counter payout control board reception control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the number-of-entered-balls measuring process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the non-time saving ball count measuring process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the time-shortened ball count measuring process on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the incoming state calculation process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 137 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the entry state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 143 is a short-term payout rate calculation image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of a ball entry state determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of special game end demo time control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of a payout excess display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram at the time of detecting too many payout balls in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an example 1 of an error time control applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 152 is an example 2 of the error control applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 153 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram of a program configuration in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a list of test signals in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of the SW totaling process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of counter addition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a configuration diagram of a register in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram of the register Q in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of a ball entry state display device calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of section determination on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the section A o'clock determination on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of determination at the time of section B or later on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of a calculation preparation process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of base calculation data creation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of arithmetic processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of a ball entry state display device display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart of display content update processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 170 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 171 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 172 is an example of the maximum use route of the stack area in the pachinko game machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a cross section of the pachinko game machine according to the sixteenth embodiment in which the main control board is housed in the case and the periphery of the setting operation unit. FIG. 175 is a flowchart of the setting change process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device during the setting change and the setting confirmation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 179 is an image diagram related to the setting change button type 1 (setting change). FIG. 180 is an image diagram relating to the setting change button type 1 (setting change). FIG. 181 is an image diagram related to the setting change button type 2 (setting change). FIG. 182 is an image diagram related to the setting change button type 2 (setting change). FIG. 183 is an image diagram related to the setting change button type (setting confirmation). FIG. 184 is an image diagram relating to the setting switch type (setting change). FIG. 185 is an image diagram related to the setting switch type (setting change). FIG. 186 is an image diagram related to the setting switch type (setting confirmation). FIG. 187 is an image diagram related to the RAM clear button type (setting change). FIG. 188 is an image diagram related to the RAM clear button type (setting confirmation).

Form for carrying out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only award in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" is sometimes called a main game pattern / special pattern (special drawing) or a decorative pattern (design), but the "special pattern (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled by the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board S side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (eg, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, identification information fluctuations / stops, advance notices, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In the configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker), the advance state is the easy winning state, and the withdrawal state is the non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, as random numbers, hard Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning / non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notifying the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. "Display of the state of entering the ball" is a display of information relating to entering the ball, displaying the number of balls entered into the specified entrance, displaying the number of prize balls paid out based on the entrance into the specified entrance, multiple Display of the total number of balls entered into the entrance, the display of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entrance into multiple entrances, the display of the base value, the display of the base value in a predetermined gaming state, the ratio of the entered balls Is displayed, the entry ratio in a predetermined game state is displayed, the role ratio is displayed, the continuous role ratio is displayed, the cumulative number of discharged balls is displayed, and the like. "Predetermined operation on operation member" means pressing of a sub-input button (in this example, it is determined that the button is pressed once when turned off → on for 0.5 seconds or less → off), sub-input Long press of the button (in this example, it is determined to have been pressed when it is turned on for 10 seconds or more), and the RAM clear button is pressed (off in this example, on for 0.5 seconds or less) → When it is turned off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once), and when the RAM clear button is pressed for a long time (in this example, when it is turned on for 10 seconds or more, it is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time) , Operating the firing handle, etc. The "operable operation member provided on the back side of the gaming machine" is a member provided on the back side that is invisible when the player is playing the game, for example, a RAM clear button. . The "operable operation member provided on the front surface side of the gaming machine" is a member provided on the front surface side that is visible when the player is playing the game, for example, a sub-input button, a firing handle. ,.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of an embodiment is a modification from another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that the combination of one modification and another is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, the numerical value as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modified examples (for example, the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery, the maximum number of rounds at the special game, the symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc.) is This is merely an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions of the first main game side and second main game side, conditions of probability variation game and non-probability variation game, time reduction game It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (in terms of conditions such as the time shortening game, etc.) may be appropriately changed unless they largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, in the first main game side and the second main game side, the relationship between the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed appropriately such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuation of the probability variation game state based on the meaning that it continues until the next big hit occurs, is "65535" set as the number of continuation (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, even if the realization method options based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiment or modification example Should be understood to be appropriately changed.

  Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. The pachinko game machine is roughly divided into a game machine frame D and a game board Da, and the game machine frame D and the game board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Hereinafter, each unit constituting the gaming machine frame D and the gaming board Da will be sequentially described.

  First, the gaming machine frame D of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (also called a glass unit) D16, a door unit (also called a glass door) D18, and a bowl unit D17. (The upper bowl D20, the lower bowl D22, and the firing handle D44 are collectively referred to as D17).

  The outer frame unit D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position where it should be installed, and upper, lower, left and right frame rods (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e, left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b). The curtain plate D12c and the curtain plate D12c are properly assembled in a frame shape to form a unit. Here, a pair of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and an outer frame for locking the front frame unit D14 to the right frame rod D12b. Locking metal fittings (not shown) on the frame side are fixed. Further, in the present embodiment, a speaker D24 capable of outputting sound according to the game state is provided on the curtain D12c, and the left and right frame rods (left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b) are vertically moved by metal. The frame rods (upper frame rod D12d and lower frame rod D12e) are made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

  The front frame unit D14 is a frame whose outer size matches the opening portion of the outer frame unit D12, and includes a front frame hinge D12a-1 and a locking metal fitting (not shown) provided in the outer frame unit D12. A hinge mechanism D14a-1 (corresponding to these) provided at an appropriate position of the frame unit D14 and a locking device (not shown) are attached to the outer frame unit D12 so that they can be opened and closed sideways and locked.

  In the front frame unit D14, a launching mechanism for launching a game ball, a game board housing mechanism for detachably housing the game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for giving prize balls, and guiding or playing game balls. A game ball discharging mechanism and the like for collecting are provided. In the present embodiment, a game board accommodating mechanism is formed as a base body, and a front frame body D14a to which a launching mechanism is attached and a front frame body D14a are detachably attached, and a prize ball payout mechanism and a discharged game ball are discharged. A front mechanism unit D14 is formed from the back mechanism unit D14b on which the mechanism is formed. Further, on the left side of the front frame body D14a, a pair of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling a door unit D18 to be described later are provided, and the door unit D18 is provided on the right side of the front frame body D14a. A glass frame locking device (not shown) for locking is provided. Furthermore, a ball dish unit support mechanism (including a ball dish hinge D14a-3) for assembling a ball dish unit D17, which will be described later, is provided on the lower portion of the front frame body D14a.

  The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass or acrylic plates in parallel at a predetermined interval (about 20 mm), and has a U-shaped shape. After the glass is inserted into the glass holding portion (not shown) formed on the one member D16b, the second member D16c that shields the inserted portion is fitted and adhered to be integrally formed. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) can see through the game area D30 of the game board Da through an opening surface of a door unit D18, which will be described later, and foreign matter does not enter from the opening surface (the relevant It is difficult to access the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface).

  The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at a proper position of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided in the front frame unit D14 (corresponding to these). The hinge mechanism and the locking metal fitting (not shown) are attached to the front frame unit D14 so as to be laterally opened and closed and locked. The door unit D18 has an outer size that substantially matches the outer shape of the game board Da, and has an opening D18a provided in the center with a smaller area than the transparent plate unit D16. A game board Da and a game area D30 which will be described later are visible through D16.

On the back side of the door unit D18, a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16, and a decoration portion provided with decoration around the opening D18a so as to obtain an electric decoration effect or a visual effect. D18c and the like are also formed. In the present embodiment, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is arranged in the upper right part of the door unit D18. The frame decoration lamp D18-L may be turned on to display information about a ball to be described later.
Details of the component configuration of the door unit D18 will be described later.

  The bowl unit D17 includes a bowl unit supporting mechanism (including the bowl hinge D14a-3) provided in the front frame unit D14 and an engaging member (for example, an engagement member) provided at an appropriate position of the bowl unit D17. It is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14 by the combination member D17a-1). In addition, the ball dish unit D17 can be detached from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed, so that the ball dish unit D17 can be removed in a state in which the game machine is used without providing a key for the gaming machine. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the dish unit D17 wrap) is adopted.

  The outer shape of the ball dish unit D17 is formed in a rectangular shape, and the upper bowl plate D20 for supplying game balls to the launching device at the upper portion and the large number of prize balls at the lower portion are dispensed. When an excessive amount of game balls is supplied to D20, a lower ball dish D22 that can store the excessive amount of game balls is formed, and on the right side of the lower ball dish D22, the firing strength of the launch device (game) A firing handle D44 for adjusting the hitting position of the ball is provided. Further, on a partial surface of the ball dish unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper bowl D20), a sub-input button SB operated by the player at the time of rendering, and a lending operation unit for making a request for lending a game ball ( (Not shown) is provided. A speaker D24 is provided between the upper bowl D20 and the lower bowl D22. The details of the component configuration of the bowl unit D17 will be described later.

  The schematic configuration of the gaming machine frame D in the present embodiment is as described above, but as described above, the gaming machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units, and more specifically, in front of the outer frame unit D12. The front frame unit D14 (including the game board Da), and the transparent plate unit D16, the door unit D18, and the bowl unit D17 in front of the front frame unit D14 are detachably (or openable / closable). Therefore, the matching portion of each unit has a minute gap for facilitating the opening / closing operation and the attaching / detaching operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown in the drawings, a labyrinth structure (an uneven shape in a cross-sectional view) is provided in the alignment portion of each unit so that the gap is not linear in order to prevent foreign matter from entering. It is desirable (but not limited to this) to employ a structure such that

  In this embodiment, the door unit D18 and the bowl unit D17 have separate structures, but they may have an integrated structure. Further, in the present embodiment, the structure for paying out the physical game medium according to the game result is adopted, but the medium may be electronically managed. In that case, the lower ball dish D22, the prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not required, and a game machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) in which the played balls are returned to the upper ball dish D20 and electronically managed is adopted. It should be supplemented that the dish unit D17, the door unit D18, etc. will be provided with an operation unit for settlement / rental using an electronic medium.

  Next, on the game board Da, a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of game nails and a mechanism such as a windmill, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, a general winning opening P10, and a first winning opening P10. The special winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, the effect display device SG, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the center decoration D38 and the out mouth C80 is set up. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  First, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information.

  Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second main game starting port B10 {a ball receiving member formed in a flat plate shape (hereinafter referred to as a ball receiving member. ) Is retracted from the game area D30} and an open state in which a game ball can enter (state in which the ball receiving member projects into the game area D30). Here, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment adopts an electric accessory (so-called Vero electric) in which the ball receiving portion slides back and forth, and when it is in the open state, the game is played. The ball receiving member protruding into the area D30 is configured to receive the game ball and guide the game ball to the second main game starting opening ball entrance detection device B11s (arranged inside the game board). Further, in the present embodiment, as the electric accessory, an electric accessory in which the ball receiving member slides back and forth so that it is difficult to receive the game ball in the opening operation in a short time is adopted. Without limitation, a so-called tulip-shaped electric accessory that can take a closed state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state may be adopted. .

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). While the ball is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, while being easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. . It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and The two main game starting openings B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other, and in that case, the upper portion of the second main game starting opening B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game starting opening A10. You may.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance ball information indicating the entrance when entering the ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 serves as a trigger for the lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Next, the general winning opening P10 includes a general winning opening ball detection device P11s. The general winning opening entrance detecting device P11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the general winning opening P10, and generates general winning entrance information indicating the entrance of the game ball. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the general winning opening P10. In addition, a plurality of general winning openings P10 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). It is easy to enter the general winning opening P10. There is no problem even if the number of general winning openings P10 is changed, and even if only the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are easy to enter, the left side of the game area D30 (center of the game area) Only the game balls that flow down (as a reference) may be easy to enter.

  Here, in the present embodiment, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10, on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) ) Is configured so that it can be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10 (however, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area)) Also, it may be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10}.

  Next, above the outlet C80 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30), a first big winning opening C10 and a second big winning opening C20 are provided, and the right side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game ball flowing down (standard) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening C80.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol and is in a horizontal rectangular shape, and has an outlet port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above C80 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d (and a first big winning). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult to win in the first special winning port C10 and an open state in which the game balls are easy to win (the first (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It is a slide-type attacker, and the special winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down in the game area D30, and in the advanced state, the box-shaped member. The large winning opening is closed due to the obstruction of acceptance of the game balls into the box, and if the game balls are allowed to be retracted in the retracted state, the large winning hole is opened. It is also preferable in the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second special winning opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is open when the jackpot symbol stops, forming a horizontal rectangular shape out It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the mouth C80 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and a second special winning prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric part C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is set in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. It is made variable (the second special winning opening solenoid C23 is excited and made variable). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It is a slide-type attacker, and the special winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down in the game area D30, and in the advanced state, the box-shaped member. The large winning opening is closed due to the obstruction of acceptance of the game balls into the box, and if the game balls are allowed to be retracted in the retracted state, the large winning hole is opened. It is also preferable in the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and a missing "-" (however, it is not limited to this, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed, a 7-segment LED is used. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: low speed blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), the effect described later A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device for displaying an effect image including a decorative pattern that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol / second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations simulating a game of a slot machine. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding the auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that are not executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by flashing or the like. The game effect lamp D26 may be turned on so as to display information about entering a ball, which will be described later.

  Next, the entry state display device J10, the entry status of the game ball to the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10 and the general winning opening P10 {non-probability variation game state and non-time shortening game It is a display device that displays information indicating whether the state of the ball entered in the state (main game probability change flag off and main game short time flag off) is normal or abnormal. It should be noted that if the ball entry status is abnormal, the game nail that guides the game ball to flow down toward the general winning opening P10 is bent in a direction different from that at the time of shipment of the gaming machine. It is difficult to enter the game even if you continue to shoot game balls toward it. In the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 and the game ball entering the general winning opening P10 is out of the assumed range. If it is present, it is determined to be abnormal. Further, as will be described in detail later, the elements that can be displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 are not limited to those described above, and the base value (the number of prize balls paid out by a predetermined winning port is defined as the number of game balls). It is a value obtained by multiplying the value divided by the total number of fired balls by 100, which will be described in detail later), and various elements can be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Production control means (sub-main control section) for performing display control and the like on the main display control board M for performing a control directly related to a person's profit) and the production display device SG for imparting amusement to game contents. SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs an effect display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and winning of each prize hole. In accordance with the above, a prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a prize ball payout unit KE10 for paying out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20 and a payout operation by the prize ball payout unit KE10 are controlled. Prize ball payout control board KH, an error indicator KH3 for displaying the occurrence status of an error related to payout (for example, 7-segment display), an error cancel switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and an upper bowl plate D20 A launching device D42 that launches the game balls (reserved balls) one by one to the game area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine. E, a power switch Ea which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko game machine, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the front frame unit D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to a stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters a winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and a prize ball signal is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH. To do. Alternatively, the game ball lending device such as the card unit R makes a request for ball lending to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes payout of the game balls. As shown in FIG. 5, as the stepping motor KE10m rotates, a sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) is rotated, and the game ball is It is paid out one by one. The paid game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. Incidentally, as for the cross section CC, as shown in the figure, it should be supplemented that a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easily visible) is shown.

  The lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and the rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photo sensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by projecting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is formed with six recesses along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit, When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, it is turned on (state in the lower stage of FIG. 4).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls the sub-main control section SM for controlling various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display / stop display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG, and hold display, notice display, and the like. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. RAM that temporarily stores the data that is handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.), backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information when power is cut off are installed. ing.

  The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board and device will be outlined below. First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {first main game starting entrance ball detection device A11s, second main game starting entrance ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning opening ball detecting device P11s}, drive solenoid not shown (the above-mentioned first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning Mouth solenoid C23 etc.), information display LED (not shown), and the like, game peripherals (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B in the figure) that are indispensable input / output devices for the progress of the game. , 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) is electrically connected and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM / sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production / game progress state, etc. can be sent to the sub control board S.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 6, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board are provided. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. In addition, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication) is possible.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and accepts a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R (may be referred to as a card unit R) for transmission. Although not shown in the drawings, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided inside the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launch device D42 ( It is also connected to the firing handle, firing motor, ball feeder, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separately provided and adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

  Next, the sub-control board S, as described above, the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative design, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown, but so-called effect. Motor, solenoid, etc.) of the movable body part for use). In addition, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), it is possible to start or end the measurement of the base value, execute a predetermined effect, start displaying the maintenance mode, or the like. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Further, the sub input button detection device SBs detects that the sub input button SB has been operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub control board S has the sub main control section SM and the sub sub control section SS, and the sub main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. Is configured to be. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

  Next, the flow path of the game ball used for the game will be described with reference to the image diagram of the flow path of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls shot in the game area D30 are each of the ball entrances {first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, 2 major winning opening C20, general winning opening P10, out opening C80} is entered, passing through the entrance sensor which corresponds to each entrance, it is guided inside the game machine (the game machine frame D) . Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game starting port A10 passes through the first main game starting port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the game balls guided into the game machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the game machine. In addition, although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming a ball entry {each ball entry port (eg, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, first big winning port C10, first 2 major winning openings C20, general winning openings) is a switch through which game balls entered are passed, and one or a plurality of switches different from the switch for detecting entrance into each winning opening} It is assumed that

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 7. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first / second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) relating to the effect, the prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M, and is communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM), the sub-sub-control unit SS (production display means SS) for performing image production, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and frame decoration lamps D18-L, The speaker D24 and the like are also electrically connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in terms of hardware. And a device such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

  First, the main control board M, game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of information for the game, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, the progress of games such as special games and specific games. A game progressing means MP for controlling the game state, a game state temporary storing means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state and the like, and a fraud detection information managing means ME for controlling processing relating to errors and fraud detected by the gaming machine ME (and, Fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb) for temporarily storing information relating to error detection and fraud detection, and measures the entry status into various entrances, or relates to entry status into various entrances Maintenance mode control means MO that controls the process of executing display, and various game information on the game peripheral device side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol {for example, 16R large Information transmission control means MT (and 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss), information on variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal / state information / end signal, hold information, etc. A command transmission buffer MT10) for accumulating untransmitted commands, an external signal output control means MG for outputting information on a game to the hall computer HC via an external relay terminal board G, and game balls for various winning openings. And a prize-ball payout determining means MH for controlling the prize-ball payout control board KH so as to pay a predetermined prize-ball based on a winning.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like), and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entering each starting opening during variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. is doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the ball entering determination means MJ10 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game starting port A10 (and the first main game starting port confirmation sensor A11s2). Judgment means MJ11-A, a second main game starting mouth entrance judging means MJ11-B for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game starting opening B10, and a game ball for the auxiliary game starting opening H10. Auxiliary game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H to determine whether or not has flown, and whether or not a game ball has entered the first prize hole C10, the first prize hole entrance determination Means MJ11-C10 and the second big winning opening C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second big winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C20 and the general winning opening P10 General winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-P for determining whether or not It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered 80, it is determined whether or not the game ball enters (detects discharge) the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. Total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 that counts the number of relevant balls) and temporary entry related information for temporarily storing information relating to the entry into the entry port. With the storage means MJ10b, under a specific situation (for example, a specific game state such as a non-stochastic variation game state and a non-time shortened game state, etc.), the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 is entered. A starting mouth entrance number counter MJ12c for measuring the number of game balls played, and a general winning opening P10 under a specific situation (for example, a particular gaming state such as a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state). I entered the ball Has a generally ball entrance counter MJ13c for measuring the number of tricks sphere, the.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game starting opening A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and a second main game starting port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main number) according to the determination result. Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired, and the auxiliary game random number for acquiring the random number based on the determination result. And an acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H. That.

  Here, the "random number" in the claims and the specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or "allocated by the type of random number (e.g., winning random number or variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing a value along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears (initial value). ) Is defined by a value having an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  Next, the holding control means MJ30, the holding digestion control means MJ31 for controlling the processing relating to the holding digestion and the fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the fluctuation permission of the first main gaming symbol is not down. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, the first for holding the random number on the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the variation permission of the first main game symbol is given based on the determination result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the variation permission of the second main game symbol is not down, and based on the determination result, The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the fluctuation permission of the second main game symbol comes down, and the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol Going down It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the auxiliary game side random number acquired in a situation where it is not stored, and the random number is held in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the variation permission of the auxiliary game symbol is obtained based on the determination result. It has an auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for doing.

  Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four random numbers, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. In order to temporarily store in the form, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively. Have

  Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not to shift to the special game and whether or not to open the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d. The symbol content determining means MN40 for determining and the variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol based on each random number are provided. Here, the win / loss lottery means MN10 is a first main game win / win lottery means MN11-A for performing win / win lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game win / win lottery means for performing win / loss lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game win / loss lottery means MN11-H for performing win / loss lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game win / loss lottery means MN11-A, the second main game win / win lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game win / loss lottery means MN11-H are referred to when the win / win lottery regarding the first main game symbol is performed. The first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A, and the second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B that is referred to when the win / win lottery regarding the second main game symbol is performed, and the win / loss lottery about the auxiliary game symbol Each has an auxiliary game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and acquisition Based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result. Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or losing. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol relating to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and a second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number). It has auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the winning / losing result / game state. Further, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / losing result / game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ according to the game state (for example, regular game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table. ).

  Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling the stop display after changing the game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are zero-clearable first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals. , And the like, a timer can be mounted on the same counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is further provided with an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product B11d is satisfied. 2nd main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening / closing condition judging means MP21-B and second main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game starting mouth electric auditors object B11d. -B, the game ball remaining in the second main game starting port electric auditory product B11d after closing the second main game starting port electric auditory product B11d is detected by the second main game starting port entrance detecting device B11s. It has a second main game starting opening entrance waiting timer MP22t2, which counts the time to wait until.

  Next, the special game control means MP30, the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transition condition is satisfied, the content of the special game (Specifically, a special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, a time between rounds, etc.) is determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second special winning opening C20 under predetermined conditions, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first special winning opening) It has a special game time management means MP34 for performing opening and closing times of C10 and the second special winning opening C20, and a distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing a distribution game. Here, the special game execution means MP33 is the first and second special winning opening electric prize opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric prize C11d and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t that manages round time, an open timer MP34t2 that measures the opening time of the special winning opening, and a first special winning opening C10 (or a second special winning opening C20). The game ball remaining in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) after being closed is detected by the first big winning opening winning detecting device C11s (or the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s). It further has a special winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3, which measures the time to wait until. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table. Although not shown in detail, is a table that defines the special winning opening to be opened, the maximum number of rounds, the content of execution of one round, etc. Also, the first round is executed after the special game is started. The start demo time, which is the waiting time until the game is played, the end demo time, which is the waiting time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, etc., are also predetermined in this table).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has a time saving end condition judging means MP52 for judging. Each of them has a time saving counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving. Here, the probability variation gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning or losing lottery of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol has a higher probability than the non-stochastic variation gaming state, and the time saving gaming state. The mean value of the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time shortened game state, and / or the second main game starting port electric accessory per unit time It means a game state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time shortening. function). Furthermore, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a winning symbol with a high probability, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is relatively extended ( Open time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game without time limit) except for). That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The probability variation end condition determining means MP51 and the time saving end condition determining means MP52 perform, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability for each symbol variation. It may have a function (a so-called pachinko game machine having a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB, the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop) First / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, ON / OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of hours saved, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the currently changing first or second main game symbol (first or second main game symbol for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H is an auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (the auxiliary game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, the prize ball payout determination means MH sends and receives the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj (and transmission / reception) for transmitting / receiving information on payout of prize balls (and error detection and fraud detection) to / from the prize ball payout control board KH side. Payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) which temporarily stores the information, a prize ball number counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls, and the payout of prize balls is not completed (prize ball payout). Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information related to unpaid prize balls (which has not received information related to payout completion from the control board KH side).

  Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stop display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have. Regarding the first main game starting opening A10, the first main game starting opening entrance detecting device A11s for detecting the entrance to the first main game starting opening A10, and the entrance is a normal entrance. It has a first main game starting opening confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming whether there is any, and only at one of the entrances (particularly only at the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s) Is detected, the processing relating to the fraudulent act or the error occurrence is executed (details will be described later). In addition, when double-checking the incoming ball using two sensors in this way, it is necessary to use sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, a non-contact photo sensor and a contact physical switch) in combination. However, it is suitable for detecting fraud.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first / second main game common peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (big hit). And a second big winning opening C20, a general winning opening P10 for paying out the game ball when the game ball wins, and a winning status display device capable of displaying the status of entering the various entrances. From J10, an out port C80 for taking in a game ball that has not entered the starting port or winning port of the game ball fired in the game area D30 into the gaming machine, and a starting port, an entrance port, or an out port C80 A total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for detecting a game ball discharged from the game machine, which is provided on a path for discharging the game ball taken into the game machine to the outside of the game machine, is provided.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has a possible auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control section) SM, the display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the determination processing and the display control processing of the effect content related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 for controlling, an error notification control means SM30 for controlling error notification when an error occurs, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub controller SS side. The above means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing the symbol information and the display instruction information regarding the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the determination process and the display control process of the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the holding of the design that controls the number of decorative symbols held and the reserved display process. The information display control means SM22, the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, the notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the notice effect content determination process and the display control process, and the reach effect content. Reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the determination process and the display control process.

  Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining whether or not an error has occurred.

  Here, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, and is related to the design symbol display content determination means SM21n that determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol, and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. Design information related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop design information, various flags, etc.), and a design variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decorative design. ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

  Next, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 has a drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to suspension of a decorative symbol.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect (in this example, displayed on the back of the decorative pattern, the possibility of executing the special game based on the information about the hold) Background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of (effect for informing / notifying) and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect (in this example, the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display, and the degree of expectation of transition to the special game in the change). In order to temporarily store the information regarding the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and the display timing of the effect suggesting / notifying the possibility of executing the special game based on the information regarding the hold, and the information regarding the notice effect display. The notice production related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, reach effect (mainly the reach state by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol and stopped and displayed). It is an effect that is executed after being notified that it has become, but it also includes the effect that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative pattern even if the reach state is not reached.) It has a reach effect display content determination means SM25n to be determined and a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information relating to the reach effect display.

  Next, the effect display unit (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub-information transmission / reception control unit SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and the image that displays the image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. Display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control section SM side and information related to various image displays.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown, initialization of registers, setting of input / output ports, etc.), in step 1002, the main control board M causes the RAM clear button. Check the input port of, and whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E is operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game hall intentionally clears the contents of RAM. To determine. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control unit MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1012, the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power interruption stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and in step 1014, The acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later). It is also possible), the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M causes an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 10B is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms), in step 2000, the main control board M executes a later-described incoming ball detection process. Next, in step 1100, the main control board M executes a later-described auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric auditors product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes a later-described special game operating condition determination process. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 2100, the main control board M executes the number of entered balls determination process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes a fraud detection information management process. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 3000, the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.) described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was used.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. To be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interruption), in step 1020, the main control board M sets information (for example, a checksum) when the power is cut off based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2150, the ball entrance determination means executes an auxiliary game starting opening ball entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the entry determination means executes a main game starting opening entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the entry determination means executes a later-described first (second) special winning opening entry detection process. Next, in step 2400, the winning determination unit executes a general winning opening detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2500, the incoming ball determination means executes a later-described discharged ball detection process. Next, in step 2600, the entrance determination means executes an out entrance detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2700, the entry determination means executes the prize ball determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag is off. To do. If Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination unit MJ11-H determines that the input from the auxiliary gaming starting entrance detecting device H11s is the entering detection time (above that time, auxiliary playing starting opening). When the ball entrance detection device H11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is on for more than the time it is considered that a ball has entered the auxiliary game starting opening H10). In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game starting flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2158, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-H detects the input from the auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s at the detection end time (above that time, auxiliary game start). When the mouth entrance ball detection device H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for more than the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance ball detection device H11s). If Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game starting opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The process shifts to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2154 or step 2160, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the main game starting mouth entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the first main game starting opening entrance determination unit MJ11-A refers to the entrance related information temporary storage unit MJ10b, and determines whether the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag is OFF. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-A inputs from the first main game starting entrance entrance detecting device A11s as the entrance detection time (more than that time, When the first main game starting opening entrance detecting device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the input is on for at least the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the first main starting opening A10). If Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game starting flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, at step 2210, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game starting entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .

  Next, at step 222-1, the first main game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-A determines that the current game state is a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game is It is determined whether the time saving flag is off). It should be noted that the case of the non-time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is off, or may be the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is off (when the opening / extending function of the electric accessory is not activated). Further, the case of the time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time saving flag is on, or may be the case where the auxiliary game time saving flag is on (when the opening / extending function of the electric accessory is operating). If Yes in step 2221-2, in step 2212-2, the first main game starting opening entrance determination unit MJ11-A determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). To determine. If Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-A increments the counter value of the starting mouth entrance number counter MJ12c by 1, Move to 2222.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the input from the incoming ball number counter MJ10c is a detection time (if the first main game starting mouth incoming ball detection device A11s has not detected the input for the time or more, the game It is determined whether or not the ball is off for at least the time it is considered that the ball has passed the first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Next, in step 2214, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game starting entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, at step 2215, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game starting mouth long time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , And proceeds to step 2222. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Next, at step 2222, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag is off. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B inputs from the second main game starting entrance entrance detecting device B11s as the entrance detection time (more than that time, When the second main game starting mouth entrance detecting device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the player is on for more than a time period in which it is considered that there is a ball entering the second main game starting mouth B10. If Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game starting entrance valid period flag is turned on. Or not. If Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game starting opening entrance determination unit MJ11-B turns on the second main game starting flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. . Next, at step 2230, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game starting entrance detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .

  Next, at step 2231-1, the second main game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-B determines that the current game state is a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game is It is determined whether the time saving flag is off). If Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, whether or not the second main game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-B is not currently executing the special game (the condition device operation flag is off) To determine. If Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B increments the counter value of the starting mouth entrance number counter MJ12c by 1 (increment), Moving to 2240. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time shortening flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10, 1 is added to the counter value of the starting opening entering ball number counter MJ12c. It is configured.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period in which the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 is not valid), in step 2232, the second main game starting opening entry determination The means MJ11-B determines that there is an illegal ball entry in the second main game starting port B10, sets a second main game starting port illegal ball entering command (command to the sub-control board S side), and step 2240 Move to. Even if No in Step 2231-1, Step 2231-2, or Step 2224, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2233, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination unit MJ11-B detects the input from the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s for a detection time (more than that time, If the second main game starting mouth entrance detecting device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s). judge. If Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B has the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off. Next, in step 2238, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game starting entrance long time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , And proceeds to step 2240. Even if No in step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, at step 2240, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining unit MJ11-A (second main game starting entrance determining unit MJ11-B) determines the first main game starting entrance detecting unit A11s (first 2 Whether or not the main game starting mouth entrance detection device B11s) is on for more than the fraud detection time (the time that exceeds the time detected as a normal entrance and is determined to be fraudulent) To determine. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining unit MJ11-A (second main game starting entrance determining unit MJ11-B) stores the entrance related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. The first (second) main game starting opening long time detection flag in the flag area is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, if No in step 2240, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2350).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) special winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance determining means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, It is determined whether or not the 1 (second) special winning hole detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the first special winning opening winning determination device MJ11-C10 (the second special winning entrance determining device MJ11-C20) determines whether the first special winning opening winning detecting device C11s (first Is the input from the two major winning opening winning detection devices C21s) on for at least the detection time of the ball (the time when the input detecting device detects the input, it is considered that there is a ball at the entrance) Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the first special winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entrance determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , It is determined whether or not the flag during the first (second) special winning opening valid period is ON. If Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entering determining means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (2nd) special winning opening ball flag inside is turned on. Next, in step 2360, the first special winning opening ball entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the special winning opening is not valid), in step 2361, the first special winning opening entry determining means MJ11-C10 ( The second special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) determines that there is an illegal entrance in the special winning opening, and the first (second) special winning entrance illegal entering command (to the sub-control board S side) Command) and shifts to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2362, the first special winning opening winning determination device MJ11-C10 (second special winning opening winning determining device MJ11-C20) is the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s. When the input from (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) is a detection time {when the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detecting device C21s) has not detected the input. , It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the first big winning award winning detecting device C11s (second big winning award winning detecting device C21s)}. If Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) special winning opening detection continuation flag inside is turned off. Next, in step 2368, the first special winning opening winning determination unit MJ11-C10 (second special winning opening determining unit MJ11-C20) is located in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. The 1 (second) special winning opening long time detection flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

  Next, in step 2370, the first special winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C20), the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening When the input from the prize detection device C21s is an illegality detection time (when the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects the input, the first big winning opening C10 is detected. It is determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the (second big winning opening C20) is detected}. If Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the first special winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C10 (second special winning entrance entering determining means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag therein is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2370, the next process (process in step 2400) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. The general winning opening P10 is a sensor for detecting the entrance of a game ball, which is a ball entrance that pays out a prize ball when a game ball enters, but does not affect the progress of the game. It is equipped with a winning opening detection device P11s. In addition, the winning determination means MJ10 has a general winning entrance determination means MJ11-P for determining whether or not a player enters a general winning opening.

  First, in step 2402, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P refers to the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the general winning entrance detection continuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (equal to or more than the general winning entrance entrance detecting device. When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is on for more than the time when it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening. If Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening entry flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2410, the general winning opening winning determination unit MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the winning related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. Next, in Step 2411-1, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time reduction flag is OFF) is determined. If Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the general winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-P determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). To do. If Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c (increment), and proceeds to step 2420. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is the entrance detection time (more than the time, general winning entrance entrance When the detection device does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for a period of time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning opening detection device). If Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2418, the general winning opening entry determining means turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. Even if No in step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2, or step 2412, the process moves to step 2420. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the operation flag is OFF), when a game ball enters the general winning opening P10, 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

  Next, in step 2420, the general winning a prize entrance determination device MJ11-P detects an input from the general award winning entrance detecting device as an illegal detection time {the general winning a prize entrance detecting device detects the input. In this case, it is determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the time when it is considered that an illegal ball has entered the general winning opening}. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning a prize entrance determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning a prize long time detection flag in the flag area of the prize related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and then Processing (processing of step 2500) is performed. Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the ball detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input, the total is detected. It is determined whether or not the discharge confirmation sensor C90s has been turned on for a time longer than the time it is considered that a ball has entered. If Yes in step 2504, in step 2506 the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2502, at step 2510, the total discharge confirmation sensor MJ11-C90 detects the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s at the detection end time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or more). If not, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for more than the time it is assumed that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has passed. If Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2514, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next process (process of step 2600) ). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the out-port entrance detecting process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 refers to the entrance-related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the out-hole detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the out-mouth entrance determination device MJ11-C80 determines that the input from the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s is the entrance detection time (equal to or more than the time, the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is on for more than a time (when it is considered that there is a ball in the outlet C80). If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the process of step 2620. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out mouth entrance determination device MJ11-C80 detects the input end time of the out mouth entrance detecting device C80s (equal to or more than the time, the out mouth entrance detecting device C80s). Does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for more than the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-hole detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2615, the out-mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-hole long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process moves to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the out-mouth entrance determination device MJ11-C80 detects that the input from the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s is a fraudulent detection time (when the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s has detected the input. If it is, it is determined whether or not it is on for more than the time it is considered that an illegal entrance into the outlet C80 is performed). In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the out-outlet entrance determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-outlet long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next process The process proceeds to (processing of step 2700). On the other hand, if No in step 2620, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the award ball payout determination means MH informs the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb that the award ball associated with the first main game starting opening A10 is to be paid out (for example, the award ball payout number). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process moves to step 2712.

  Next, in step 2712, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determination means MH provides the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb with information indicating that the prize balls associated with the second main game starting opening B10 are paid out (for example, the prize ball payout number). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2722. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process moves to step 2722.

  Next, at step 2722, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to check whether the first (second) special winning opening entry flag is on or not. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the prize-ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) special winning opening entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2724, the prize sphere payout determination means MH determines the count value of the prize sphere number counter MHc as the number of prize sphere payouts (in this example, 13) related to the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20). ) Is added. Next, at step 2728, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb with the information that the prize balls relating to the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20) are to be paid out. (For example, information relating to the number of prize balls paid out) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process moves to step 2732.

  Next, in step 2732, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the prize-ball payout determination means MH turns off the general prize-winning ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2734, the prize-ball payout determination means MH adds the prize-ball payout amount (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize-ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize-ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize-ball information temporary storage means MHb with information that the prize-balls related to the general winning a prize are to be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize-ball payouts). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, if No in step 2732, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1100). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out of the first main game starting opening A10 and the number of prize balls paid out of the second main game starting opening B10 are the same three balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of prize balls paid out may be changed. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out of the first main game starting opening A10 may be changed to 4 balls, and in such a case, the number of prize balls paid out of the second main game starting opening B10. May be 1 to 3 balls, which is less than the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game starting opening A10.

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-H refers to the inside of the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether the auxiliary game starting flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game starting opening entrance determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game starting flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not the holding balls are the upper limit (for example, four). . If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H holds a ball with the random number set in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with information on how many pieces are held. Is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Even if No in Steps 1102 and 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric auditors opening flag is OFF. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and the holding ball for the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag). Along with the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time saving flag). When is ON, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is OFF) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol "D0, D1, D2" is present, and the stop symbol which is a winning symbol is "D1, D2", which is caused by the stop of each. In the non-time-reducing game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing) and stopped. When the design is "D1, D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing). Also, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second close → 1 second open → 1 second close → 1 second open → close) When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed). The stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time-reducing game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time-reducing game.

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game time shortening flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball concerned with the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is reached. To do. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired assist. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

  Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “win” (D1, D2 in this example). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the hit pattern and the game state of the auxiliary game side, and is in an open mode (for example, at the time shortening game). In the case of the hit symbol "D1", the opening mode is 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed, and in the case of the hit symbol “D2”, 0.2 Second open, 0.8 second closed, 5 second open) is determined, and the second main game start opening electric auditors' product opening timer MP22t-B is a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric auditors. Set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric auditors opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starting mouth electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B, and then the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditor Object B11d is opened. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B is in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and is a flag during the second main game starting opening valid period. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B to determine the opening time of the electric auditors. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main gaming starting mouth electric auditors object B11d, and at the same time, the auxiliary gaming state. The electric accessory open flag in the flag area of the memory means MB10-H is turned off. Next, at step 1248, the second main game starting opening electric role object opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B sets the second main game starting opening entrance waiting timer MP22t2 to the electric accessory entrance waiting time (3 in this example). Seconds) to set and start. Next, at step 1250, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the second main game starting opening entrance waiting timer MP22t2, and whether the timer value is 0 or not. To judge. If Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B is in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The flag is turned off during the effective period, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300). Thus, in the present example, the valid period of the second main game starting port (the period during which the flag during the second main game starting port valid period is on) is the opening timing of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. From, until the electric accessory entrance ball waiting time (in this example, 3 seconds) elapses after the second main game starting mouth electric accessory B11d is closed, and the second main game starting mouth electric accessory B11d is closed. However, it is configured to wait for the entry of the game ball by the amount of the waiting time for entering the electric accessory.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, in the case of No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and in the case of No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, step 1240 or step 1250, The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1300).

  Further, in the present flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately shifts to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to check whether the first main game starting flag is ON. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game starting flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds the main game (especially the first main game side). It is determined whether the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning / non-winning lottery random number for determining the win / fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (hold generation command) relating to the acquired first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step S1), and the process proceeds to step 1322. On the other hand, if No at Step 1302 or Step 1306, the process proceeds to Step 1322.

  Next, in step 1322, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the second main game starting flag is ON. To judge. If Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game starting opening entrance determination unit MJ11-B turns off the second main game starting flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage unit MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds the main game (especially the second main game side). It is determined whether the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / missing lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, are acquired, similarly to the first main game content determining random number. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / unwinning random number for the first main game and the winning / unwinning random number for the second main game) The acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 sets the information (hold generation command) relating to the acquired second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmitting process of 1) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Even if No in step 1322 or step 1326, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol does not exist. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and moves to the next process (process of step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to executing the second main game symbol holding digest, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on winning order or both main game symbols in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the holding digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variation start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

  If Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the holding digestion control means MJ31, the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) Temporarily stored, while reading the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game The symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information that is temporarily stored is shifted (holding digest processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / winning lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming winning / winning lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming winning / winning lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, 1 Main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, winning lottery random number) Based on the main game symbol win / win lottery.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) that cannot shift the game state is not illustrated, but a small hit may occur (small hit is won).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game Referring to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), regarding the main game symbol based on the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) determines the first main game variation mode determining lottery corresponding to each game state. Referring to the table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol win / loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is configured to be determined based on the win / loss result of the main game symbol and the main game time saving flag state. That is, when the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is likely to be determined, and when the main game time saving flag is ON (time saving game state), It is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is short can be easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of description, the table is not configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that the table may be configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls. Absent. Furthermore, in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is on), the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side may be configured to be a relatively long time {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy to cause the second main game side to be held by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous to the player. This is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

  Next, in step 1415, the game content determination means MN, the command relating to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C (stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol) , Variation mode information, etc.) and a command relating to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control section SM side (control command transmission process of step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, The process moves to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C to change. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the next process (the process of step 1500) is performed.

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol fluctuation is finished (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). Stop the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and display the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C to determine whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the hour / hour counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining hour / hour) is 0. If Yes in step 1458, in step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then Process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1452, step 1454, or step 1458, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing related to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 has a specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short time flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in a step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c, and shifts to the next processing (processing of a step 1600). Even if No in step 1502 or step 1503, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. . If Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1990, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

  Next, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is OFF, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1614, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (for example, keeps releasing). Opening pattern, opening and closing pattern). Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first special winning opening electric winning combination C11d (or the second special winning opening electric winning combination C21d) to produce the first big winning opening C10 (or second large winning opening). The winning opening C20) is opened, and the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start. Next, in step 1623, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the first (second) special winning opening valid period flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and shifts to step 1624. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1614, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processes of steps 1616 to 1623.

  Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1625, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1625, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines the predetermined number of coins in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (for example, 10 balls). If Yes in step 1626, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1626, in step 1627, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening is set. It is determined whether or not it has passed. If Yes in step 1627, the process moves to step 1628. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1627, the process returns to the calling source of this subroutine.

  Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 determines the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). The drive is stopped to close the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) (processing related to closing is executed in the processing, but processing for actually transmitting a control command to the device) Is executed in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, in step 1629, the special game executing means MP33 sets the special winning opening entrance waiting timer MP34t3 to the special winning opening entrance waiting time (3 seconds in this example) and starts the operation. Next, in a step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the step 1631. Even if No in step 1625, the process proceeds to step 1631.

  Next, in step 1631, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special winning opening ball waiting timer, and determines whether the timer value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1631, in step 1632 the special game execution means MP33 turns off the entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the first (second) special winning opening valid period flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in a step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in a step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, a round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). It is determined whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds. If Yes in step 1638, in step 1640, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in a step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) indicating that the special game is to be ended in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control section SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Then, in step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 1602, step 1631 or step 1638, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the specific game control means MP50, the big hit symbol in stop is a probability variation big hit symbol (the main game symbol which becomes the probability variation game state after the special game ends, in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1706, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (100 in this example), and proceeds to step 1708. Next, in step 1708 and step 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1900 processing).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the maintenance mode control means MO executes the addition process of the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general ball number counter MJ13c to calculate the total ball number G. Next, in step 2104, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the total number of entered balls G calculated in step 2102 is a predetermined value (100 in this example) or more. If Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “starting entrance ball count counter value / general ball count counter value” as the ball entrance ratio N. Next, in step 2108, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the incoming ball ratio N calculated in step 2106 is within a predetermined range (in this example, 1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the maintenance mode control means MO displays a normal display (for example, "00" is displayed) on the entry state display device J10, and the process proceeds to step 2114. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2108, the maintenance mode control means MO displays an abnormality display (for example, “01” is displayed) on the entry state display device J10 in step 2112, and proceeds to step 2114. Next, in step 2114, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c and the general ball number counter MJ13c to zero, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, if No in step 2104, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900). Thus, in the present embodiment, every time the total number of game balls entered in the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening P10 reaches 100, the first main The winning ball ratio N between the total of the game balls that entered the game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 and the game balls that entered the general winning opening P10 is calculated, and the entering ball ratio N is calculated. The display executed by the entry state display device J10 is made different depending on whether or not the range is normal (“1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4” in this example).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the fraud detection information management process related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor, and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is continuously turned on for a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in step (3), and is intended to remove the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously turned on after a predetermined number of interrupts. The same meaning is said when the term is “predetermined number of times consecutively”). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the fraudulent radio wave has been detected, and turns on the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. The procedure moves to step 1912. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1902, in step 1906, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of the fraudulent radio wave has ended, and turns off the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

  Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is continuously turned on for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that fraud magnetism has been detected, turns on the fraud magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb, The procedure moves to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918 the fraud detection information management means ME determines that detection of fraudulent magnetism has ended, and turns off the fraudulent magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether the input from the door opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , And proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1922, in step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns off the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , And proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the fraud detection information management unit ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, and turns on the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. And shifts to step 1934. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1936, the fraud detection information management unit ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938 the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, and turns off the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the error management process related to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied (for the error that may occur and the control at the time of error occurrence, refer to FIGS. 73 and 74). If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the error management unit transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the fact that an error has occurred and error type information (by the control command transmission process of step 1990). (Sent to the sub-main controller SM side). Next, at step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied (see also FIGS. 73 and 74 for the error cancellation condition and the control at the time of error cancellation). In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the information indicating that the error is released (sub-main by the control command transmission process of step 1990). (Transmitted to the control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). Even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3000).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the prize-ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes an anti-payout control board reception control processing described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 31 shows a flow chart of the payout control board transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (the line that transmits the ON / OFF signal indicating whether or not the prize ball is being paid), and determines whether the payout signal is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout is currently executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and the unpaid prize balls (the prize ball payout command is still sent to the prize ball payout control board KH side). It is determined whether or not there is a prize ball that has not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the flag area of the injustice related information temporary storage means MEb, and it is an error that it is unsuitable to perform the prize ball payout related error ( For example, it is determined whether or not an error relating to a failure of the payout motor, a full tank, an out-of-bulb error, etc.) have occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. The award ball payout commands (see FIG. 32) corresponding to the number of awarded ball payouts are set in the award command temporary storage means MHsjb. Then, in step 3125, the payout information transmitting / receiving unit MHsj deletes the unpaid award ball information corresponding to the currently set award ball payout command from the unpaid award ball information temporary storage unit MHb, and shifts subsequent information. To execute. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and performs the next process (the payout control board in step 3200). Reception control processing). In addition, also in the case of No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (anti-payout control board reception control process of step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 32. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information that the command is a prize ball payout command and information about the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls. For example, 0 (0000B) means that there are 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means that there are 15 prize balls. .

  Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, although details of each error content will be described later, if the bit corresponding to each error is “0”, it means that the error has not occurred, and if the bit is “1”, the error is generated. Is occurring. Bit 0 relates to completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that prize ball payout is not completed.

  Next, FIG. 33 shows a flow chart of the payout control board reception control processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb, and determines whether or not the payout related information is received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME includes error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error, thereby paying the prize ball. The error information on the control board KH side is also managed (unified management) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220 the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and sets an error flag relating to an error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. Then, in step 3225, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj determines whether or not the prize-ball payout completion information is present in the received payout-related information. If Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command relating to the present payout completion) set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb, and then, The process (process of step 3500) is performed. Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process moves to the next process (process in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to confirm the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). On the external relay terminal board G, a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected (for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or winning of symbols, current game state (normal game state, Specific game state, special game state etc.) output terminal for game state information output, error information for outputting various error information detected by opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Output terminals and the like} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are terminals for outputting a signal output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a jackpot during jackpot (there are a plurality of jacks depending on the type of jackpot). ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a starting opening winning time output terminal that outputs a signal when a winning is won, and there is not enough balls in the prize ball tank KT. While the output terminal for outputting the signal while the ball is running, the output terminal for the number of special symbol confirmation times that outputs the signal when the special symbol determination stop, etc. of the game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator side It is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals of these important game related information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to send the game-related information and the payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is configured by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It does not mean that That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal in which the switch state is ON / OFF) by the section, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force brings the contact portion G2 into a closed state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected. Therefore, on the side of the hall computer HC, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal that is substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G by detecting the period of continuity. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side to the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable the one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the goto action, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and One-way communication is also possible by a photosensor having a light receiving unit (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is connected to the hall computer HC to receive light). It is possible to receive a signal by reading with a section).

  However, since the physical signal (switch state is turned on / off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC by one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the special symbol determination frequency, It is customary to make it possible to transmit only the information indicating that "one variation of the special symbol has ended".

  Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control substrate KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process to be described later with the main control board M. Next, at step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start / motor drive start) described later. Next, at step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor driving / at the end of prize ball payout) which will be described later. Next, at step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a later-described motor error time process, and proceeds to step 4100.

  Here, with reference to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize-ball payout control board KH of the gaming machine of the present embodiment controls transmission / reception of commands / information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. A transmission / reception control means 3100 for controlling, an error control means 3200 for controlling an error related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls upon receiving a prize ball payout command or a ball rental command. And a payout control unit 3300 that executes the payout process. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the transmission / reception control unit 3100 receives the information (for example, a command or a signal) from the main control board M or the card unit R and controls the reception control unit 3110, and transmits the information to the main control board M or the card unit R. And a transmission control unit 3120 that controls the control.

  Here, the reception control unit 3110 further includes a main-side reception control unit 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further has a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 in which error information relating to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side is temporarily stored.

  Next, the error control means 3200 detects an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing an on / off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 at the time of detection of a payout motor operation abnormality that controls error control at the time, error control means 3240 at the time of detection of a payout abnormality that controls error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and an error when a ball path abnormality is detected Error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality that controls the control, error control means 3260 at the time of detecting a payout motor abnormality that controls the error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. When a payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 that controls the error control at the time of hitting and a ball biting error of the prize ball payout unit KE10 occur A ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t that manages the error notification period, and a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs are further provided. There is. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the payout motor operation abnormality has been detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further has a payout interval extension control means 3251 for executing time extension processing of the payout interval relating to prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

  Next, the payout control unit 3300 has a payout process related information temporary storage unit 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 is for temporarily storing a payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing a state related to payout (for example, whether or not payout is in progress and whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred). During the payout process, the payout counter 3312 in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven in the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. In the meantime, the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator, and a predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation) It is paid out by a ball passing waiting timer 3315 for measuring time / motor stop time) and a unit payout operation. A unit payout counter 3317 which game balls speed is set can further have. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is an increment type timer. It is also possible to use a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the error control processing at the time of abnormality relating to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, in step 4110, the error control unit 3200 executes a payout motor operation abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes a payout abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes a ball path abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes a payout motor abnormality detection error control process described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an after-payment stop abnormality detection error control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of times of occurrence of abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described later is detected, and to flag the occurrence of error when the number of occurrence of abnormality is equal to or greater than a threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process on the prize ball payout control board KH side is not executed. This is a flag that is turned on in the case of (discharging motor operation abnormality). If Yes in step 4111, in step 4112 the payout motor operation abnormality detection time error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control unit 3230 increments the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 by 1. Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control unit 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 and determines whether the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. To do. If Yes in step 4114, in step 4115 the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or step 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

  Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is ON. If Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control unit 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage unit 3121, and the next process ( The process proceeds to the payout abnormality detection error control process of step 4120). Even if No in step 4116, the process moves to the next process (error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection of step 4120).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the payout abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of payouts of excessive game balls due to the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number is equal to or greater than a threshold value, This is to turn on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, when the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out based on a command transmitted from the main control board M side, and an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout) This is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). If Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and also stores the excess payout number in the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excessive payout accumulation counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. If Yes in step 4124, in step 4125 the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the process proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or step 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be eliminated only by turning on the power again, but this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the error may be eliminated by pressing the error release switch or when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is ON. If Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 sets an overpayment error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as payout related error information, and the next process (step 4140). Error control processing at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection in step 4140).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the ball path abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to detect (1) a prize ball tank KT or a prize ball payout unit KE10 in which no game ball exists (ball out) when a ball path abnormality described later is detected. Or, whether or not there is a small amount of game balls existing in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball shortage), an abnormality has occurred, and when an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, , Turning on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. Further, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to an out-of-balls abnormality or an out-of-balls abnormality is detected, a waiting time until the out-of-balls abnormality or the out-of-balls abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to produce. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag indicates that the motor driving is normally performed when the predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) are completed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This flag is turned on when it is determined that the payout is less than the predetermined number under the situation that the payout is determined. If Yes in step 4141, in step 4142 the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for occurrence of a ball out abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, the occurrence condition of the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example of a condition in which an out-of-balls abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path immediately above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball paths are There is an example in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided for each of (presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition of the ball shortage abnormality occurs. If Yes in step 4143, in step 4144 the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or step 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

  Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. If Yes in step 4151, in step 4152 the ball path abnormality detection error control unit 3250 determines whether or not the condition for eliminating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, there is no particular limitation on the condition for eliminating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality, and an example of the condition where the abnormality is eliminated when the occurrence condition of the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is unsatisfied Can be mentioned. If Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 causes the excitation timing (for example, 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms to be continuously excited to perform a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of 1 ms) or balls during normal operation. A passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of payout motor abnormality detection in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball becomes relatively slower than in the normal operation. The change is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of detecting the payout motor abnormality in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of payout motor abnormality detection in step 4170). Here, although the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, for example, after performing a payout operation for one ball at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) An example can be given in which the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. In addition, the sphere passage waiting time to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control processing according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error and to retry the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10) when a payout motor abnormality described later is detected. It is to execute a switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is ON. As will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball catching. If Yes in step 4171, in step 4172 the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, at step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets a payout motor error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a motor error elimination waiting time within the predetermined time.

  Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. If Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 4178, the retry operation control unit 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 in step 4179. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the predetermined number of steps in the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example in which it is set to the same number as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms in the retry operation described later can be given. Next, at step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j) in the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control unit 3261 causes the excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, the well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and the switching speed for one step for the retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation executing flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and shifts to the next processing (error control processing at the time of payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190). To do. Even if No in step 4177 or step 4178, the process shifts to the next process (error control process at the time of the payout stop abnormality detection in step 4190).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the payout stop abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to fatally affect the continuation of the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is a communication error between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, a communication error between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is switched from off to on. If Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 sets the error duration time (for example, 120 seconds) to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t, and starts the operation. Go to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t to determine whether the timer value is 0 or not. judge. If Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-3, the process moves to step 4192-1.

  Next, in step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and determines whether the switch non-passage error detection flag is switched from OFF to ON. If Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 sets the error continuation time (for example, 120 seconds) to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2, and starts the operation. The procedure moves to Step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. If Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control unit 3270 turns off the switch non-passage error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and then in step 4193-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-3, the process moves to step 4193-1.

  Next, in step 4193-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 causes a flag relating to an error including pressing of the error cancellation switch KH3a as an error cancellation condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, the payout motor error flag, the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 41944-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

  Next, in step 4194-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. If Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 and proceeds to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

  Next, in step 4195-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 causes the sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or more). Yes, etc.) is detected. If Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the step 4196- Move to 1.

  Next, at step 4196-1, the pay-out stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a tray (upper plate) full tank abnormality is detected. If Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the tray full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Next, at step 4196-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a tray full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a stoppage due to payment turns off the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a pan full cancellation command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

  Next, in step 4197-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R is detected. If Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 turns on the CR unit unconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221, and then in step 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of the detection of a payment stop abnormality turns off the CR unit non-connection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and then in step 4198. Move to -1.

  Next, in step 4198-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 to refer to a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, excessive payout error, prize ball device). Error, payout motor operation error, payout operation incomplete game ball detection, payout motor error, switch non-passage error) It is determined whether or not all flags are off.

  If Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control unit 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 to check the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the tray full. It is determined whether all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit non-connection error flag are off. If Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). When the process is temporarily stopped, the payout operation is restarted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then Process (process of step 4200).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information receiving process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is an information reception process from the main control board M (and the associated prize ball payout number setting process), and the second half of the flow is an information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, the process of receiving information from the main control board M in the first half (and the process of setting the number of payouts of prize balls accompanied therewith) will be described first. 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize-ball paying-out flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in the driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, the motor pause time). It is a flag that turns on when it is in the middle). If Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main-side reception control means 3111 refers to the main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command is received. If Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, at step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize ball payout. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). Thus, the process for setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed is completed. In addition, also in the case of No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

  Next, the information transmission processing to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 to determine whether or not the payout related error transmission flag is on. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" is used when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. The flag is turned on and turned off after the error notification is given to the main control board M side. If Yes in step 4225, in step 4230 the error control unit 3200 turns off the payout related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and shifts to the next processing (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

  Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the “prize ball payout completion flag” is a flag that is turned on when the payout control unit 3300 determines that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245 the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the prize ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (start prize ball payout)・ Motor drive starts)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (prize ball payout start / motor drive start)}. This is the end of the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start / motor drive start) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. Here, the process is a process at a previous stage of executing the motor driving process of the next step 4400, and the number of steps of motor driving is determined in response to the receipt of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. This is the process of setting. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize-ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 of FIG. 42) is on. If Yes in step 4305, in steps 4310 and 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn on the prize ball payout flag and turn off the prize ball payout start permission flag. To do.

  Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3). In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so as to pay out a predetermined number, and then proceeds to step 432. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. Moving to 4332.

  Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation (that is, the payout number planned in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, at step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the excited stator position specification counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position during the payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 causes the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) related to the stepping motor operation and the normal operation one-step switching speed (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, at step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation execution flag. Here, the retry operation in-execution flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (motor drive end / prize. When the ball payout ends)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4345, the motor has already been driven, so the routine proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4400 (when motor driving ends / prize ball payout end)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag means that the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time has elapsed ( The detailed condition will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the time of motor drive end / prize ball payout end)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and determines whether or not the counter value is over 0 (that is, whether all of the planned payout numbers by the current unit payout operation have been paid out. Whether or not) is determined. If Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is ON, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor is executed again without receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M as a trigger. If it is determined that not all of the planned number of payouts due to the current unit payout operation have been paid out, an abnormal occurrence that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error will be detected.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of ending the driving of the motor / at the end of paying out the prize ball) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. Here, the process is a termination process when all the scheduled driving ends of the motors are executed in the previous process (step 4300), or when all the scheduled prize payouts are executed. . Here, the motor drive end process is executed in steps 4402 to 4419, the game ball detection process is executed in steps 4420 to 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed in steps 4430 to 4462.

  First, the motor drive end processing will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to determine whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 and determines whether the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. 43. It is determined whether all the step numbers in the current unit payout operation set in step 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation in-execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, in step 4417 the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process moves to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the resting state of the stepping motor (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and then continuously excited to the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. Even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process moves to step 4420. This is the end of the motor drive end process.

  Next, the game ball detection processing will be described. First, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. If Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. Even if No in step 4420, the process moves to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time a ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and detection of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of entered balls may be subtracted. This is the end of the game ball detection process.

  Next, the prize ball payout end processing will be described. First, in step 4430, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the number of game balls corresponding to the payout is detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the payout incomplete game ball detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, if No in step 4431, the process moves to step 4435.

  Next, in step 4435 and step 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the prize ball payout flag and turns on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. If Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and based on the count value, the number of overpayments (for example, if the counter value is "-3", the number of overpayments is "3"). Is temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the following process (the prize ball payout control process of step 4500) is performed. (When executing motor drive)}. In this example, the overpayment is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the driving of the motor related to the payout is completed. Detection of excess payout (value of payout counter 3312 is less than 0 when a predetermined time (for example, a detection standby time sufficient for the gaming balls paid out by the drive to be detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed. (Determination of whether or not) is executed (that is, the overpayment is an unexpected situation in which the number of game balls exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out). It means that it occurred, and that this unexpected situation that is extremely unlikely to occur by design means that there is a malfunction in one of the payout mechanisms or that a fraudulent act occurred while performing the payout operation. Done Likely it means the high thing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control unit 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage unit 3221 (in this example, after the payout operation is completed, Even if the sphere passing waiting time of time has passed, if the number of game spheres related to the payout operation is not detected, it is determined that a switch non-passage error has occurred immediately. There is no limitation, and it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

  Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in steps 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. The process is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (during motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 2400 (during motor drive)}.

  Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal is received from the payout count sensor KE10s. To judge. If Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4500 ( When executing motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (during motor driving)}.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43) and corresponds to the predetermined step counter number. It is a flag that turns off when all the excitation is performed. Here, if Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control unit 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage unit 3313. Next, in step 4520, the payout control unit 3300 updates (increments by 1) the exciting stator position specifying counter value (j) in the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage unit 3314. Next, at step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excited stator position identification counter value (j) in the excited stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

  Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control unit 3300 refers to the presence / absence of a detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control unit 3200 determines whether the rotor is not rotating correctly, that is, whether a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. If Yes in step 4555, in step 4560 the error control unit 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311, and proceeds to the next process (motor error time process of step 4600). Even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600). If No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control unit 3200 temporarily stores the error flag. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at the time of motor error in step 4600).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of motor error according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to forcibly shift the motor drive to a rest state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 45, it is detected whether or not the motor is at a predetermined rotation position at a predetermined detection timing, and if the motor is not at the predetermined rotation position, a step out or the like is performed. The motor position abnormality flag is turned on. If Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control unit 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage unit 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control unit 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage unit 3313 and shifts to the next process (error detection error control process of step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the idle state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 44). 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process shifts to the next process (error control process at abnormality detection in step 4100).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52, a control process executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 5002, the sub-main control unit SM receives an initial process (for example, receives RAM clear information from the main control board M side) based on the information received from the main control board M side. In this case, the RAM on the sub-control board S side is initialized, and when various information commands are received from the main control board M side, performance related information at the time of power interruption is set and restored, etc.) is executed. . After that, the process shifts to a loop process of repeatedly executing (e) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM.

  Here, when (e) is executed, first, in step 5100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM causes a hold information management process to be described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 5400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an error notification execution process described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), The repeat processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which after resetting, the sub-main side routine (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) is looped.

  Further, the process of FIG. 7F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), the sub-main control unit SM receives the signal from the main control board M side in step 5004. Check the command input port (data signal line input port described above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command sent from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing is restored.

  Next, the process of FIG. 9G is a flowchart of a process at the time of power failure at the time of receiving a power failure signal from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 5014, the sub-main control unit SM stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, in step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying standby power to the save area. Next, in step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits execution of interrupt processing and shifts to a power interruption waiting loop. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM is provided with an area to which the backup power is automatically supplied even after the power is cut off (or a RAM to which the backup power is automatically supplied is provided), and the game-related information is stored in the area. It may be configured to be stored in.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management processing related to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. First, in step 5102, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a new suspension generation command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the (hold information related to) has been received. If Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 causes the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to store the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, "1" is added to the second main game (up to four). Next, in step 5106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22, based on the suspension occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the suspension information (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) is plotted. It is temporarily stored in the suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 5116.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5102, in step 5108, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 5108, in step 5110, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 5112, the design pending information display control means SM22 deletes the pending information relating to the symbol variation from the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining pending information. Next, in step 5114, the sub game control means (sub main control portion) SM accesses the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. . Next, at step 5116, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12 and the second hold display section SG13). The same number of holding display lamps as the figure holding counter value in the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5400). When the result in step 5108 is No, the process proceeds to step 5116.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. First, in step 5402, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 5402, in step 5404 the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5406, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n), the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). Stop design / variation mode related to the main game design), and reference to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop design of the decorative design (for example, when the stop design related to the main game design is a jackpot design) Is a flat pattern such as "7,7,7", in the case of a lost design, a random pattern such as "1.3.5"} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game symbol is short time If it is a fluctuation, non-reach, if it is a long time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined} and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 5408, the packaging display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 5500). Transition. Even if No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5500).

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the packaging variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. Even if No in step 5502, the process moves to step 5510.

  Next, in step 5510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5511 the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the variation start timing of the decorative symbol on the basis of the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the diagram display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). , And proceeds to step 5530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the temporary symbol display related information storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If Yes in step 5516, in step 5518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 5020, the sub-sub controller SS side). Then, the process proceeds to step 5530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) causes the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control unit SM24 (and the reach effect display control unit SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process of step 5020). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 5530. Even if No in step 5520, the process moves to step 5530.

  Next, in step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board M side starts the main game). It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). If Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). Be done). Next, in step 5534, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero-clears) the packaging variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5536, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the packaging display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 5600). To do. Even if No in step 5510 or step 5530, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5600).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command is received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is the first hit (the big hit in the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state). ) Is not determined. If Yes in step 5606, the process moves to step 5610. On the other hand, if No in step 5606 (first hit), in step 5608 the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero-clears) the value of the number-of-apparatus-counting counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 5610.

  Next, in step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds (increments) 1 to the value of the number-of-resorts-counter SM23c2. Next, in step 5612 and step 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and makes a big hit on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616. Even if No in step 5602, the process proceeds to step 5616.

  Next, in step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG, based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (game property). It may be executed as needed based on the type of jackpot or jackpot). Next, in step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the number-of-apparatus-counting counter SM23c2, and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. If Yes in step 5618, in step 5620 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the jackpot being executed is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot, 7A.・ It is determined whether or not it is a big hit related to the 7B symbol. In the case of Yes in step 5620, in step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive holiday games during the specific game, the total number of coins acquired during the consecutive holiday game, and a plurality of types of identification). A command relating to the display of the effect during the special game or the specific game, which is displayed only when the conditions such as one or a plurality of combinations such as the effects all occur, is set, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command relating to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 5626.

  With such a configuration, based on the number of consecutive wins in the big hit (not counting the first hit), it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit a special effect, and the second main game starting opening. When a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by a ball entering during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is a first hit, since it is counted as the number of consecutive games, the second main game starting opening electric role It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold occurring during the longest opening of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as the ending effect generation conditions, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in the specific effect). , Etc.) may be regarded as being satisfied.

  Next, in step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5626, in step 5628, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 5630, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 5700). . Even if No in step 5604 or step 5626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5700).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the error notification execution processing according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. First, in step 5702, the error notification control means SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an error generation command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 5702, in step 5704 the error notification control means SM30 determines an error notification mode and an error notification end condition based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes error notification.

  Next, in step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above-described processing is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 5706, in step 5708, the error notification control unit SM30 ends the error notification related to the error satisfying the error notification end condition, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5020). Even if No in step 5702 or step 5706, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020).

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is off), and , The winning ratio of the main game starting opening (the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10) and the general winning opening in the state where the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) When the direction of the game nail is changed illegally by calculating and displaying on the incoming state display device in a different display mode depending on whether it is a normal incoming rate or an abnormal incoming rate Even if the direction of the game nail is changed due to a collision of a game ball or the like, it can be judged by the abnormal display of the ball entering state detection device, and a more fair game machine can be secured.

(Second embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the direction of the game nail (the state of the game nail) is normal, based on the ball entry ratio between the main game starting opening and the general winning opening. The mode for determining whether or not the state is normal is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for determining the state of the game nail different from that of the present embodiment is referred to as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2250 (second) and step 2300 (second), that is, after executing the special game control process described above in step 1600, in step 2250 (second), The control board M executes a base determination process described later. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes maintenance mode execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1900.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2509-1 (second) to step 2509-3 (second), that is, in step 2508, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 determines the total discharge confirmation number counter. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the MJ11c-90. Next, in step 2509-1 (second), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time is short). It is determined whether the flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2509-1 (second), in step 2509-2 (second), the total discharge ball confirming means MJ11-C90 is not currently executing the special game (the condition device operation flag is off. ) Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2509-2 (second), in step 2509-3 (second), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 is the normal time total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C91 {non-probability variation game state and In the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time shortening flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is displayed. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the counter for measuring the number of detected game balls}, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). In addition, also in the case of No in step 2509 (second) or step 2509-2 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). As described above, in the second embodiment, the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off), and the special game is not being executed ( In the case where the condition device operation flag is OFF), when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the entry of a game ball, it is configured to add 1 to the normal time discharge confirmation number counter value.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2706-1 (second) to step 2706-3 (second), step 2716-1 (second) to step 2716-3 (second), and step 2736-. It is about 1 (second) to step 2736-3 (second), that is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH applies the count value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the first main game starting opening. The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is added. Next, in step 2706-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time reduction flag is OFF) is determined. If Yes in step 2706-1 (second), in step 2706-2 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2706-2 (second), in step 2706-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction). To measure the number of prize balls to be paid out in the game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game short time flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) The counter value of the counter) is added with the prize ball payout number (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting opening, and the process proceeds to step 2708. Even if No in step 2706-1 (second) or step 2706-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2708.

  In step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout amount (3) related to the second main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2716-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the current gaming state is a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time reduction flag is OFF) is determined. If Yes in step 2716-1 (second), in step 2716-2 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing the special game (the condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2716-2 (second), in step 2716-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 to the second main game starting opening. The number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 3 balls) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2716-1 (second) or step 2716-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2718.

  In addition, after adding the prize ball payout number (10 balls in this example) relating to the general winning opening to the prize ball number counter value in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines in step 2736-1 (second). , It is determined whether or not the current game state is a non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time shortening flag is off). If Yes in step 2736-1 (second), in step 2736-2 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is not currently executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2736-2 (second), in step 2736-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the counter value of the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 is the prize related to the general winning opening. The number of balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. Even if No in step 2736-1 (second) or step 2736-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2738.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) of FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “baseball award ball number counter value / baseball total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100” as a base value. Here, the base value is an expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out for 100 game balls that have been shot in a situation where a special game has not been won, that is, a prize ball payout for the number of balls that have been shot. It is a percentage of the number. In the present embodiment, the base value is calculated only in the situation where the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off). Further, since all the game balls that have been fired are configured to pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, "all the game balls that have been fired = the total discharge confirmation number counter value", and "the non-probability variation game state and All game balls fired when the game is in a non-time-reduced game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). = Normal counter total discharge confirmation number counter value ". Next, in step 2254, the maintenance mode control means MO overwrites the base value calculated in step 2252 as the current base value, temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {step 2300 (second)}. As described above, in the present embodiment, the base value is calculated based on the normal total discharge confirmation number counter value and the normal prize ball number counter value, and is updated at any time. The method of calculating the base value is not limited to this, and the base value may be calculated every time a predetermined period has elapsed (an example of such a structure will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) of FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2302, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door open flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the firing handle D44 has detected a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the sensor detects that the firing is performed). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the current base value temporarily stored in the processing of step 2254 on the entry state display device J10, and the next processing (step 1900). Process). On the other hand, if No in step 2302 or step 2304, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the entry state display device J10 by executing two operations, that is, the opening of the door unit D18 and the predetermined operation of the firing handle D44. There is. The firing handle D44 is a member that can be operated by operating from the front of the gaming machine, but is not directly connected to the main control board M, and the main control board M determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 is performed. Things have become difficult. Therefore, in order to operate the maintenance mode by operating the firing handle D44 (display information relating to ball entry), the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the firing handle D44 has been operated. Need to be configured. A configuration for solving such a problem will be described later. It should be noted that the display conditions of the display relating to the other balls shown in this example may be the same as the display conditions of the ball entering state display device J10 illustrated in FIG.

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time shortening flag is off), And, in the state where the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the prize of the main game starting opening (the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10) and the general winning opening By calculating the base value from the number of balls paid out and the total number of discharges (number of shots), and displaying the calculated base value on the ball entering state display device, a more detailed game ball entry status can be obtained. You will be able to confirm.

  In the second embodiment, the player is configured not to display the base value on the entry state display device J10, that is, to execute the maintenance mode, and the maintenance is performed by a simple operation. The maintenance mode may be executed, and for example, the maintenance mode may be executed by operating the firing handle and the RAM clear button on the main control board M side.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a standby demo screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period, for example, when the firing handle has not been operated for 5 minutes. The standby demo screen will be displayed), and the maintenance mode will be displayed by operating the sub input button and entering the correct password while the password display screen is being displayed. You may comprise.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, as the display content displayed in the maintenance mode, prize number information (the number of game balls that have entered each of the various entrances) and the number of prize balls paid out may be displayed. As a specific example, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured so that a plurality of (for example, 32) dot displays can be turned on. However, it may be configured to display the number-of-wins information (the number of game balls that have entered each of the various entrances) and the number of prize-balls paid out by displaying the plurality of dots. In addition, by transmitting a command to the sub-control board S by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, when it is determined that the incoming ball ratio is abnormal), the predetermined condition is satisfied by lighting the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured to notify that the condition is satisfied, to notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied by voice from the speaker D24, or the like. Further, the main control board M may be configured to have a maintenance mode executing flag as a flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being executed. Specifically, when the maintenance mode executing flag is off. In the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20), while the fluctuation and stop symbol of the main game symbol is displayed, the maintenance mode executing flag is turned on. In the case, the main game symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20), enter the ball entrance (prize hole) targeted for prize ball payout You may comprise so that the information regarding a sphere (henceforth the information regarding a sphere) may be displayed.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the process until the base value is displayed The flow of is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) of FIG. 53 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 2308 (second variation 1), that is, when the firing handle D44 detects a predetermined operation in step 2304, in step 2308 (second variation 1), The maintenance mode control means MO sets a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub-control board S side and includes information on the current base value), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900). . In this way, the command for starting the maintenance mode is set from the main control board M to the sub control board S. Incidentally, the maintenance mode is a general term for a configuration for displaying information relating to the entry of a game ball into various entry ports, and the display on the above-mentioned entry state display device J10 and the effect display device SG described later. The display is also included in maintenance mode.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section SM side according to the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is step 5750 (second variation 1) in FIG. 7E, that is, in step 5750 (second variation 1), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 will be described later. The maintenance mode display process is executed, and the process proceeds to the hold information management process of step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5750 (second variation 1) of FIG. 59 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode start command {command set in step 2308 (second variation 1)} from the main control board M side is received. . In the case of Yes in step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value on the effect display device SG in step 5754, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 5100). On the other hand, if No in step 5752, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is Off), and in the state where the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), the main game starting port (first main game starting port A10 and second main game starting port B10) and general The base value is calculated on the side of the main control board M from the number of prize balls paid out from the winning opening and the total number of discharges (the number of shot balls), and the calculated base value is transmitted to the side of the sub control board S, and the sub control board S By configuring the side effect display device SG to display the base value, it becomes easy to configure the maintenance mode to be activated based on the operation of the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) on the front surface of the gaming machine.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the first modification from the second embodiment, the maintenance mode is started by operating the firing handle D44 and the door unit D18. It must be configured so that it can be detected on the M side. Therefore, a configuration suitable for starting the maintenance mode with the current electrical configuration of the game machine is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and hereinafter, a modification from the first modification from the second embodiment. Only will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2212-4 (second variation 2) and step 2231-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2212-2, the current special game. If it is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), in step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the first main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-A A command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a command relating to the fact that a game ball has entered the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10 or the general winning opening P10) is set (step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step S2), and the process proceeds to step 2222.

  In addition, in step 2231-2, if the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), in step 2231-4 (second variation 2), the second main game start entrance ball Judgment means MJ11-B is a start entrance ball input command (command to the sub-control board S side, the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10 or general winning opening P10 (Command relating to the effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 2240.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2411-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2411-2, if the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off) In step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P is a starting entrance entrance command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the first main game starting opening A10, The command relating to the fact that the game ball has entered the second main game starting opening B10 or the general winning opening P10) is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmitting process of step 1990), and step 2420. Process shifts to.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2509-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2509-2 (second), the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off. If it is), in step 2509-4 (second variation 2), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a discharge ball command (command to the sub-control board S side, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is a game ball). Is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section SM side in the second modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 5800 (second variation 2) and step 5900 (second variation 2) in FIG. 7E, that is, step 5800 (second variation 2), The sub-control board S executes a base determination process described later. Next, in step 5900 (second variation 2), the sub-control board S executes a maintenance mode display process, which will be described later, and shifts to the process of step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second variation 2) of FIG. 64 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5802, the sub control board S is set by a start entrance ball entering command from the main control board M side {step 2212-4 (second variation 2) or step 2231-4 (second variation 2)). Command} is received. If Yes in step 5802, in step 5804, the sub-control board S, the sub-side normal prize ball number counter SN10c {non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (main gaming probability variation flag is off and main gaming time saving flag is Off), and when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10 or the general winning opening P10 A counter for managing the number of balls paid out on the side of the sub-control board S, which is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S} with the counter value of the start mouth prize ball (3 balls in this example) After addition, the process proceeds to step 5806. On the other hand, if No in step 5802, the process proceeds to step 5806. Next, in step 5806, the sub control board S determines whether or not the general entry command {command set in step 2411-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side is received. . If Yes in step 5806, in step 5808, the sub control substrate S adds the general winning award prize sphere number (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the sub-side normal prize sphere counter SN10c, and then in step 5810. Process shifts to. On the other hand, if No in step 5806, the process proceeds to step 5810.

  Next, in step 5810, the sub control board S determines whether or not the discharge ball command {command set in step 2509-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 5810, in step 5812, the sub-control board S determines the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c {non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (main gaming probability variation flag is off and main gaming time saving flag is In order to manage the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s on the side of the sub control board S when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) The counter is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S} and the discharge number (1) is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 5814. On the other hand, if No in step 5810, the process moves to step 5814. Next, in step 5814, the sub-control board S calculates “sub-side normal prize ball number counter value / sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100” as a base value. Next, in step 5816, the sub-control board S overwrites the calculated base value as a current base value and temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5900 (second variation 2)}. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the side of the sub control board S.

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5900 (second variation 2) in FIG. 64 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5902, the sub control board S determines whether the door unit D18 is open (the door open flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 5902, in step 5904, the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 5904, in step 5906, the sub control substrate S displays the temporarily stored current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Even if No in step 5902 or step 5904, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100). As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, two operations, that is, opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub-input button (for example, off → on for 0.5 seconds or less → off) are executed. Thus, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG. The sub-input button SB is connected to the sub-control board S and is configured to be operated by an operation from the front of the game machine. That is, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG by opening the door unit D18 and operating from the front of the gaming machine. It should be noted that the display conditions of the display relating to the other balls shown in this example may be the same as the display conditions of the effect display device SG illustrated in FIG.

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine of the second modification from the second embodiment, the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main gaming probability variation flag is off and the main gaming time saving flag is Off), and in the state where the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), the main game starting port (first main game starting port A10 and second main game starting port B10) The main control board M counts the number of prize balls paid out to and from the general winning opening and the total number of discharges (the number of shot balls), and the counted result is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The sub-control board S is configured to calculate a base value based on the information related to the count received from the main control board M side and display the calculated base value on the effect display device SG on the sub-control board S side. As a result, most of the processing relating to the display of the entered state of the game ball (especially the display of the base value in this example) can be executed on the side of the sub control board S, and the data capacity used by the main control board M Can be reduced. Further, even when the maintenance mode is started, the maintenance mode can be started by opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button SB connected to the sub control board S side. Makes it easy to start maintenance mode. In addition, when displaying the base value (or the information relating to the above-mentioned ball entry) on the effect display device SG, it is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with other displays. Specifically, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display of the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, the hold display of the second main game side in the second hold display unit SG13, error It is desirable to configure such display (such as an error that the door open flag is turned on) and the display of the base value do not overlap.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, the calendar function using the RTC function (real-time clock, details of which will be described later) has an authentication key for each date (the authentication key is different for each date). It may be configured to display the maintenance mode when a correct input operation is performed on the sub input button.

  Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, as the input mode of the sub input button, there is a back command or a hidden command (the operation mode of the sub input button exists, but the operation mode is not notified to the player. The maintenance mode may be displayed by executing the operation mode).

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, the RTC function (real-time clock, details of which will be described later) is used to input a command only at a predetermined time (for example, perform a predetermined operation on a sub-input button). Yes) may be implemented and the maintenance mode may be displayed when the correct command is input.

  Further, in the second modified example from the second embodiment, winning information relating to which of the ball entrances and how many winning balls have been paid out is provided from the main control board M side to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S may be configured to total based on the received ball entry information, and the ball entry information may be the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, or the general winning. It may be a mouth, an auxiliary game starting mouth, an out mouth, a game ball that has passed the total discharge confirmation sensor, or the like.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the process until the base value is displayed The flow of is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment will be referred to as Modification 3 of the second embodiment, and only changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, an example of a memory map of the main control chip according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The main control chip is mounted on the main control board M. The memory map shows address spaces from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, a built-in ROM is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "2FFFH", a built-in RAM is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F3FFH", and a space from "FE00H" to "FEBFFH" is allocated to the space. Is assigned a register area (internal register area) built in each circuit in the main control chip. By causing the CPU to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to access the corresponding hardware.

  The built-in ROM is a first ROM area, which is an area mainly controlling the progress of the game (sometimes referred to as a usage area), and an area (mainly, an area for controlling processing related to error-related normal progress of the game Second ROM area, which is also referred to as a used area), and a first control area allocated to a space from "0000H" to "0ABCH" and from "1000H" to "1B6AH" The first data area allocated to the space is collectively referred to as the first ROM area, and the second control area allocated to the space from "2000H" to "2263H" and "2300H" to "234EH". The second data area allocated to the space up to the above is collectively referred to as the second ROM area. Note that the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity existing in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU exists in the second ROM area). Configured to be larger than the amount of data accessed from).

  The first ROM area stores a first control area in which a program code (an instruction code set for the CPU) is stored and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on this program code). And a first data area that is present. Although the memory map image in the first ROM area is shown in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

  The second ROM area stores a second control area in which a program code (an instruction code set for the CPU) is stored and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on this program code). The second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than that of the first control area (in other words, the second control area is located in the second control area and is accessed by the CPU). The program code capacity is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU), and the second data area is smaller in capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed by the CPU is It is smaller than the program data capacity to be accessed from the existing CPU). Further, the built-in ROM has a management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip are stored. Although the memory map image in the second ROM area is shown in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of an unused area are merely examples.

  It should be noted that the first ROM area may include a first control area (sometimes referred to as a used area control area) and a first data area (sometimes referred to as a used area data area), The area from the start address of the first control area to the end address of the first data area may be referred to as the first ROM area. Further, if the second ROM area includes a second control area (sometimes referred to as a control area outside the used area) and a second data area (sometimes referred to as a data area outside the used area) The area from the start address of the second control area to the end address of the second data area may be referred to as the second ROM area.

  Although the internal ROM is configured to have a plurality of unused areas, each of the plurality of unused areas may be configured to have a predetermined number (for example, 16 bytes) or more. The space between the data area and the second control area may be at least a predetermined number (for example, 16 bytes) or more, or conversely, the unused area may not be provided.

  It should be noted that there is no problem even if the address that is the unused area is changed, but it is preferable to provide an unused area between (the address between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 67, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the CPU are: Since they are arranged in a memory map with a space (addresses are not consecutive) and an unused area is sandwiched between them, the arrangement position of both program codes can be visually recognized in the program source code or the dump list. The above can be clearly separated (the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them). Similarly, an unused area is provided between the first control area and the second data area, and the first control area which is a control area related to the progress of the game and the data area related to the progress of the game. Since the unused area is sandwiched between the first data area and the first data area, the arrangement positions of both program codes can be visually clearly separated on the program source code or the dump list. In addition, since the leading address of the first data area is “1000H”, which is a sharp number, the design can be facilitated.

  Here, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area (area not filled) in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is suitable (for example, the unused area is filled with 0s, the used area is written in a young address, and the like). In addition, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, refer to a game machine with different specifications) It is preferable to configure such that there is no data to be stored or data to be used only for testing in the development stage). Further, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are packed in young addresses and used in the area (in the area). No unused area is provided (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0ABCH" are not used). Is preferred. In this example, all the bits of the unused area are "0", and any of the areas other than the unused area is "1" (not "0"). ing).

  Next, the built-in RAM is based on a first RAM area, which is an area (may be referred to as a usage area) for storing information based mainly on the progress of the game, and mainly on a process different from the normal progress of the game such as error-related. A second work area, which is an area for storing information (may be referred to as an area outside the used area), and a first work area allocated to a space from “F000H” to “F189H”; The first stack area allocated to the space from “F1ECH” to “F1FFH” is collectively referred to as a first RAM area, and the second work area allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F22EH”. , And the second stack area allocated to the space from "F3ECH" to "F3FFH" are collectively referred to as the second RAM area. The first stack area used when the program related to the first ROM / RAM area needs to internally store data is allocated to the space from “F1ECH” to “F1FFH” in the first RAM area. The second stack area used when the program related to the second ROM / RAM area needs to internally store data is allocated to the space from “F3ECH” to “F3FFH” in the second RAM area. (However, the number of bytes in each area is just an example). The first stack area may not be included in the first RAM area, and the second stack area may not be included in the second RAM area. In such a case, for example, from "F000H" The first RAM area is allocated to the space up to “F189H”, and the second RAM area is allocated to the space from “F210H” to “F22EH”. The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area.

  The first RAM area only needs to include a first work area (which may be referred to as a working area of the used area), and the first work area from the top address to the last address of the first stack area It may be referred to as a 1 RAM area. Further, the second RAM area only needs to include a second work area (which may be referred to as a work area outside the used area), and the area from the start address of the second work area to the end address of the second stack area It may be referred to as a second RAM area.

  Although the internal RAM is configured to have a plurality of unused areas, the plurality of unused areas may be configured to have a predetermined number (for example, 16 bytes) or more. The space between the stack area and the second work area may be at least a predetermined number (for example, 16 bytes) or more, or conversely, the unused area may not be provided.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1030 (second variation 3) to step 1032 (second variation 3).

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, the timer interruption process is started, and after the processes of steps 2000 to 1600 are executed as the process in the first ROM / RAM area, in step 1030 (second variation 3), the main control board M sets the second ROM / RAM. Executes a region processing call.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2250 (second), the main control board M executes the above-described base determination processing. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described above. Next, in step 1032 (second variation 3), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Become.

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the second embodiment provides the first ROM area and the second ROM area, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The data used in the first ROM / RAM area in the main control board M is configured by performing the processing for calculating the base value and the processing for displaying the base value in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area. The capacity can be reduced.

(Third Embodiment)
In the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the ball entrance ratio N (starting entrance ball count counter value / general ball count counter value) or base value (the number of prize balls paid out at a predetermined ball entrance is defined as a game ball). Any value of 100 times the value obtained by dividing by the total number of fired balls is displayed as the display of the information regarding the entering ball, but the display method of the display regarding entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration relating to a method of displaying information regarding entering a ball different from the present embodiment and the second embodiment will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 1024 (third) and step 1026 (third) in the processing of FIG. 11C and step 2300 (third) of the processing of FIG. Yes, that is, in FIG. 7C, in step 1024 (third), the main control board M erases the display of the ball entering state display device J10. Next, in step 1026 (third), the main control board M turns off the maintenance mode flag and moves to step 1020. As described above, the maintenance mode (display on the ball entering state display device J10) described later is configured to be ended by powering off. Further, in the same figure (b), after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process described later, and executes the process of step 1900. Transition.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to step 2300 (third) of FIG. 69 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2310, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. If Yes in step 2310, it is determined in step 2312 whether or not a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long pressing for 10 seconds or more) has been performed. It should be noted that, in this processing, only the long press started from the power-on state is determined, and when the operation of Yes in Step 1002 is executed, that is, the RAM clear button is long-pressed from the power-off state. When the pressing is started, the result of this processing is not Yes. That is, when the power-on switch Ea (which may be referred to as a power switch Ea) is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, the result in step 1002 is Yes, but the RAM clear button is continuously pressed from that state. Also, in step 2312, it does not become Yes. On the other hand, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the result in Step 1002 will not be Yes, and then the RAM clear button will continue to be pressed (the RAM clear button will be pressed for a long time). , Yes in step 2312.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the maintenance mode control means MO, the prize ball number counter MHc {each of the ball entrances (first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port to be targeted for prize ball payout). B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20), based on the entry into the ball, the cumulative number of winning prize payouts, which was decided after the power was turned on The counter value of is displayed on the incoming state display device J10. Next, in step 2316, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the processing in step 2318. On the other hand, if No in step 2310, the process proceeds to step 2318. Next, in step 2318, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (the pressing in this processing is different from the long press, and the RAM clear button is turned off → 0.5 seconds). It is determined that the button has been pressed once when the following on-> off). In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the maintenance mode control means MO refers to the maintenance mode display content table and displays the display content corresponding to the display number next to the currently displayed display number in the ball entering state. It is displayed on the display device, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2312 or step 2318, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

  The table in the upper right part of the figure is an example of the display content table during maintenance mode. In the maintenance mode display content table, display contents (counter values) corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 are set. Every time the RAM clear button is operated, "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ・The display contents on the incoming state display device J10 are switched to the display contents corresponding to "...". As a specific example of the display on the ball entering state display device J10, when the RAM clear button is pressed for 10 seconds or more from the power-on state, the display content of the display number 1 is displayed on the ball entering state display device J10. Number of balls counter MHc {Each entrance for which prize balls are to be paid out (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening) When the RAM clear button is pressed after that, the counter value of the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on of the prize ball payout number for which the determination of the prize ball payout is made based on the entry into C20) is displayed. In the entry state display device J10, the starting opening entry number counter MJ12c which is the display content of the display number 2 (the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 under a specific situation) The power to measure the number Counter value is displayed, and then the RAM clear button is pressed, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (total discharge confirmation sensor) which is the display content of the display number 3 on the ball entering state display device J10. When the counter value of the counter for measuring the number of detected game balls (C90s) is displayed, and then the RAM clear button is pressed, the number of general balls, which is the display content of the display number 4, is displayed on the ball state display device J10. The counter value of the counter MJ13c (a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation) will be displayed. In addition, when the RAM clear button is pressed while the general entry number counter value which is the display content of the display number 4 is being displayed, the prize ball number counter value which is the display content of the display number 1 is displayed. Will be done.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the maintenance mode in which the information regarding entry can be displayed by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on. Is configured to be started, and the type of display in the maintenance mode is changed every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, thereby making it possible to confirm information relating to a plurality of types of ball entry. be able to.

  In addition, in the third embodiment, as a condition for ending the maintenance mode when the maintenance mode is being executed, power-off recovery and various entrances (for example, an exit C80, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, etc.) It is also possible to enter a ball into a ball entrance which is not subject to the prize ball payout. Incidentally, the condition for ending the maintenance mode may be the entry of the game ball into the specific entry opening which triggers the execution of the special game by entering the ball.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear button is being pressed, the input port of the RAM clear button is in the on state, and in such a case, the RAM clear button is held for a predetermined time (for example, Whether or not the button has been pressed (for 10 seconds or more) is not determined (Yes in step 2312), and the maintenance mode is not started. However, if the input port of the RAM clear button changes from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more), The maintenance mode is configured to be able to start execution. Whether or not the RAM clear button is operated is determined by checking the input port of the RAM clear button a plurality of times at predetermined intervals, but when the power is turned on while the RAM clear button is being pressed (step (At the time of determination at 1002), the input port of the RAM clear button is checked at intervals shorter than the interval at which the interrupt processing is executed, and after the power is turned on (at the time of determination at step 2312), the interrupt processing is performed. The input port of the RAM clear button is checked at the execution interval.

(First modification from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the third embodiment, the entry status of the game balls into the various entrances is always counted after the power of the game machine is turned on, and the display based on the count status is used as the information regarding the entry. Although it is configured to display, the method of displaying the situation regarding entry is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration relating to a method of displaying information relating to a ball entering, which is different from the present embodiment to the third embodiment, is referred to as a modified example 1 from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail. I will describe.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 1) in the process of FIG. 11B, that is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600 of FIG. In step 2300 (third variation 1), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process, which will be described later, and shifts to the fraud detection information management process in step 1900.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2509-4 (third variation 1) and step 2509-5 (third variation 1). That is, in step 2508, 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, and then in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 is operated by the handle. It is determined whether or not the in-operation flag (a flag that is turned on when the firing handle D44 is operated) is on. If Yes in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), in step 2509-5 (third variation 1), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a total discharge maintenance counter MJ11c-C92 (increment counter, It is a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s during the operation of the firing handle D44 during the maintenance mode, and is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M). 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the process moves to the next process (process in step 2600). With this configuration, the total discharge number maintenance counter value is added during the period in which the player operates the firing handle D44.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2706-4 (third variation 1), step 2706-5 (third variation 1), step 2716-4 (third variation 1), step 2716-5 (third variation). 1st variation, step 2736-4 (third variation 1), and step 2736-5 (third variation 1). That is, in step 2704, after adding the prize ball payout number (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2706-4 (third variation 1) ), The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), in step 2706-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 (increment counter, maintenance mode. This is a counter that measures the number of game balls that enter the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, or the general winning opening P10 while the firing handle D44 is being operated. The prize value payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening is added to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the substrate M), and the process proceeds to step 2708. Even if No in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2708.

  In addition, in step 2714, after adding the prize ball payout amount (three balls in this example) related to the second main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2716-4 (third variation 1) ), The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2716-4 (third variation 1), in step 2716-5 (third variation 1), the prize-ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize-ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the second main value. The number of prize balls paid out (three balls in this example) related to the game starting opening is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718.

  In addition, in step 2734, after the number of prize balls paid out for the general winning opening P10 (10 balls in this example) is added to the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc, in step 2736-4 (third variation 1). The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), in step 2736-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the general winning opening. The number of prize balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the addition processing to the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 is performed separately from the addition processing to the prize ball number counter MHc when the firing handle D44 is operated. Is configured to perform. Even if No in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2738.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2322, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the handle operating flag is off. If Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. If Yes in step 2324, in step 2326, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation (long press for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button (only long press started from the power-on state). Therefore, if the operation of Yes is performed in step 1002, it is not Yes in this process). If Yes in step 2326, the maintenance mode control unit MO turns on the maintenance mode flag in step 2328, and proceeds to the process of step 2330. On the other hand, if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been started. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the handle operation flag and shifts to the processing of step 2334. Also, in the case of No in step 2322, the process proceeds to step 2334. Next, in step 2334, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle is completed. In the case of Yes in step 2334, in step 2336, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “baseball maintenance counter value / total discharge maintenance counter value × 100”.

  Next, in step 2338, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the calculated base value on the ball entering state display device J10. Next, in step 2340, the maintenance mode control means MO turns off the handle operation flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900). Even if No in step 2326, step 2330, or step 2334, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the base value of the period during which the firing handle D44 is operated after the maintenance mode is started by pressing the RAM clear button for a long time is the operation value of the firing handle D44. It is configured to be displayed on the incoming state display device J10 at the timing when it is finished.

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information regarding the entry is displayed. It is configured to start the displayable maintenance mode, and is configured to calculate and display the base value on the main control board M side during the period during which the firing handle is operated during the maintenance mode, so that the game is actually played. Even if you want to confirm the base value for a predetermined period by firing a ball, you can confirm it simply by operating the firing handle and playing.

  Further, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, in the case where the game ball has entered one of the entrances before the predetermined time elapses after the operation of the firing handle is finished, You may comprise so that the information regarding a ball entry may be calculated including the number of ball entries. In such a case, a sensor capable of detecting that the game ball is flowing down the game area may be provided.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the base value during the period during which the firing handle is operated in the maintenance mode can be calculated and displayed, but the execution mode of the maintenance mode is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is an execution mode of a maintenance mode different from that of the first modification from the third embodiment will be referred to as a second modification from the third embodiment, and the following is a modification from the first modification from the third embodiment. Only will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) in FIG. 71 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the points of change from the first modification from the third embodiment are step 2341-1 (third modification 2), step 2341-2 (third modification 2), and step 234-3 (third modification 2). ). That is, when it is determined in step 2326 that the predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (long press for 10 seconds or more) is performed, in step 2341-1 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control unit MO determines the current operation. By transmitting a command related to the game state to the sub control board S side, the sub control board S receives the command related to the current game state and a maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub control which will be described later). With the board S side), the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current gaming state, The processing moves to step 2328.

  Next, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Even if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Next, at step 2341-2 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (pressing in this processing means that the RAM clear button is off → 0.5 seconds or less). Is turned on → off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once). In the case of Yes in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), in step 2343-1 (third second), the maintenance mode control means MO causes the maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub Control board S side and have respectively), and the game state is changed to the game state corresponding to the display number next to the display number corresponding to the current game state. Next, in step 2341-4 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command relating to the current game state to the sub control board S side, so that the sub control board S receives the current With reference to the command relating to the game state and the maintenance mode during-lighting mode table (to be provided respectively on the main control board M side and the sub control board S side) described later, the frame decoration lamp D18-L (It may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state (changed game state), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lighting mode table during maintenance mode. In the maintenance mode lighting mode table, game states corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 are set, and each time the RAM clear button is operated, "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ..." The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is configured to be turned on in the lighting mode corresponding to the changed gaming state. As a specific example of the game state transition, when the RAM clear button is pressed for 10 seconds or longer while the power is on, the game state corresponds to the display number 1, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state. (Main game probability change flag is off and main game short time flag is off), and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in red which is the lighting mode corresponding to the game state. To do. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, it is changed to a non-probability variation game state and a time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is on), and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in blue which is. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (main game probability change flag is ON and main game time shortening flag is OFF) are changed, and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in green. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state (the main game probability variation flag is on and the main game time shortening flag are on) are changed, and in a lighting mode corresponding to the game state. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on in a certain yellow color. When the RAM clear button is pressed in the game state corresponding to the display number 4, the game state corresponding to the display number 1 is set, and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state is changed to red. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on. Thus, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the game state can be changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode. By configuring in this way, for example, the probability Fluctuating gaming state and time shortening When you want to check the base value in the gaming state, etc., after changing the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, operate the firing handle to change the probability variation gaming state and time shortening. The base value in the gaming state can be confirmed. Further, by changing the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) depending on the game state, it becomes clear at a glance which game state the game is currently in, and the work of confirming the base value becomes easier. . In the second modification from the third embodiment, the game state is changed every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also as the game effect lamp D26 is changed depending on the game state. However, the gaming state is not changed even if the RAM clear button is operated during the maintenance mode, but the frame decoration lamp D18 is changed due to the different gaming state. -L (may be the game effect lamp D26) lighting mode is different, that is, the gaming state may be determined by the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26). . The configuration for determining the game state is not limited to the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26), and, for example, (1) the type of sound output from the speaker D24. , (2) display mode by the effect display device SG, (3) firing intensity of the firing handle D44 (small intensity → determined to be left-handed → determined to be in a non-time reduction game state, high intensity → right-handed It is possible to determine the game state by configuring such as (determination that the game state is present → determination that the game state is a time shortening game state).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine of the second modification from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information regarding the entry is displayed. It is configured to start the displayable maintenance mode, and the game state is changed every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the changed game state. Even if you want to check the base value for a predetermined period in any gaming state, you can check by simply operating the firing handle and playing after changing to any gaming state. You will be able to do it.

  In addition, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the information relating to the entry according to the game state can be confirmed, but as a display of the information relating to the entry, a non-time shortening game state (non-probability variation) Display the number of winnings only in the game state and non-time-reduced game state, and probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state, or in the time-reduced game state (non-probability-varied game state and time-reduced game state, and The winning number may be displayed only in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state).

  Further, in the second modified example from the third embodiment, as the display of the information relating to the ball entry, the number of game balls entered into the starting opening, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening, and the total prize ball payout amount ( Cumulative number of prize balls paid out), number of prize balls paid out in non-probability variation game state and non-time shortened game state (or accumulated prize ball payout number), number of prize balls paid out in time shortened game state (or accumulated prize) Either of the number of balls paid out) can be displayed in the maintenance mode. Further, the special winning opening may be opened even during the maintenance mode (the big winning may be configured to be won, or the big winning may be forcibly configured).

(Modification 3 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the effect display device on the sub-control board S side is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode in the maintenance mode, but the mode of performing the maintenance mode is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration which is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a third modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 3) in the processing of FIG. That is, in the same figure (b), after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third variation 3), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later, and step 1900. The fraud detection information management process of is executed.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of a main game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the third modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2215-5 (third variation 3), step 2212-6 (third variation 3), step 2231-5 (third variation 3), and step 2231-6 ( The third change is 3). That is, in step 2210, after the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the first main game start opening entrance determination means MJ11-A operates the steering wheel. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), in step 2212-6 (third variation 3), the first main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-A sets the starting entrance number counter MJ12c. One is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2222. On the other hand, if No in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2222.

  In addition, after turning on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the second main game start opening entrance determination unit MJ11-B is in the process of operating the steering wheel. It is determined whether the flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), in step 2231-6 (third variation 3), the second main game starting mouth entry determination means MJ11-B sets the starting entry number counter MJ12c. One is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2240. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the processing shifts to step 2240. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls that have entered the first main game starting opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10 when the player is operating the firing handle D44. Becomes

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2411-5 (third variation 3) and step 2411-6 (third variation 3). That is, in step 2410, the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the general winning opening detection means MJ11-P determines whether the handle operating flag is on. To determine. If Yes in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), in step 2411-6 (third variation 3), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P sets the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c to 1 Is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, if No in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the third modification from the third embodiment. The modification from Modification 3 of the third embodiment is Step 2100 (Third Modification 3), that is, when the operation of the firing handle D44 is completed in Step 2334, Step 2100 (Third Modification 3). ), The number-of-entered-balls determination process described later is executed, and in step 2340, the handle operating flag is turned off.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number-of-entered-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2100 (third variation 3) of FIG. 79 in the third modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2116, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates the "starting entrance ball count counter value / general ball count counter value" as the ball entrance ratio N. Next, in step 2118, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the incoming ball ratio N is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command with a normal incoming ball ratio to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S causes the frame decoration lamp D18-L (game). The effect lamp D26 may be lit in the normal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2118, in step 2122, the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command having an abnormal incoming ball ratio to the sub-control board S, so that the sub-control board S causes the frame decoration lamp D18-L. The (game effect lamp D26) may be turned on in the abnormal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. Next, in step 2124, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general ball number counter MJ13c to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2340). Transition. It should be noted that the processing of step 2124 may be omitted, and the ball entry ratio may be calculated based on the cumulative starting opening ball entry counter value and the general entry ball counter value obtained by operating the firing handle a plurality of times. .

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 3 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information on entering the ball is displayed. The maintenance mode that can be displayed is configured to be started, and in the maintenance mode, it is determined whether the winning ratio between the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is normal or abnormal (as a game effect lamp D26). It is possible to confirm whether or not the incoming state of the game ball (the state of the game nail) is normal by a simpler display.

  In the third modification from the third embodiment, the cumulative number of balls entered from the maintenance mode start to the end may be notified by means other than the effect display device, for example, when the power is on. It may be configured to start measuring the cumulative number of winnings from the timing when the maintenance mode is started after the long press of the RAM clear button is detected, and to judge whether the total number of winnings exceeds the threshold and notify. As the notification mode, the notification may be performed in the lighting mode of the gaming machine frame as described above, or may be configured to be notified by voice from a speaker. With such a configuration, even in a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal such as the second-class pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to notify the information regarding the entry by the lighting mode of the lamp or the voice.

(Modification 4 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the effect display device on the sub-control board S side is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode in the maintenance mode. However, the execution mode of executing the maintenance mode on the sub-control board S is It is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration which is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a modification example 4 from the third embodiment, and only changes from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game starting opening entrance detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2212-4 (third variation 4) and step 2231-4 (third variation 4). That is, in step 2210, after the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2212-4 (third variation 4), the first main game start opening entrance determination means MJ11-A sets the start opening. A ball entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2222. In addition, in step 2230, the second main game starting mouth entrance determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag, and in step 2231-4 (third variation 4), the second main game. The start-port entrance determining means MJ11-B sets a start-port entrance command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the process of step 2240.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2411-4 (third variation 4). That is, in step 2410, after the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, in step 2411-4 (third variation 4), the general winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-P determines that the general winning command (sub-control board). Command for S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2509-4 (third variation 4). That is, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 in step 2508, in step 2509-4 (third variation 4), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 outputs the discharge ball command ( The command to the side of the sub-control board S) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 4) of FIG. 69 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2342, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2342, in step 2343, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long press for 10 seconds or more) (only long press started from a power-on state). If the operation is Yes in step 1002, it is not Yes in this process). In the case of Yes in step 2343, in step 2344, the maintenance mode control unit MO causes the maintenance mode start command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command for starting execution of the maintenance mode on the side of the sub control board S). ) Is set. Next, in step 2345, the maintenance mode control unit MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2342 or step 2343, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 85 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. First, the change from this embodiment is step 5900 (third variation 4) in FIG. That is, in step 5900 (third variation 4), the sub-control board S executes maintenance mode execution processing, and shifts to the base determination processing in step 5800 (second variation 2).

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display processing according to the subroutine of step 5900 (third fourth) of FIG. 85 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 5908, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and determines whether or not the maintenance mode display flag is off. If Yes in step 5908, in step 5910, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a maintenance mode start command from the main control board M side is received. . If Yes in step 5910, in step 5912, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the maintenance mode displaying flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b. Next, in step 5914, a display indicating that the maintenance mode is set is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the process proceeds to step 5916. In the case where the display indicating that the maintenance mode is in the effect display device SG is executed, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display of the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, the first hold display, The second hold display section SG13 is configured so that the hold display on the second main game side, the display related to the error (such as the error that the door opening flag is on), and the display indicating that the maintenance mode does not overlap. Is desirable. On the other hand, if No in step 5908, the process moves to step 5916. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S provides information about the control process for starting the maintenance mode and the information about the ball to be used in the maintenance mode. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is configured to execute the calculation processing and the like. Further, the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b is included in the sub-control board S and temporarily stores information to be executed by the maintenance mode display control means SM32.

  Next, in step 5916, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and the base measurement flag (a flag that is turned on while the base value is being measured). Is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 5916, in step 5918 the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been pressed. If Yes in step 5918, in step 5920, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 is a base measurement timer SM32t (a timer for measuring the period during which the base value is measured, and is stored in the RAM area on the side of the sub control board S). (Stored) is reset and started, and the timer value is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 5922, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the base measurement flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to step 5924. On the other hand, if No in step 5916, the process moves to step 5924.

  Next, in step 5924, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been pressed. If Yes in step 5924, in step 5926, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 stops the base measurement timer SM32t and displays the timer value on the effect display device SG. Incidentally, when displaying the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t on the effect display device SG, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display of the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, 2 Hold display on the second main game side in the hold display section SG13, display relating to an error (such as an error that the door opening flag is turned on), and the like, and the display of the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t do not overlap. It is desirable to configure. Next, in step 5928, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value (the base value during the period during which the base measurement flag is on, the base value calculated in step 5816 of FIG. 87). It is displayed on the device SG. Next, in step 5930, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the base measurement flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to the processing of step 5932. Even if No in Step 5918 or Step 5924, the process proceeds to Step 5932.

  Next, in step 5932, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode has ended (the maintenance mode will end due to the occurrence of power interruption as described above). If Yes in step 5932, in step 5934, the display regarding the maintenance mode on the effect display device SG is deleted. Next, in step 5936, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the maintenance mode display flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. Even if No in step 5910 or step 5932, the process proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. In this example, the maintenance mode is configured to end when the power is turned off, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the maintenance mode may be configured to end by a predetermined operation on the sub input button SB, a predetermined operation on the RAM clear button, or the like. Good.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination processing according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second variation 2) of FIG. 85 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the second modification from the second embodiment is step 5818 (third modification 4). That is, in step 5818 (third variation 4), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether the base measurement in-progress flag is on. If Yes in step 5818 (third variation 4), the process proceeds to step 5802. On the other hand, if No in step 5818 (third variation 4), the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100). With this configuration, in the fourth modification from the third embodiment, the base value is calculated only during the period when the base measurement flag is on.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information regarding the entry is displayed. The maintenance mode that can be displayed is configured to be started on the side of the sub-control board S. During the maintenance mode, pressing the sub-input button starts measurement of the base value, and pressing the sub-input button again By terminating the measurement of the base value and displaying the measured base value, it is possible to confirm the base value for an arbitrary predetermined period by executing a simple operation on the sub-control board S side. Become.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the state of entering the ball can be confirmed by displaying the information regarding the entering of the ball on the incoming state display device on the main control board M side. Is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration which is a confirmation mode of a entering situation different from that of the present embodiment is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3503 (fourth). That is, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG, the prize ball number counter MHc {each of the ball entrances (first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning award for which prize balls are to be paid out) Mouth P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20), the counter value of the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on of the number of winnings for which winnings have been determined based on the winnings in the winnings A counter value of the starting mouth entrance number counter MJ12c (a counter that measures the number of game balls entering the first main game starting mouth A10 or the second main game starting mouth B10 under specific circumstances), the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c -The counter value of C90 (a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s), and the general winning number counter MJ13c (the number of gaming balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under specific circumstances) Counter value of the counter to be measured) (in the fourth embodiment, in the RAM area for the treatment of the main control board M, the prize ball number counter value, the starting entrance ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, And the general ball count counter value) are output from the external terminal, and the process proceeds to step 3504.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the count value of each of the prize ball number counter MHc, the starting opening ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball number counter MJ13c is increased by 1, It may be configured to output a signal (it is preferable to apply the configuration to the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the general ball number counter MJ13c, which are counters whose counter values tend to be relatively small values. is there). Further, when the count value of each of the prize ball number counter MHc, the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball number counter MJ13c is increased by 10, one signal is output. (It is preferable to apply the configuration to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 and the prize ball number counter MHc, which are counters that tend to have relatively large counter values). In addition, in the case where the award ball number counter MHc, the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball number counter MJ13c are output as output information from the external terminal, May output signals (external terminal signals) from different external terminals for each counter. With such a configuration, even when an external terminal signal that can output only on / off is used, it is possible to determine which counter the output information is related to. Further, the external terminal signal may be output only when the maintenance mode flag is on (in the maintenance mode).

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, as the output information from the external terminal, the prize ball number counter value, the starting entrance ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, Also, the general incoming ball number counter value can be output, and the information on the incoming ball can be confirmed from outside the gaming machine.

  As a method of confirming the information regarding the ball entering outside the gaming machine, it may be confirmed by using a collating device. Specifically, a terminal for connecting the collating device is provided on the main control board M side. Then, by connecting the collator to the terminal, a serial signal from the main control board M side to the collator side (similar to the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the type of information and the information It may be configured to output a signal that clearly indicates the content). The serial signal may be output by the main control board M at all times, or may be output when the collating device issues an output request for information regarding entry.

  Further, as another mode of confirming the information regarding the ball entering by the collation device, the information regarding the ball entering is configured to be managed on the side of the sub-control board S, and the information regarding the ball entering on the side of the sub-control board S. May be converted into a QR code and displayed on the effect display device SG, and the QR code may be photographed and decoded by the collating machine so that the information relating to the ball entering can be confirmed by the collating machine.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, various modes for confirming the information regarding the entering ball are described in detail, but the information regarding the entering ball is configured to be able to be stored for several days. Good. Therefore, a configuration capable of storing the information about entering the ball for several days is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 89 is an electrical overall configuration diagram in the fifth embodiment, and the difference from the present embodiment is that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps the current time by a built-in power supply. Is what you are doing. Here, the real-time clock RTC is a mechanism that is provided on the substrate of the sub-main control unit SM and that measures time. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent of the board, and keeps timing even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, so the date and time set at the time of factory shipment etc. It is possible to supply the current date and time based on the.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the fifth embodiment. The change from the first modification from the third embodiment is step 2650 (fifth). That is, in step 3000, the main control board M executes the prize-ball payout command transmission control processing, and in step 2650 (fifth), the main control board M executes the backup execution control processing, and the step outside of 1990. Shift to signal output processing.

  Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the backup execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (fifth) of FIG. 90 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2652, the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (10000) (the total discharge confirmation counter value is cleared to zero by powering off). Therefore, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, which has been measured since the power was turned on, that is, the base value is not stored when the number of game ball firings has not reached 10,000 balls). If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the main control board M determines whether or not the date is newly changed (for example, when the date is newly changed when the power is turned off). Good). If Yes in step 2654, in step 2656, the main control board M sets the next storage area, and the process proceeds to step 2658. Even if No in step 2654, the process proceeds to step 2658. Next, in step 2658, the main control board M updates and stores the current base value in the set storage area number (updated and stored until the final power-off of today, and the final power-off). The hour data is stored for 3 days), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990). On the other hand, if No in step 2652, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1990).

  The lower part of the figure is a base value storage image diagram. Specifically, it has “1”, “2”, and “3” as storage area numbers, and in the table on the left side, “3” as storage area numbers. Is set. The base value of March 25 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1”, and the base value of March 27 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “2”. The base value of March 28 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “3”. After that, the number of game balls on March 29 the next day (the number of game balls that is almost the same as the number of discharged balls) was 10,000 balls or more, and the date was changed from March 28. , The storage area number changes from “3” to “1” (“1” is set), and the base value (33) of March 29 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1”. Become. The storage area numbers are configured to be set in the order of “1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ...”. Further, the base value of March 25 stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number “1” will be erased (overwritten). Note that the configuration for backing up the information related to entering the ball such as the base value is not limited to this, and for example, the following storage area number may be set each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on. . Further, it may be configured to have a counter for managing the storage area to be backed up, and to add 1 to the counter value of the counter each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the base value is updated and stored at any time on a business day when the total number of discharged balls is 10,000 balls or more, so that the predetermined number or more is stored. It is possible to store information for three days on the business day when the launch of (10,000 balls or more) is executed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the RTC is used, but with such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine how many game balls have been shot at what time.

In the fifth embodiment, the backup is executed on condition that the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (10,000 balls in this example). However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the backup is performed. The information may be backed up, and the predetermined condition may be changed without any problem. For example, a predetermined time may have elapsed as a period during which a game is being executed, a predetermined number or more of game balls have been shot, a cumulative number of prize balls paid out has reached a predetermined number, and the like. Also, the backed up information may be deleted after a lapse of a predetermined period or execution of a predetermined operation. Specifically, the predetermined operation for deleting the backed up information may be configured to delete the backed up information when the power is turned off, or to delete the backed up information when the power is restored.
(Sixth Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the configuration in which the process of calculating the information regarding the ball entering is executed by either the main control board M or the sub-control board S is described in detail. In either processing of the control board M and the sub-control board S, the information regarding the ball entry may be calculated. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2750 (sixth). That is, after executing the number of entered balls determination process in step 2100, in step 2750 (sixth), the main control board M executes the main game discharge number confirmation process, and shifts to the fraud detection information management process of step 1900. .

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game starting mouth entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2212-3, step 2212-5 (sixth), step 2231-3, and step 2231-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the first main game starting mouth detection continuation flag in step 2210, in step 2212-3, the first main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-A counts the starting entrance number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the value. Next, in step 2212-5 (sixth), the first main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-A sets a starting opening entrance command (command to the sub control board S side), and in step 2222 Move to processing.

  In addition, after turning on the second main game starting mouth detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-3, the second main game starting mouth entrance determining means MJ11-B sets the starting entrance entering number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the counter value. Next, in step 2231-5 (sixth), the second main game starting opening entrance determining means MJ11-B sets a starting opening entrance command (command to the sub-control board S side), and in step 2240 Move to processing.

  Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the general winning opening detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2411-3 and step 2411-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in step 2410, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening entrance determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c. Next, in step 2411-5 (sixth), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P sets a general entry command (command to the sub-control board S side), and shifts to the processing in step 2420. .

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2509-5 (sixth). That is, in step 2508, 1 is added to the counter value of the total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, and then in step 2509-5 (sixth), the total ejection confirmation means MJ11-C90 outputs the ejection ball command (sub-control board). Command for the S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2104 (sixth), that is, after calculating the total number of incoming balls G in step 2102, in step 2104 (sixth), the maintenance mode control means MO sets It is determined whether the number of balls G has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (6000 in this example). If Yes in step 2104 (sixth), the entry ratio N is calculated in step 2106, and if No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (sixth)}. With this configuration, each time the total number of balls entered into the starting opening and the general winning opening reaches a multiple of 6000 balls, an indication as to whether or not the entering ratio is within a predetermined range Can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (sixth) of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2752, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines that the counter value of the total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a confirmation value (the total ejection number measured on the main control board M side and the total ejection number calculated on the sub control board S side). It is a counter value for confirming whether the number is the same, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached a multiple of 6000). If Yes in step 2752, the maintenance mode control means MO in step 2754 causes the total discharge ball confirmation command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which includes information related to the total discharge confirmation number counter value). Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2752, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 98 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 5850 (sixth), step 5950 (sixth), and step 6050 (sixth) in FIG. That is, in step 5850 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game entry ball confirmation process described later. Next, in step 5950 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game incoming ball number determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 6050 (sixth), the sub control board S executes a sub game side discharge number confirmation process, which will be described later, and shifts to the hold information management process in step 5100.

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the secondary game entry ball confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 5850 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5852, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the start entrance ball entry command from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 5852, in step 5854, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 causes the sub-side starting opening entry number counter SJ11c (from the main control board M side to be the first main game starting opening A10 under specific circumstances). It is a counter that executes addition processing based on the information relating to the number of game balls that have entered the second main game starting opening B10, and is incremented by 1 to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S). , And proceeds to the processing of step 5856. On the other hand, if No in step 5852, the process moves to step 5856. Next, in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a general entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 relates to the sub-side general winning ball number counter SJ13c (from the side of the main control board M, the number of gaming balls entered into the general winning hole P10 under a specific situation). The counter is a counter that executes addition processing based on the information, and is incremented by 1 to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the process proceeds to step 5860. On the other hand, also in the case of step 5856 No, the process moves to step 5860.

  Next, in step 5860, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the discharge ball command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 5860, in step 5862, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c (from the main control board M side, based on the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). This is a counter that executes addition processing, and adds 1 to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S) and moves to the next processing {processing of step 5950 (sixth)}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5860, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5950 (sixth)}. With this configuration, when the starting opening ball entering command, the general entering ball command, and the discharging ball command from the main control board M side are received, the starting opening on the sub control board S side (first main game) It is possible to perform addition processing on the counter values of the starting opening A10, the counter for entering the second main game starting opening B10), the counter for entering the general winning opening P10, and the counter for discharging balls. It will be possible.

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the sub game incoming ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 5950 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5952, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 executes the addition process of the counter value of the sub-side starting opening entrance number counter SJ11c and the counter value of the sub-side general entrance number counter SJ13c to obtain the total number of entered balls. Calculate GS. Next, in step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the total number of entered balls GS has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1500). In the case of Yes in step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 calculates (sub-side starting opening entrance number-of-balls counter value / sub-side general entrance number-of-balls counter value) as the entry ratio NS in step 5956. Although the details will be described later, the total number of incoming balls G on the side of the main control board M is determined every 6000 balls, whereas the total number of incoming balls GS on the side of the sub control board S is every 1500 balls. The sub-control board S side is configured such that the determination interval is shorter (the number of determinations is greater). In the sixth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the total number of entered balls G or the total number of entered balls SG has reached a predetermined number of balls, that is, the entry ratio N or based on the number of entered game balls. Although it has been configured to determine the timing for calculating the ball entry ratio SN, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main ball board M side and the sub control board S side are based on time (every predetermined time) and the ball entry ratio is calculated. It may be configured to calculate N or a ball entering ratio NS. In such a configuration, the interval at which the main control board M side calculates the ball entrance ratio N may be set to be longer than the interval at which the sub control board S side calculates the ball entrance ratio SN. Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 109, every time the total number of incoming balls G or the total number of incoming balls SG reaches a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses (the main control board M side and the sub control board S). The predetermined time may be different from that on the side), and the ring buffer may be configured to store the information on the incoming ball.

  Next, in step 5958, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the incoming ball ratio NS is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 5958, in step 5960, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a normal display on the effect display device SG (for example, a small circle is displayed in the lower right part of the display area, nothing is displayed, etc.). , And proceeds to the next process {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5958, in step 5962, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays an abnormal display (for example, a small x is displayed in the lower right stage of the display area) on the effect display device SG, and the next The process moves to {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. Also, in the case of No in step 5954, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6050 (sixth)}.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the secondary game side discharge number confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 6050 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 6052, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a discharge confirmation command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 6052, in step 6054, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not “total discharge confirmation number counter value = sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value”. In the case of Yes in step 6054, in step 6056, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a discharge normal display on the effect display device, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 6054, at step 6058, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the discharge abnormality display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5100). Even if No in step 6052, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5100). In this way, in the sixth embodiment, every time 6000 balls are detected on the main control board M side, the detection on the main control board M side and the detection on the sub control board S side coincide. It is configured to check if That is, the main control board M side and the sub control board S side are configured to independently measure the discharged balls.

  With the above-described configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the sub-control board S respectively execute the process of calculating the information regarding the ball entry, and the total number of discharges is Each time a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example) is reached, the total number of discharges measured by the main control board M and the information sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side By confirming whether or not the total number of discharged balls calculated on the control board S side matches, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information relating to the incoming ball is correct information. Further, since the free space of the data capacity used by the sub control board S is larger than that of the main control board M, in the processing on the side of the main control board M, the information regarding the incoming ball is updated every 6000 balls. The processing on the side of the sub-control board S is configured to update the information on the incoming ball for every 1500 balls, which is smaller than that on the side of the main control board M, so that the information on the incoming ball can be confirmed more finely. .

  In addition, the main control board M side has a configuration in which the main control board M and the sub control board S confirm the information regarding the incoming ball every time the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example). It may be configured to determine whether or not the total discharge confirmation number counter value and the total incoming ball number GS on the sub-control board S side match. With such a configuration, in order to prevent the detection of information (for example, information in which the ball entry ratio N is in an abnormal range) related to an illegal ball entry due to an illegally changed direction of the game nail, In the case where the rod-shaped member is put in and taken out in the vicinity of the general winning opening entrance detecting device P11s and the general winning entrance entering detecting device P11s repeats “OFF → ON”, from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. By sending the general entry command, which is information indicating that the general winning opening P10 has been entered, the total number of entered balls GS on the side of the sub-control board S is added, but the main control Since the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s does not detect the game ball on the board M side, the information regarding the total discharge number on the main control board M side (total discharge check number counter value) is not added, and the stick-shaped Parts When out around 般入 Prize port ball entrance detecting device P11s becomes the total emission number of main control board M side and the total inlet ball number of the sub-control board S side fraud is discovered to not match.

(Seventh embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, various configurations for confirming the information relating to the ball entry are described in detail. If it is confirmed that there is a possibility that the RAM information is erased by executing the RAM clear without storing the abnormal information. Therefore, a configuration that can be dealt with even in the event of such a situation is referred to as a seventh embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 102 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 6100 (seventh) in FIG. That is, after executing the error notification execution processing in step 5700, in step 6100 (seventh), the sub-control board S executes RAM clear backup processing, which will be described later, and shifts to processing in step 5020.

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the RAM clear backup process according to the subroutine of step 6100 (seventh) of FIG. 102 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 6102, the sub control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information from the main control board M side is received. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the sub-main control unit SM adds 1 to the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc, stores the counter value, and performs the next process (process of step 5020). Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 6102, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5020). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the number of times RAM clear is executed is stored on the sub control board S side. In the step 6104, the area for storing the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc stores the power off or the RAM clear by operating the power switch Ea or the RAM clear button regardless of any artificial operation. It is configured so as to be an area that is not erased (for example, a ferroelectric memory or the like).

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is configured such that the number of times RAM clear is executed is stored on the sub-control board S side, so that information relating to an abnormal ball entry can be obtained. If it is confirmed that the abnormal information is erased by executing the RAM clear without storing the information, the sub control board S stores the RAM clear execution count and executes the RAM clear. Even if the RAM clear execution count is not erased, it is possible to prevent unauthorized information operations from being executed.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of RAM clears stored in the sub-control board S may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG during execution of the maintenance mode. In this case, if the number of RAM clears to be displayed exceeds the predetermined number, it is determined that the illegal RAM clear is being executed, and the effect display device SG cannot display the effect or the like. (It becomes impossible to use at the time of business because all the displays related to the normal game progress cannot be displayed). Further, the RTC described above may be used to store not only the number of times RAM is cleared, but also the date and time when RAM is cleared.

(Eighth Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, a detailed description has been given of a configuration in which the main control board M calculates information relating to a ball entry and displays the information on the main control board M based on the calculated information. The configuration in which the main control board M executes all information calculation and display processing is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the present embodiment as a configuration in which the calculation and display processing of the information regarding the ball entry is all performed by the main control board M is referred to as an eighth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described below. , Will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 104 is an example of a diagram showing a structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the incoming state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M. The incoming state display device J10 has four-digit, seven-segment displays aligned and attached in a "two-digit + two-digit" format. For example, the continuous character ratio, character ratio, or the cumulative total of those will be described later. It is configured to be displayable. The entry state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key held by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check them.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the eighth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1034 (eighth), step 2850 (eighth), and step 1036 (eighth). That is, after executing the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area, the main control board M calls the processing of the second ROM / RAM area in step 1034 (eighth).

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2850 (eighth), the main control board M executes a ball entry state calculation process, which will be described later, which is a process in the second ROM / RAM area. Next, in step 1036 (eighth), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and then the processing of steps 1900 to 1990 is executed as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area. It will be.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2706-6 (eighth), step 2716-6 (eighth), step 2731 (eighth), and step 2736-6 (eighth). That is, in step 2704, the prize-ball payout determination means MH adds the prize-ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize-ball number counter MHc, and then the step 2706. In -6 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH enters the non-incident object counter MHc-4 (the first main game starting opening A10 where the electric accessory is not provided and the general winning opening P10). A counter for measuring the number of game balls, which is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side), is added with the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening. , And proceeds to the processing of step 2708.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Further, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then, in step 2716. -6 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered in the second main game starting opening B10 in which the accessory counter MHc-5 (the electric accessory is provided). Yes, stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) is added with the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening, and the process proceeds to step 2718. . In step 2728, the award ball payout determination means MH temporarily stores, in the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb, information that the award balls related to the first (second) special winning opening will be paid out. In step 2731 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a counter that measures the number of game balls entered into the continuous winning object counter MHc-6 (the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20). Yes, stored in the RAM area on the side of the main control board M), the number of prize balls paid out for the first (second) special winning opening (13 in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2732. To do.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Further, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout number (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then, in step 2736-6 ( In 8th), the prize-ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize-ball payouts (10 in this example) related to the general winning a prize to the counter value of the non-winning object counter MHc-4, and shifts to the processing of step 2738. To do. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio described later. In addition, the prize ratio is the number of prize balls paid out by the large prize hole for all the prize ball payouts and the prize by the prize hole (in this example, the second main game starting hole B10) in which an ordinary electric prize is provided. This is the proportion of the number of balls paid out, and in this example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20), and the general winning opening P10. The total number of prize balls paid out is the ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out of the second main game starting opening B10 and the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20). Further, the continuous winning ratio is a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening to the total number of prize balls paid out, and in the present example, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10. With respect to the total number of prize balls paid out of the first prize winning opening C10 (second prize opening C20) and the general prize opening P10, the number of prize balls paid out of the first prize winning opening C10 (second prize winning C20) is It has become a percentage. Further, more strictly, since the continuous accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening when the condition device operation flag is on to all the prize ball payouts, When calculating the continuous accessory ratio, two ring buffers for storing the number of prize balls paid out of the special winning opening are provided, and one of the ring buffers has the condition device operation flag turned on. The number of prize balls paid out by the special winning opening (the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit) is stored, and the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening when the condition device operation flag is off (by the small hit) is stored in the other ring buffer. The continuous winning character ratio may be calculated (stored) by storing the number of prize balls paid out.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the present embodiment is a non-stochastic variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game time saving flag is off), and during execution of a special game. When the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball when there is no (conditional device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation number counter value is incremented by 1 so that the total discharge is achieved regardless of the game state or the like. When the confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, 1 is added to the total discharge confirmation number counter value. The detailed description is omitted because only the process is deleted from the present embodiment.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a ball entry state calculation process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) of FIG. 105 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 2852, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1000 in this example). If Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the maintenance mode control unit MO determines, as the character ratio, "(character counter value + continuous character counter value) / (character counter value + continuous character counter value + non-character). The character counter value) × 100 ”is calculated. Next, in step 2856, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates "continuous accessory role counter value / (feature object counter value + continuous accessory counter value + non-effect counter value) * 100" as the continuous accessory ratio. To do. Next, at step 2858, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated at step 2854 and step 2856 on the incoming state display device J10, and the next process {step 1036 (first). 8)}. Even if No in step 2852, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1036 (eighth)}. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated each time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 1000 balls, and the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 in a display mode described later. Is configured. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated in step 2854 and step 2856 are configured to be displayed on the incoming state display device J10. Since the result of calculating the character ratio or continuous character ratio is rarely an integer, the result of calculating the character ratio or continuous character ratio is rounded down to the nearest whole number. A digit integer may be displayed on the ball entering state display device J10.

  Next, FIG. 109 is a ball entry information backup image diagram in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment may be configured to store (backup) the information regarding the ball entry each time a predetermined number of game balls are shot, as in the fifth embodiment described above. An example of such a configuration is shown in the same figure. In the figure, each time the number of discharged balls becomes 6000, in other words, every time the total discharge confirmation number counter value becomes a multiple of 6000, it is configured to store the information on the entered balls. Since the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 is configured to be able to measure when all the game balls that have been discharged are discharged, when the total discharge confirmation number counter value becomes a multiple of 6000 balls. Can be regarded as a game ball being fired at a multiple of 6000 balls. If it is a general pachinko game machine, the number of game balls that is approximately the same as the number of game balls that have been shot is paid out as the total number of prize balls paid out, that is, the number of game balls that is approximately 100% of the number of game balls that have been shot. Since it is configured to be paid out as the total number of prize balls paid out, the cumulative number of shot balls can be considered to be substantially the same as the total number of prize balls paid out. In addition, in a gaming machine configured such that about 90% of the number of game balls shot is paid out as the cumulative prize ball payout amount, by setting “cumulative prize ball payout number × 100/90” It is possible to calculate the approximate number of game balls shot.

  In addition, as the information regarding the entering ball stored for every 6000 balls, the total number of prize balls paid out based on entering the general winning opening P10 and the prize based on entering the first main game starting opening A10 are included. Cumulative number of ball payouts, cumulative total number of prize ball payouts based on a ball entering the second main game starting opening B10 (where the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is provided), the first big winning opening C10 and There is a cumulative total of the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls thrown into the second big winning opening C20, and the total number of prize balls paid out of the above four items, and each time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 6000 balls, the above information is 2 respectively. It is configured to be stored in the ring buffer using bytes. In this example, a ring buffer that can store 10 pieces of information each time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 6000 balls is used. With 10 pieces of information stored, a new discharged ball of 6000 balls is newly stored. When it becomes a multiple of the sphere, the oldest stored information (information corresponding to “1” in the figure) is erased and new information is stored (stored in “1” in the figure). Configured).

  In addition, based on the information stored in the ring buffer described above, information relating to the total number of paid prize balls for 10 balls stored in the ring buffer is stored using 3 bytes. In addition, information older than 10 will be erased from the ring buffer, but before the information is erased, the information will be referred to at any time to determine the total number of winning prizes including the information stored in the past. Such information is also configured to be stored using 3 bytes. Further, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio of information relating to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 pieces, which is calculated based on the information relating to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 pieces. , 1 byte each is used for storage. Further, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio of the information relating to the total cumulative winning number, which is to be calculated based on the information relating to the total cumulative winning number, are stored using 1 byte each. . When three pieces of data are stored as the data stored in the ring buffer (when data for one round of the ring buffer is not stored), for example, the prize ball payout relating to the general winning opening P10 is performed. If the data of “1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls” is stored as the number, the data of the total number of prize balls paid out of 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is “ The data that “500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls” is stored, and the data of the total cumulative number of prize balls paid out is the data that “500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls” is stored. The data of the number of paid balls and the data of the total number of paid prize balls are the same. On the other hand, when 12 pieces of data are stored as the data stored in the ring buffer (when more data is stored after the data for one round of the ring buffer is stored), for example, As the number of prize balls paid out for the winning opening P10, “1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls, 4: 600 balls, 5: 500 balls, 6: 700 balls, 7: 500 balls, 8: 600 When the data of "sphere, 9: 500 balls, 10: 400 balls" is stored, the data of the total number of prize balls paid out of 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is "500 + 600 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 700 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 400 = 5400 balls". The data indicating the total number of prize balls paid out is deleted from the ring buffer in addition to the above 5,400 balls. The data of "500 balls" and "800 balls" are added as the data for the last two pieces, that is, the data of "5400 + 500 + 800 = 6700 balls" is stored, and 10 sets of award balls are accumulated. The data of the number of payouts and the data of the total number of prizeballs paid out are different numbers of prize balls.

  Next, FIG. 110 is a display example of the entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure is an example of the display mode of the entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. As described above, the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked by the key held by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to lock and open the door unit D18 and to check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check them. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the incoming state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side of the gaming machine, but the configuration of the incoming state display device J10 is not limited to this, and for example, Alternatively, the prize-ball payout control board KH may be provided on the surface of the sub-control board S in the back side of the gaming machine or the sub-control board S on the surface of the sub-control board S in the back side of the gaming machine. Further, the ball entering state display unit including the ball entering state display device J10 and the harness may be connectable to the main control board M, the sub control board S, or the prize ball payout control board KH. Further, when the incoming state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the sub-control board S or the prize ball payout control board KH in the backside direction of the gaming machine, the main control board M and the incoming state display device J10 are provided. The board (the sub-control board S or the prize-ball payout control board KH) that is present may be housed in one case. When the incoming state display unit is connectable to the main control board M, the incoming state display unit and the main control board M may be housed in one case. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable to use a transparent case so that the inside of the case can be visually recognized. Further, the incoming state display device J10 of the main control board M in the rear side of the gaming machine, the prize ball payout control board KH in the rear side of the gaming machine, and the sub-control board S in the rear side of the gaming machine. Even when it is provided on the surface, the substrate on which the entry state display device J10 is provided may be covered with a transparent case. Further, in the case where the main control board M has a polygonal shape and the entrance state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side of the gaming machine, the main control from the entrance state display device J10 is performed. The distance from the ball entering state display device J10 to the nearest side of the main control board M may be shorter than the distance to the center of gravity of the surface of the board M in the back side of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the influence of noise generated by the display on the ball entering state display device J10 on the main control board M.

  The ball entry state display device J10 is configured to display 4 bits of upper 2 digits and lower 2 digits, and is configured to start the display when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Moreover, what is displayed is (a) the ratio of continuous characters when 60,000 balls are fired, (b) the ratio of characters when 60,000 balls are fired, (c) the total ratio of continuous characters, and (d) the total. There are four types of character ratios, and after switching on the power of the gaming machine, switch from "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) ..." for 10 seconds each. It is configured to display four types of items. The 60,000 balls are the number of balls to be fired for one round of the ring buffer (6000 balls × 10). Note that (a) above corresponds to the cumulative total of 10 sets of continuous character ratios stored by using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and (b) above is stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109. The above-mentioned (c) corresponds to the total accumulation of the continuous character ratios stored by using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and the above-mentioned (d) corresponds to the total of the set of the accessory character ratios shown in FIG. It corresponds to the total sum of the character ratios stored by using 1 byte.

  As a specific display mode, it suggests which item is currently displayed in the upper two digits, and the ratio of continuous character when "C0" fires 60,000 balls, "C1" fires 60,000 balls. In this case, "A0" is the cumulative continuous character ratio, and "A1" is the cumulative character ratio. In addition, the value of the item currently displayed in the lower two digits is displayed in%. It should be noted that, when the ratio of the continuous character displayed is over 60, the display mode of the lower two digits is made to blink so as to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases. Is lit up). In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio exceeds 70, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink in order to indicate that the value is not a normal value (in other cases, Is lit). In addition, when the data of shots of 60,000 balls are not stored, for example, when only 20,000 game balls have been shot since the game machine started operating, the display mode of the upper two digits is displayed as a blinking display. Is configured to do so (in other cases, it is lit and displayed). The items displayed on the incoming-ball state display device J10 are not limited to those shown in the figures, and the display mode is merely an example. In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when the data of shots of 60,000 balls is not held, the display mode of the upper two digits of the entry state display device J10 is displayed in blinking, and the character ratio or the continuous character is displayed. When the ratio is not a normal value, the display mode of the lower two digits of the entry state display device J10 is configured to blink. That is, the area in which the ball entering state display device J10 blinks is configured to be different between the case where the data of shots of 60,000 balls is not stored and the case where the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is not a normal value. There is. It should be noted that the display mode on the ball entering state display device J10 may be different between the case where the data of shots of 60,000 balls is not held and the case where the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is not a normal value. In the case of the above configuration, the display area of the entry state display device J10 has only two digits, and when the data of shots of 60,000 balls is not stored, the two-digit display area is "1 second display → 1 second. If the character ratio or continuous character ratio is not a normal value, the display area of the two digits is "2 second display → 1 second non-display. → 2 seconds display ...

  Next, the lower part of the figure is an example of a display mode different from that of the eighth embodiment of the incoming state display device J10. As shown in the figure, a 16-digit lamp lighting mode causes a game ball to be launched. The case where the number is displayed is illustrated. In the figure, "non-lighting = 0", "red lighting = 1", and "green lighting = 2" are shown in ternary numbers, and in the example of the drawing, 000000100001100 is shown in ternary numbers. There is. Therefore, when it is a decimal number, it is "45963", and it is displayed that the number of shot balls of the game ball is 45963. As described above, a plurality of lamps capable of expressing a ternary number in three lighting modes may be provided to be configured to be able to execute the display relating to the entrance into the entrance. Further, the type of the lighting mode and the display content of the entry state display device J10 may be changed, and for example, the display may be performed using a threshold value. Specifically, "continuous character ratio less than 40% → turn off", "continuous character ratio 40-49% → green lighting", "continuous character ratio 50-59% → yellow lighting", "continuous character ratio" For example, "60% or more → red lighting" may be configured to be notified in four types of display modes depending on the value of the continuous accessory ratio.

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is configured such that the ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M and on the rear surface side of the gaming machine. By executing the calculation process and the display process of the information relating to the ball entering in the process in the second ROM / RAM area, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used in the first ROM / RAM area, and at the same time, the ratio of character roles. By configuring so that the winning role display device can confirm the continuous winning role ratio, it is possible to properly confirm whether the game is progressing in a normal game nail state.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the incoming state display device is configured to be provided on the main control board M and on the surface in the back side direction of the gaming machine. However, regarding the position where the incoming state display device is provided May not be provided near the CPU or the random number generation circuit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming machine is affected by noise generated by the display on the entry state display device and interferes with normal game progress. Further, in order to ensure the visibility of the information relating to the incoming ball displayed on the incoming state display device, the incoming state display device should not be provided in an area where the visibility is hindered by a harness or the like. Is desirable. Note that such a configuration relating to the position of the ball entering state display device is also applicable to a case where the ball entering state display device is provided on the prize ball payout control board KH or the sub control board S.

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a ball entering state display device is provided on the main control board M, and information relating to the ball entering in the ball entering state display device (in the present example, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display the information relating to the ball entry in 7-segment for error provided on the payout control board. In such a case, the display start condition of the information relating to the ball entry may be, for example, long pressing of the RAM clear button for a predetermined number of seconds or more. Further, in such a configuration, the display may be switched at predetermined time intervals, as in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, when "1 → 3 → 5 → 2 → 4" is switched and displayed every 3 seconds, it may be configured to notify that a total of 13,524 game balls have been paid out. .

(Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment)
Note that, in the eighth embodiment, a configuration in which the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the gaming machine has been described in detail. However, the configuration for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that displays the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio and is different from the eighth embodiment is a first modified example from the eighth embodiment, and hereinafter, changes from the eighth embodiment will be described. Only detailed.

  First, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the entering state calculating process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) of FIG. 105 in the first modification from the eighth embodiment. The change from the eighth embodiment is step 2860 (eighth variation 1), that is, after the maintenance mode control unit MO calculates the continuous accessory ratio in step 2856, in step 2860 (eighth variation 1). The maintenance mode control means MO sends a maintenance mode command (a command to the side of the sub-control board S, which includes information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated in steps 2854 and 2856). It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). In the first modification from the eighth embodiment, the process of step 2850 (eighth) is the process in the first ROM / RAM area.

  Next, FIG. 112 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section SM side according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are step 6200 (eighth variation 1) and step 6300 (eighth variation 1), that is, after the sub control board S executes the error notification execution processing in step 5700, At 6200 (eighth variation 1), the sub-control board S executes a password generation process described later. Next, in step 6300 (eighth variation 1), the sub control board S executes a password authentication process described below, and proceeds to step 5020.

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the password generation processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 (eighth variation 1) of FIG. 112 in the first modification from the eighth embodiment. First, in step 6202, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the real time clock RTC to determine whether the date has been newly changed. If Yes in step 6202, in step 6204, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 newly generates a maintenance mode activation password (password for activating the maintenance mode for displaying information relating to ball entry). Next, in step 6206, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 temporarily stores the maintenance mode activation password newly generated in step 6204. Next, in step 6208, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 erases the display of the character ratio and the character continuous ratio on the effect display device SG (the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed on the effect display device SG. If not, this process is not executed), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6300 (eighth variation 1)}. Even if No in step 6202, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6300 (eighth variation 1)}.

  Next, FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the password authentication process according to the subroutine of step 6300 (eighth variation 1) of FIG. 112 in the first modification from the eighth embodiment. First, in step 6304, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not a maintenance mode command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 6304, in step 6306, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 temporarily stores the role ratio and the continuous role ratio included in the maintenance mode command received in step 6304 (the role that was temporarily stored). The property ratio and the continuous accessory ratio will be overwritten in this process), and the process proceeds to step 6308. On the other hand, if No in step 6304, the process moves to step 6308.

  Next, in step 6308, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the password is newly input. Although not shown, the method of inputting the password may be configured such that the password can be input by operating the sub-input button SB with the door unit opened. In such a configuration, two buttons, that is, a sub input button SB similar to this example and a cross key that can be input in the up, down, left, and right directions are provided as the sub input buttons, and the alphabet displayed on the effect display device SG or The password may be input by selecting the symbol with the cross key and then pressing the sub input button SB to confirm. Next, in step 6310, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 compares the password input in step 6308 with the temporarily stored maintenance mode activation password. Next, in step 6312, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the two passwords (input password and maintenance mode activation password) compared in step 6310 match. In the case of Yes in step 6312, in step 6314, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 renders the temporarily stored character ratio and the continuous character ratio (the character ratio and the continuous character ratio temporarily stored in step 6306). It is displayed on the display device SG, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5020). Even if No in step 6308 or step 6312, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5202).

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the first modification from the eighth embodiment uses the real-time clock RTC to change (update) the maintenance mode startup password every time the date is changed. The maintenance mode is activated by the administrator inputting the password, that is, the performance display device SG is configured to display the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio so that only the administrator can browse. It is possible to appropriately manage the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, which are necessary information (information that should not be disclosed to the player).

  In the first modification from the eighth embodiment, the sub-control board S generates a maintenance mode startup password and authenticates the password (determines whether the entered password matches the maintenance mode startup password). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control board M side may be configured to generate a maintenance mode activation password and execute password authentication. In such a case, after the RAM clear, the maintenance mode startup password is newly generated, or the maintenance mode startup password is newly generated by a predetermined operation of the administrator (such as long pressing of the RAM clear button). It may be configured to generate.

  Next, FIG. 115 is an example of a board surface configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. The figure shows only the right side of the game area, and exemplifies a case where the player executes a right strike (a launch mode of launching a game ball toward the right side of the game board surface). In the case of the board configuration as shown in the figure, when the player hits the ball right, the game ball is easily guided to the vicinity of the second main game starting opening B10, and is not guided to the second main game starting opening B10. The game ball is configured to be guided to the general winning opening P10. That is, when the game ball is shot so as to enter the second main game starting port B10, almost all the game balls that are shot are either the second main game starting port B10 or the general winning port P10. It is configured to be guided. With this configuration, even if the direction of the game nail is changed illegally or the direction of the game nail is changed due to the collision of the game ball with the game nail, it is advantageous for the player 2 It is possible to make the game machine more user-friendly by configuring it so that it can easily enter one of the two entrances.

  Further, in the case of such a board configuration, by calculating the winning ratio of the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting opening B10 that can be entered by right hitting, based on the calculated winning ratio, It can be configured so that it is easy to grasp (analyze) the situation (direction, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting opening B10.

  Further, in addition to the board structure as shown in the figure, when the first outlet and the second outlet are provided as the outlets and the second outlet is arranged downstream of the general winning opening P10 (the general winning outlet When the game ball that has not entered P10 flows down to the second outlet, it is configured to calculate the ratio of entering the general winning opening P10 and the second outlet. Based on the calculated winning ratio, it is possible to easily comprehend (analyze) the situation (direction, etc.) of the game nail around the general winning opening P10.

  In addition, a security dongle may be inserted into the gaming machine according to the present example to determine whether or not the information on entering the ball is normal. Specifically, it is configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the information related to entering the ball is normal by shifting to the security mode. Security unless the security dongle is inserted into the control board M, the sub-control board S, the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. (unless the password in the security dongle and the password managed on the board side match). It is configured not to enter the mode. By shifting to the security mode, it becomes possible to transmit the information relating to the entry to the security dongle as in the collating machine described above.

  The security dongle has a volatile memory and a power supply (for example, a backup battery) that supplies electric power to the volatile memory. In the volatile memory, as the information on the ball entry, information on the range in which the entry ratio of the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is normal, information on the normal range of the accessory ratio, continuous accessory Information on the normal range of the ratio, information on the normal range of the base value, and the like may be stored. It is preferable that the information in the volatile memory be encrypted and stored in the security dongle. In that case, the side that authenticates based on the information in the volatile memory decrypts the encrypted information. It is preferable to be configured so that it is possible. Further, the security dongle itself may not be provided with a power supply for supplying power to the volatile memory, and instead, the power may be supplied from the prize ball payout control board side or the main control board M side. (In this case, when the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, the security information may be immediately lost from the volatile memory). If the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, the information in the volatile memory is immediately lost.When writing information to the security dongle, the prize ball payout control must be performed first. Attach the security dongle (before writing) to the board or main control board, turn on the power to the game machine, connect the writer for writing information to the prize ball payout control board or main control board, and then write Write information from the writer to the security dongle (via the prize ball payout control board or the main control board), and thereafter (remove the writing writer from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board). The backup power may be supplied to the security dongle from the control side or the main control board M side.

  In addition, a security dongle is inserted, authentication is completed, and a transition is made to a security mode, so that information relating to entering a ball can be transmitted from the board (for example, the main control board M) to the above-described matching machine. You may. Further, the security dongle may be inserted to complete the authentication, and the security mode may be entered, and then the game machine may be configured to enter the security mode by performing a predetermined operation. For example, after the authentication of the security dongle is completed, the sub input button SB may be pressed three times to shift to the security mode. With this configuration, the security mode can be configured not to shift to the security mode without using the security dongle. Therefore, the operation that the player can operate by pressing the sub-input button SB three times is changed to the security mode. Even when the transition condition is set, the player who does not have the security dongle can be configured not to be able to shift to the security mode. Further, in the case of the gaming machine in which the entry state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described in the eighth embodiment, the security dongle is inserted to complete the authentication, and the security mode is set. By moving, it is configured so that the information regarding the entered ball is displayed on the entered state display device J10 (the information regarding the entered ball is not displayed on the entered state display device J10 unless the authentication by the security dongle is completed). May be. Further, in the case of a gaming machine in which the incoming state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described above in the eighth embodiment, a security dongle is inserted and authentication is completed, and an operation member (for example, , The sub input button SB, the firing handle D44, the RAM clear button, etc. are operated to shift to the security mode, and the information regarding the entrance is displayed on the entrance state display device J10 (authentication by the security dongle). The information relating to the ball entry is not displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 unless the above is completed). Also, regarding the dongle insertion opening for inserting the security dongle, even if the door unit is opened, it may be arranged at a position where it is difficult to artificially access from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine. Good {The security dongle only needs to be electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board or the main control board. For example, the security dongle is fixed to the board and the board to board (or the prize ball payout control board or the main ball). Improves security by adopting a mode in which the connector part corresponding to the dongle insertion port is pulled out from the control board by a harness and the security dongle is connected to the connector part (in addition, the board part is enclosed and caulked). In this case, there is no need to provide a dongle insertion port, and even if the door unit is opened, Artificial access to the guru becomes difficult}.

  Further, in the present example, one out-outlet C80 is provided, and the game ball entering the out-outlet C80 can be detected by the out-outlet entrance detecting device C80s, but a plurality of out-outlets may be provided. Good. For example, a total of two outlets are provided, one at the same position as this embodiment (denoted as an outlet A) and one on the right side of the board (denoted as an outlet B). A device for detecting a game ball may be provided at each of the two outlets, so that the game ball entering the outlet A and the game ball entering the outlet B can be measured. With such a configuration, it is possible to generate more detailed information regarding the flow down of the game ball. That is, even when it is determined that the winning ratio of the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is not normal when the general winning opening is provided on both the left side and the right side of the game board as in this embodiment. It is not possible to judge whether the state of entry into the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game board is abnormal or the situation of entering the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game board is abnormal. Even in such a case, if the direction of the game nail located near the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game board is illegally changed and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the general winning opening, , It is difficult to enter a game ball that has not entered the relevant general winning opening into the out opening B, in other words, which gaming nail does it have? It can be configured so that it is easy to determine whether or not the orientation of has been changed illegally.

  Next, in FIGS. 116 to 118, in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as a configuration relating to information relating to a ball entering, counting of a ball entering, calculation of information relating to a ball entering, and information relating to a ball entering are displayed. It is a list showing items that can be performed and a method thereof. As long as these items can be combined with each other, the combined mode is included in the content of this example, and the mode having two or more items in each classification is also included in this example. Shall be provided. Specifically, the large items are classified into 13 items A to M, and each has a plurality of small items as a subordinate concept of the large items. In the remarks column, detailed explanations of corresponding small items, measurement (counting), calculation, reasons for displaying, and specific examples thereof are shown. Although detailed description will be given below, the present embodiment is not limited to the modes that can be assumed from this list.

First, A.1 which is a main item shown in the upper left of FIG. As a subordinate concept of the game ball counting period (the period for counting the number of game balls entering the various entrances), there are the following small items.
A1. Counting at any time: Not limited to the period in which the maintenance mode is executed, the number of game balls entering is counted at any time even in the period in which the maintenance mode is not executed.
A2. Count only during maintenance mode: The number of game balls entered is counted only during the period when the maintenance mode is executed. It should be noted that it may be the entire period during execution of the maintenance mode, or may be the predetermined period during execution of the maintenance mode.
A3. Each business day or designated business period: Even if the maintenance mode is not being executed, the game balls can be counted, but only the designated date and time (period) can be counted, and the designated date and time ( You may comprise so that it may not count except the period. It should be noted that the RTC may be used to determine whether or not it is the designated period. For example, when the business hours of the hall are from 9:00 to 23:00, the business hours are set to RTC (the business hours vary depending on the business area, so the setting may be changed by operating the sub-input buttons or the like. It is also possible to display the number of winning balls per unit time (preventing adjustment of the base value in the hall). For example, when the business hours are from 9:00 to 23:00, the business hours may be set and the entry into various winning openings outside the business hours may be monitored. In addition, the number of balls entering each of the various entrances per unit time outside the business hours (for example, every 10 minutes outside the business hours) may be individually manageable. With this configuration, for example, it becomes possible for the person in charge of the hall to see through the base value adjustment in a short time by caring for the game ball.

Next, B. which is a major item. As a subordinate concept of the measurement mode of information related to entering a ball (measurement mode when measuring information related to entering a game ball into various entrances), there are the following small items.
B1. Predetermined operation on the sub input button: The maintenance mode can be activated and operated by operating the sub input button. For example, pressing the sub input button starts measurement and then pressing the sub input button again. The measurement may be ended with.
B2. Predetermined operation on the firing handle: For example, measurement is started by starting a predetermined operation (eg, touching, rotating, etc.) on the firing handle, and then terminated by ending the operation of the firing handle. It may be finished. Note that the measurement may be started after the operation is continued for a fixed time, or the measurement suspension may be suspended for a fixed time after the operation is completed.
B3. Period when the game ball is flowing down to the game area: For example, the measurement period can be determined by providing a sensor capable of determining whether or not the game ball is flowing down to the game area.
B4. When the total number of discharged balls confirmed exceeds a predetermined value: For example, when the number exceeds a predetermined value (in a period such as a predetermined time, a business day, or a business week), the data may be stored. Not only the total number of discharged balls confirmed, but save the data if the countable number of entered balls such as the total number of entered balls, the number of out exits, the number of winning entrances, etc. exceeds a predetermined value. May be

Next, the major item, C.I. There are the following sub-items as a subordinate concept of the ball-entry related count target type (classification of the ball entrances that can be counted).
C1. Number of balls entered into the first main game starting opening: When calculating the ratio of the accessory character of K7, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric accessory is not a target. In addition, in the case of calculating the continuous character ratio of K8, which will be described later, it is not the target of the number of prize balls by the character continuous device.
C2. Number of balls entered into the second main game starting opening: When calculating the ratio of the accessory character of K7, which will be described later, the number of balls to be prized by the electric accessory is the target. In addition, in the case of calculating the continuous character ratio of K8, which will be described later, it is not the target of the number of prize balls by the character continuous device.
C3. Number of balls entered into the special winning opening: In the case of calculating a K7 accessory ratio, which will be described later, the number of balls awarded by the electric accessory is targeted. In addition, in the case of calculating a continuous winning character ratio of K8, which will be described later, it is a target of the number of prize balls by the winning character continuous device.
C4. Number of balls entered into general winning a prize hole: When calculating the ratio of K7 prizes, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by electric prizes is not included. In addition, in the case of calculating the continuous character ratio of K8, which will be described later, it is not the target of the number of prize balls by the character continuous device.
C5. Total number of balls entered: The total number of balls entered into the game machine, which can be confirmed by, for example, the number of times the device for launching the game balls is activated and the total number of balls discharged.
C6. Out-out entrance number of balls: It can be detected by an out-out entrance ball detection device. Note that a plurality of out-outlets and out-outlet entrance detection devices may be provided.

Next, D. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the game state to be counted (by the state of the specific game state and the classification regarding whether or not the special game is being executed).
D1. All game states: Regardless of the current game state (for example, whether it is a time-reduced game state or whether a special game is being executed), it is counted. It should be noted that the data may be stored only when there is a game over a certain period of time.
D2. Probability change game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D3. Stochastic variation game state and non-time-reduced game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D4. Non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D5. Non-probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state: Only the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state) may be configured to be counted. Further, it may be configured to separately count two gaming states of a normal gaming state and a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (also referred to as a specific gaming state). In the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D6. During special game execution: During maintenance mode, even if the special game is not being executed, it can be forcibly changed to the special game being executed state (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Good.
D7. No special game is being executed: During maintenance mode, even if the special game is being executed, it can be forcibly changed to a state that the special game is not being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Good.

Next, E. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the confirmation method (information relating to the game ball, which is a method of confirming the counted, calculated, and stored data from the outside).
E1. Confirmation with a collation device connected to an external terminal: A dedicated machine (for example, collation device) may be connected to the external terminal to read information (for example, information such as the number of payouts is written in a specific RAM area for collation). . In this case, the maintenance mode may be omitted. The security dongle may be used to encrypt the information in the volatile memory to enhance the security.
E2. Confirmation with the ball entering state display device on the main control board M side: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed on the peripheral device.
E3. Confirmation on the effect display device on the sub-control board S side: All are calculated by the program inside the game machine and displayed on the peripheral device.

Next, the major item shown in the upper left of FIG. As a subordinate concept of the counting method {a method of confirming the number of balls entered or discharged (including the case where it is regarded as a pseudo number of balls entered or discharged)}, there are the following small items.
F1. Ball sensor provided at various ball entrances: The first (second) main game starting entrance ball detecting device, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detecting device, the general winning hole entrance detecting device, etc. Entry can be detected. A plurality of each entrance may be provided and may be counted individually or may be totaled.
F2. Total discharge confirmation sensor: a sensor that detects all game balls that have entered the various entrances and passed through the exits.
F3. Payout Count Sensor: A sensor continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit, which measures the number of game balls paid out to the player.
F4. Sensor that detects that the firing handle is operating: A sensor that can detect that the firing handle is operating. The base value, the number of shots, or the like may be determined based on the time calculated by the internal timer by the sensor detection.
F5. Number of shots of the launch device: For example, the number of times the game ball is shot from the launch device is detected by an internal counter.
F6. A sensor for recognizing the intensity of shooting a game ball: For example, as the strength of the launch, it is possible to determine when the player hits the ball right (strong) or left (weak), and the number of balls launched (or the number of balls ejected) It may be configured to provide a measurable sensor. Based on the measurement result by the sensor, it is possible to calculate the information such as the base value relating to the ball entry.

Next, G. The following sub-items are subordinate to the operator (operator in maintenance mode).
G1. Inspector: A person who confirms whether the direction of the game nail is normal, etc., and is a person who mainly uses the collator and maintenance mode. For example, it is an inspector of a gaming machine manufacturer, an inspector of the mechanism, an inspector of a competent government agency, and the like.
G2. Hall manager: A person who can open the door unit and operate the back of the gaming machine in the maintenance mode.
G3. Player: A person who can only perform operations that anyone can operate.

Next, the main item, H.264. The following sub-items are subordinate to the maintenance mode startup method and operation method (operation at maintenance startup and operation method for display selection after startup).
H1. Sub-input button: It can be activated and operated by the player. It should be noted that, after starting the maintenance mode that cannot be started by the player, the operation in the maintenance mode may be enabled by inputting the sub input button.
H2. Door unit open + sub input button: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the sub input button, the player cannot start and operate.
H3. Opening the door unit + operating the firing handle: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the firing handle, the player cannot start and operate. In addition, it can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine.
H4. Opening the door unit + operating buttons (RAM clear button, etc.) on the main control board M side: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the buttons on the main control board M side, the player starts up. And cannot operate. It should be noted that it is preferable that the game machine can be operated from the rear side thereof and cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine.
H5. Opening the door unit + Entering the entrance slot at the time of invalid winning: Entering the big winning opening when a special game is not in progress, etc. is an invalid prize, and the player opens the door unit during the game. Even when the game ball is opened, the maintenance mode is not displayed even if the game ball is inserted into the ball entrance that does not result in an invalid prize.
H6. When the collation of the password and the like is coincident: This is a condition that the player cannot activate and operate the maintenance mode, and even the hall-related person cannot start the operation unless the collation of the password and the like is coincident. The password may be changed within a predetermined period (for example, a day of the week).

Next, I. As a subordinate concept of the area for executing the processing (the area for processing the information related to the game ball), there are the following small items.
I1. Winning detection is executed on the main control board M side: winning number information may be transmitted to the sub control board, and the base value and the like may be calculated and displayed on the sub control board S side.
I2. Execution of information relating to winning is executed on the main control board M side: prize number information (for example, the number of passing through each winning opening switch) and the number of payouts are displayed on the display of the main control board M. It should be noted that it is possible to use an area (for example, the second program) that is not used during normal game progress.
I3. Execution of information relating to ball entry on the side of the sub-control board S: The display mode on the display device on the side of the main control board M may be different when the normal game progresses and when the maintenance mode is displayed (for example, (The amount of information that can be displayed, such as full-color display, may be increased.)
I4. Display of result of calculation of information relating to ball entry on main control board M side: Display on ball entry status display device. It should be noted that the main game symbol display device and the auxiliary game symbol display device can also be displayed, for example, in a mode (for example, color display or blinking display) different from that during normal game progress.
I5. Display of result of calculation of information relating to ball entry on the side of the sub-control board S: display on the effect display device. It should be noted that, as the effect display device, a first effect display device and a second effect display device may be provided, and information relating to entering a ball may be displayed on the second effect display device. The second effect display device is, for example, an effect display device having a display area that is narrower than that of the first effect display device in its display area, and is displayed on the display object of the first effect display device, for example. The decorative pattern, the hold image, and the error display image that are obtained may be different from the display object.
I6. Calculation of information relating to ball entry is executed on the main control board M side and the sub-control board S side respectively: The calculation results of both may be collated to detect an error (in this case, the main control board M side). The sub-control board S side may have a different counting period).
I7. Calculation of information relating to a ball is executed by a process in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: The prize may be detected, calculated, or displayed in an area which is not used during normal game progress.
I8. The display processing of the calculation result of the information related to the ball entering is executed by the processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: the prize is detected, calculated, or displayed in the area not used during the normal game progress. Good

Next, the major item, J. As a subordinate concept of the method of measuring time (the method of measuring a period which is a reference unit of information related to entering a ball), there are the following small items.
J1. Interrupt timer: A timer measurement process is provided in the interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals.
J2. Clock outside game machine (for example, wristwatch, stopwatch): The inspector himself measures the time, not the timer inside the game machine.
J3. RTC: Timer measurement is performed using RTC.

Next, the main item shown in the upper left of FIG. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the display target of the maintenance mode (information relating to the game ball that can be displayed during the maintenance mode).
K1. Base value: For example, a base value when the maintenance mode is activated, a base value for a predetermined period while the maintenance mode is activated, or a base value only in a specific game state may be displayed.
K2. Ball entry ratio between main game starting opening and general winning opening: For example, normal or abnormal may be displayed at a predetermined timing (a predetermined total number of discharges, a total number of winnings, etc.).
K3. Number of Balls Entered at Starting Port, General Prize Port, and Special Winning Port: The number of balls entered at the starting port, general winning port, and special winning port may be displayed only in a specific game state.
K4. Number of prize balls of starting opening, general winning opening and special winning opening: The number of balls entering the starting opening, general winning opening and special winning opening only in a specific game state may be displayed.
K5. Total number of winnings: The total number of winnings at the starting opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening.
K6. Total discharge confirmation number: This is synonymous with the number of all game balls shot, and is the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter.
K7. Character ratio: The ratio of the number of prize balls to the prize holes (the second main game starting port in this example) in which the large prize holes and the electric auditors are provided for all the prize balls.
K8. Percentage of consecutive prizes: The ratio of the number of prize balls from the special winning opening to all prize balls.
K9. Number of shot balls: The number of all game balls shot.

Next, the major item, L. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the maintenance mode display method (a method of displaying information on game balls during the maintenance mode).
L1. Ball entry status display device (main control board M side): Displayed in 7 segments on the board surface (× 2 in this example).
L2. Effect display device (sub-control board S side): A second effect display device may be provided and displayed.
L3. Dedicated display on the prize-ball payout control board: It is invisible to the player (for example, 7-segment display).
L4. Dedicated display on the main control board: It is invisible to the player (for example, a 7 segment display, 7 segments × 4 in this example).
L5. 1st (2nd) main game symbol display device: Only during the maintenance mode, it may be possible to light in a specific mode as a specific lamp lighting mode.
L6. Auxiliary game symbol display device: Only in the maintenance mode, it may be possible to light in a specific mode as a specific lamp lighting mode.
L7. Frame decoration lamp (may also be a game effect lamp D26): various lighting modes may be used depending on the type of lamp that can be lit in three or more lighting modes (for example, a special figure and a general winning a prize are selected. The ratio is notified by the light emission mode). With such a configuration, a large amount of information can be notified as the information relating to the entry.
L8. Voice: It may be notified by voice whether the information regarding the ball entry is normal or abnormal. Note that the volume and the like may be different depending on whether it is normal or abnormal.

A major item, M. There are the following small items as a subordinate concept of the backup mode (a mode in which information about game balls is stored).
M1. Backup of information such as the number of winnings only when a predetermined condition is satisfied: The predetermined condition is, for example, a day when the number of shots is 10,000 balls or more, a day when the discharge number is 6000 balls or more, a steering wheel operation for a predetermined time. , A predetermined number of out-mouth detection balls, a predetermined number of prize-winning balls, and the like.
M2. Regardless of the condition being satisfied, backup for a certain period of time: sequential overwrite update may be performed.
M3. The erased data on the main control board M side is backed up on the sub control board S side: For example, it may be stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side.
M4. No backup: When the power is restored, information such as the number of winnings may be cleared.
M5. Erase old information when new information is saved: For example, a ring buffer may be used for backup.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine in this example may have the following configuration. Further, a plurality of the configurations described below may be combined and configured.

  To prevent cases in which the person in charge of the hall adjusts the base value such as the number of winnings outside business hours (for example, manually throwing the game ball into the general winning opening), for example, the sub-control board The S side may be configured to be able to store the number of winnings per unit time and the like.

  Further, it may be configured such that the password to be verified at the start of the maintenance mode is changed for each day of the week or the date, and the maintenance mode can be started (displayed) only when the input key and the verification key match.

  The main control board M side and the sub-control board S side may be configured to collect the information regarding the ball entry and to confirm whether or not there is any discrepancy in the totaled results of both. In this case, the main control board M side counts up every hour, while the sub control board S side counts up every 15 minutes, so that the sub control board S side and the main control board M side count up. The period may be different. For example, when the sub-control board S side collects data in a shorter period than the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side increases a large number of balls in a short period of time. It may be a criterion that some kind of adjustment or fraud may be implemented sooner or later. Since the sub-control board S has a larger capacity, the capacity problem is less likely to occur in storing the number of winnings per unit period even when the total period is shortened.

  It may be configured such that information data relating to a ball that has been erased on the main control board M side is stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side. With such a configuration, it becomes impossible for the person in charge of the game arcade to erase and adjust the data in order to adjust the number of balls entered, for example, by removing the battery or short-circuiting the battery.

  Totaling may be performed during the firing of the game ball (for example, a period during which the firing handle D44 is on by a firing handle touch sensor (a sensor that detects that the firing handle D44 is being operated)). After detection by the firing handle touch sensor, start counting the number of balls entered after entering any of the ball entrances, and after a certain period of time (or when the firing handle touch sensor is no longer detected) It is also possible to total the number of entered balls until a certain period after the game balls are won.

  A sensor that recognizes the intensity of the game sphere (referred to as a game sphere emission intensity recognition sensor) recognizes the intensity of the intensity, and when the player hits the ball right (launch strength = strong) and left (launch strength = weak). The game state is judged depending on which is executed (non-time-reduced game state when left-handed, time-reduced game state when right-handed, etc.), and data corresponding to the determined game state is calculated. It may be that.

  By opening the front door unit D18 (the door opening flag is on), and winning the winning opening at the time of invalid winning (for example, entering the big winning opening when the special game is not being executed) The maintenance mode may be displayed. To prevent the player from seeing the maintenance mode display when the prize is released when the door unit D18 is released and the grape clogging is cleared, to prevent the player from seeing the maintenance mode display when the prize is invalid It is supposed to be displayed only in the case of.

  In addition to displaying the total of all the winning ratios, the winning ratio may be displayed according to the winning openings (first (second) main game starting opening, large winning opening, and general winning opening). .

  Since all the winning numbers and the number of passing balls from the main control board M side to the sub-control board S side to the sub-control board S side are transmitted as commands, the sub-control board S side displays time series of each data. By displaying the graph, it is possible to confirm the change in the base value, the presence / absence of execution of an illegal game, and the like from the slope of the graph.

  Information related to entering the display device (entry state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device, etc.) on the main control substrate M side by control by the main control substrate M side When displaying, it is necessary to expand the data for display and display it. However, when a collator is used, the data is directly sucked from the specified RAM and displayed in hexadecimal etc. on the collator. It becomes possible.

  The number of winnings and the number of payouts of each winning opening may be displayed on the display device on the main control board M side. With such a configuration, the display contents can be switched by pressing the RAM clear button, for example. In addition, the maintenance mode may be displayed under a condition that a disconnection short circuit error can be displayed (for example, the connector of the starting port is pulled out), and the display content of the maintenance mode may be invisible to the player. .

  The total number of prize balls may be displayed on an error display device (for example, 7-segment display) for an error provided on the prize ball payout control board. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the number of payouts at that time from the power-on on the actual machine. Alternatively, the number of prize balls (the number of payouts) may be output to the outer end as the prize ball information.

  On the side of the main control board M, the number of balls (= the number of shot balls) passing to the outlet, the total number of payouts (the total number of payouts), the low base calculation value (in a non-time shortened gaming state, depending on a specific winning port) Save the four data of the sum of the number of prize balls), the value for high base calculation (the sum of the number of prize balls by a specific winning opening in the time-reduced gaming state), and display the data on the indicator light on the main control board M side. It may be used for data display.

  By constantly monitoring the information related to entering the ball, a value for low base calculation {base value, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game shortening flag is off ) Is calculated from the main control board M side under conditions such that the value for low base calculation / the number of shot balls × 100 (%) is less than a predetermined%. A command may be transmitted to the side of the sub-control board S, and a notification may be given by an effect display device, a frame decoration lamp (may be the game effect lamp D26), or the like.

  The main control board M side may be configured to transmit all the number of passages to each win / out port and the number of prize balls from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. In such a case, the sub control is performed. On the board S side as well, it is possible to execute the same display as that on the main control board M side by the effect display device.

  By the control on the main control board M side, data such as the number of winnings is displayed on the display device on the main control board M side (ball entering state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device). When displaying, for example, during the display of the standby demo screen, in order not to obstruct the display of the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol display, the number of continuous operation of the condition device (number of consecutive games), the status notification when the power is turned on, etc. Alternatively, a switch or the like on the back side of the board may be used) to shift to the maintenance mode.

  The game board surface may be formed as an integral molding so that no game nail is used at all. Further, the game nails related to the winning openings may be U-shaped nails and may be in a continuous form. In addition, by providing a marking (for example, like a colored marking) with a size that hides the head of the game nail, the deviation of the game nail from the initial position may be recognized at a glance. .

In addition, the gaming machine in this example may be configured such that the player can display information regarding entry. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which the player can display information relating to entering a ball will be described in detail below.
(1) The information related to entering a ball is always displayed on the effect display device.
(2) By a predetermined operation on the standby demo screen (when there is no hold), it is possible to arbitrarily select whether or not to display the total number of balls entered during the game.
(3) When a predetermined operation is performed by the player during the game, it is possible to arbitrarily switch to a state in which the total number of entered balls can be displayed.
(4) When a specific effect is executed in a situation where the effect display device is displaying the information related to the ball entry, the information related to the ball entry is not displayed during execution of the particular effect. (Displayed again after the production ends).
(5) When the effect display device is configured to have two effect display devices, a first effect display device and a second effect display device, it is displayed in a part of the display area of the first effect display device. It is possible to switch the information related to the entered ball to be displayed on the second effect display device.
It may be configured as described above.

  In addition, in this example, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration of displaying information regarding entry into the ball may be applied to the rotating-body gaming machine. Here, a supplementary description will be given of the well-known spinning type game machine.

  First, on a well-known spinner type gaming machine, a main board as a main game control section that controls the progress of the game, a sub board as a sub game control section that controls the execution of the production, and main game identification information are displayed. As a main game identification information display section, a plurality of rows (generally three rows) of reels each having a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged on the outer periphery, and a main game start that can be operated by the player and instruct to start the game It has a start lever as an instruction device, and a stop button as a main game progress instruction device that can be operated by the player and instruct the progress of the game. Then, on the main board, a main game random number acquisition unit that acquires a main game random number when the start lever is operated, and one or more stop identifications based on the random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition unit. Main game identification information display content deciding means for tentatively determining information (for example, display content deciding means for internally determining a winning combination such as a small win or special bonus), and main game identification information display content deciding Based on one or a plurality of stop identification information provisionally determined by the means and the operation timing of the stop button, the main control for displaying one stop identification information on the reel which is the main game identification information display unit Gaming identification information display control means (for example, reel control means for stopping the reel at a predetermined position based on the internally determined winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed), When a predetermined mode is displayed as stop identification information on the reel that is the game identification information display unit, special game execution control means (for example, "777 etc.") that controls to shift to the special game is on a predetermined effective line. The special game object operating means for activating the special game object) and the information about the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means is transmitted to the sub game control section side. And transmission control means. Further, when the stop identification information is a small winning combination, the number of game medals corresponding to the small winning combination that is stopped and displayed is paid out, and the stop identification information becomes the specific mode even during the execution of the special game. In this case, the number of game medals corresponding to the stop identification information of the specific mode is paid out.

  Such a well-known spinning drum type game machine may be provided with a ball entry state display device and configured to be able to display information relating to the ball entry on the ball entry state display device. It may be configured to display the information relating to the entry. Further, the incoming state display device may be provided on the outer surface (the surface visible to the player) of the spinning-type gaming machine, or another display device (a device for displaying the number of credits, a display for the number of payouts). Device, etc.). Further, the incoming state display device may be provided at a position where it can be viewed only by opening the door of the spinning-type gaming machine.

  The conditions for displaying the information relating to entering the ball are "open the door of the rotating type gaming machine + operation of the sub input button", "hold down the RAM clear button", "open the door of the rotating type gaming machine" There is no problem under any condition, such as "open", depending on the purpose (condition that only the manager can operate, condition that the player can operate, etc.).

  In addition, the content displayed on the incoming state display device is a bonus (or a special game) for all paid-out game medals including small wins (the total number of paid-out game medals regardless of whether they are special games or not). The percentage of game medals paid out is displayed, that is, "all the game medals paid out including small wins / the game medals paid out by the bonus (or by the special game) x 100 (%)" is displayed (proportion of character) Is displayed), or "the number of game medals inserted into the game machine in a predetermined period / the number of game medals paid out from the game machine in a predetermined period x 100" (so-called base value) is displayed. It may be configured as follows.

(9th Embodiment)
In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the structure which can display the information regarding a ball entry in the ball entry state display device J10 was illustrated, the structure which can display the information relevant to a ball entry in the ball entry state display device J10 was mentioned above. The configuration is not limited to the above. Therefore, as a configuration capable of displaying the information relating to the ball entry on the entry state display device J10, a configuration different from the configuration according to the above-described embodiment will be referred to as a ninth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described below. , Will be described in detail.

  Incidentally, in the ninth embodiment, a counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s in the non-time shortened game state, and the non-time saving total discharge stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side. The confirmation number counter MJ11c-91 and a counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s in the time-reduced game state, and the time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side. MJ11c-92. In addition, the first main game starting opening A10 where the electric accessory is not provided, and the general winning opening P10 are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered in the non-time shortened gaming state, and the main control board M side. The non-time saving non-product counter MHc-7 stored in the RAM area of and the number of game balls entered in the non-time-reduced game state at the second main game starting opening B10 provided with the electric accessory is measured. A non-time saving accessory counter MHc-8 which is a counter and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side, a first main game starting opening A10 in which no electric accessory is provided, and a general winning opening P10, A counter for measuring the number of game balls entered in the time shortening game state, a time saving non-incident object counter MHc-9 stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side, and an electric accessory. Second main game start B10 to a counter for measuring the game counts were ball entrance at time saving game state, and a time-shortening won game counter MHc-10 stored in the RAM area of the main control board M side.

  First, FIG. 119 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2850 (ninth), that is, the timer interruption process is started, and after the processes of steps 2000 to 1600 are executed, in step 2850 (ninth), the main control is executed. The board M executes a ball entering state calculation process described later, and proceeds to step 1900.

  Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the ninth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2508-1 (9th) to step 2508-3 (9th), that is, in step 2506, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 causes the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. After turning on, in step 2508-1 (ninth), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game short-time flag is off ( It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time shortened gaming state. If Yes in step 2508-1 (9th), in step 2508-2 (9th), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds 1 to the counter value of the non-shortened total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-91. (Increment) and shifts to the next process (process of step 2600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2508-1 (ninth), in step 2508-3 (ninth), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 sets 1 to the counter value of the time saving total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-92. Addition (increment) is performed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Incidentally, the counter value of the non-time saving total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-91 is the total number of discharged balls in the non-time shortened gaming state, in other words, the total of the game balls shot in the non-time shortened gaming state. Further, the counter value of the time saving total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-92 is the total number of discharged balls in the time shortened gaming state, in other words, the total of the game balls shot in the time shortened gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (ninth) of FIG. 9 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2741, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2741, in step 2450 (ninth), the prize ball payout determination means MH executes a non-time saving prize ball number determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2741, in step 2550 (ninth), the prize ball payout determination means MH executes the time saving prize ball number determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the non-time saving award ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (ninth) of FIG. 121 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2452, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2452, in step 2454, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10. to add. Next, in step 2456, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines the non-time saving non-income object counter MHc-7 (the first main game starting opening A10 in which the electric accessory is not provided, the general winning opening P10, and the non-time). It is a counter that measures the number of game balls entered in the shortened game state, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) as the counter value. In the example, 3) is added. Next, in step 2458, the award ball payout determination means MH informs the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb that the award balls associated with the first main game starting opening A10 are to be paid out (for example, the award ball payout number). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2460. On the other hand, if No in step 2452, the process moves to step 2460.

  Next, in step 2460, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2460, in step 2462, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. to add. Next, in step 2464, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the non-time saving accessory counter MHc-8 (the game that entered the second main game starting opening B10 in which the electric accessory is provided in the non-time saving game state) A counter for measuring the number of balls, which is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side), is added with the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. . Next, in step 2466, the award ball payout determination means MH informs the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb of information indicating that the award ball relating to the second main game starting opening B10 is paid out (for example, the award ball payout number). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2468. On the other hand, if No in step 2460, the process moves to step 2468.

  Next, in step 2468, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening entry flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2468, in step 2470, the prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) special winning opening entry flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2472, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc as the prize ball payout amount (13 in this example) associated with the first special winning opening C10 (the second special winning opening C20). ) Is added. Next, in step 2474, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb with the information that the prize balls associated with the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20) are to be paid out. (For example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) is temporarily stored. Next, at step 2476, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (13 in this example) related to the first (second) special winning opening to the counter value of the continuous accessory counter MHc-6. , And proceeds to step 2478. On the other hand, if No in step 2468, the process moves to step 2478.

  Next, in step 2478, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2478, in step 2480, the prize-ball payout determination means MH turns off the general prize-winning entrance flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2482, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball payout amount (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2484, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the non-time saving non-income object counter MHc-7. Next, in step 2486, the award ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb with the information that the award balls relating to the general winning a prize are to be paid out (for example, the information relating to the number of award ball payouts). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, if No in step 2478, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1100). In the ninth embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out from the first main game starting opening A10 and the number of prize balls paid out from the second main game starting opening B10 are the same three balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The number of prize balls paid out may be changed. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out of the first main game starting opening A10 may be changed to 4 balls, and in such a case, the number of prize balls paid out of the second main game starting opening B10. May be 1 to 3 balls, which is less than the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game starting opening A10.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the time saving award ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (ninth) of FIG. 121 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2552, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10. to add. Next, in step 2556, the prize ball payout determination means MH shortens the time to the time saving non-incident object counter MHc-9 (the first main game starting opening A10 where the electric accessory is not provided and the general winning opening P10). It is a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered in the game state, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) with the counter value of the first main game starting opening A10 (this example) Then, add 3). Next, in step 2558, the prize-ball payout determination means MH provides the unpaid prize-ball information temporary storage means MHb with information that the prize-ball related to the first main game starting opening A10 is to be paid out (for example, the number of prize-ball payouts). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2560. On the other hand, if No in step 2552, the process moves to step 2560.

  Next, in step 2560, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2560, in step 2562, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the prize ball payout amount (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. to add. Next, in step 2564, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the time saving part counter MHc-10 (the game ball entered in the second main game starting opening B10 where the electric accessory is provided in the non-time shortening game state) It is a counter that measures the number and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) and adds the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. Next, in step 2566, the award ball payout determination means MH provides the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means MHb with information indicating that the award ball relating to the second main game starting opening B10 is paid out (for example, the award ball payout number). (Information relating to) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2568. On the other hand, if No in step 2560, the process moves to step 2568.

  Next, in step 2568, the prize-ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first (second) special winning opening entry flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the prize-ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) special winning opening entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2572, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc as the prize ball payout amount (13 in the present example) related to the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20). ) Is added. Next, in step 2574, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb with the information that the prize balls relating to the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20) are to be paid out. (For example, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out) is temporarily stored. Next, in step 2576, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (in this example, 13) related to the first (second) special winning opening to the counter value of the continuous accessory counter MHc-6. , And proceeds to step 2578. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process moves to step 2578.

  Next, in step 2578, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2578, in step 2580, the award ball payout determination means MH turns off the general winning award entrance flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2582, the prize-ball payout determination means MH adds the prize-ball payout number (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize-ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2584, the prize-ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize-ball payouts (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the time saving non-income object counter MHc-9. Next, in step 2586, the prize-ball payout determination means MH pays out the unpaid prize-ball information temporary storage means MHb with information that the prize-balls related to the general winning a prize are to be paid out (for example, information related to the number of prize-ball payouts). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, if No in step 2578, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1100). Thus, in the ninth embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening P10 depends on whether or not it is in the time shortening game state. Since it is configured to measure with different counters, the number of balls entered into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, and the time saving game in the non-time shortening game state. It is possible to measure the number of balls entered into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and the general winning opening P10 in the state.

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the ball entering state calculation processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (ninth) of FIG. 119 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2862, the entering information control means NS determines, as the character ratio, "(non-time saving character counter value + time saving character counter value + continuous character effect counter value) / (non-time saving character counter value + time saving character). The character product counter value + the continuous character product counter value + the non-time saving non character character counter value + the time saving non character character counter value) × 100 ”. Next, at step 2864, the incoming ball information control means NS determines, as the continuous character ratio, “continuous character counter value / (non-time saving character counter value + time saving character function counter value + continuous character effect counter value + non time saving). Non-incident object counter value + time saving non-incident object counter value) × 100 ”is calculated. Next, at step 2866, the entry information control means NS refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2866, in step 2868, the entry information control means NS sets “(non-hour saving part counter value + non-time saving non-working object counter value) / non-time saving total discharge as the base value in the non-time saving game state. The confirmation number counter value × 100 ”is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 2872. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2866, in step 2870, the entry information control means NS sets "(hour saving character counter value + hour saving non-object object counter value) / time saving total discharge confirmation number as the base value in the time saving game state. The counter value × 100 ”is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 2872.

Next, in step 2872, the entry information control means NS updates the calculated character ratio, continuous character ratio and base value (base value in non-time-reduced game state or base value in time-reduced game state). Store temporarily. Next, at step 2874, the entry information control means NS determines whether or not the display update timing has been reached. Here, in the ninth embodiment, in the entry state display device J10, "the cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed for 2 seconds → the cumulative character ratio is displayed for 2 seconds → the cumulative base value in the time reduction game state. Is displayed for 2 seconds → The total base value in the non-time shortened game state is displayed for 2 seconds → The display update timing is reached → The cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed for 2 seconds → ... The display is repeated every second. That is, the above four items are displayed for 2 seconds each, and the timing immediately before the start of displaying the cumulative continuous accessory ratio as the first item of the next four items is the display update timing. In other words, a total of 8 seconds in which four items are displayed for 2 seconds is set as one cycle, and the timing when the display for one cycle is finished is set as the display update timing. Although not shown in the figure, information on entering the ball is displayed on the entering state display device J10 (continuous winning character ratio, winning character ratio, base value in non-time shortened gaming state, base value in time shortened gaming state). The processing up to is configured as follows.
(1) Detection of a ball hitting each winning ball (2) Information relating to a prize ball generated by hitting each winning hole (number of prize balls for each winning hole, hour-saving character counter value, time-saving non-incident object counter) Value, time saving total discharge confirmation number counter value, non-time saving accessory counter value, non-time saving non-effects object counter value, non-time saving total discharge confirmation number counter value, continuous accessory processing counter value, etc. are generated and temporarily stored (3 ) Perform processing for converting the generated prize ball information into data that can be displayed on the entry state display device (processing into data for displaying on 7 segments) (4) Displaying the transformed data for entry state Displayed on device J10

  In the ninth embodiment, every time the display update timing is reached, the latest consecutive winning character ratio, character ratio, the base value in the non-time-reduced game state or the base value in the time-reduced game state is temporarily stored. For example, when the cumulative character ratio is started to be displayed, the character ratio is configured to display the character ratio at the display update timing two seconds before. There is. The display mode of the information relating to the ball entry in the present example is not limited to this, and for example, the information relating to the ball entry displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 is updated every predetermined time (for example, 1 second). You may. Specifically, one second after the display of the cumulative character ratio is started, the latest cumulative character ratio is updated and displayed. In addition, the predetermined time related to the update is set as a timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms), and the items displayed on the incoming state display device J10 are switched every 2 seconds, but the display content is the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms). It may be configured to update and display the latest value (real-time value) (even for the same item) every time.

  In the case of Yes in step 2874, in step 2876, the entering information control means NS, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the base value in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state which are temporarily stored in step 2877. The base value in is displayed on the incoming state display device (the display mode is a display mode in which four items are displayed for 2 seconds each as described above, and a specific example will be described in detail in FIG. 125). The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2874, the process of step 2876 is not executed and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 125 is a display example of the entry state display device according to the ninth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure is an example of a display mode of the entry state display device J10 in the ninth embodiment. The entrance state display device J10 according to the ninth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the gaming machine, and unlocks the door unit D18 with the key held by the game arcade side. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the substrates attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check them. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the incoming state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the backside direction of the gaming machine, but the configuration of the incoming state display device J10 is not limited to this, and for example, Alternatively, the prize-ball payout control board KH may be provided on the surface of the sub-control board S in the back side of the gaming machine or the sub-control board S on the back side of the game machine. Further, the ball entering state display unit including the ball entering state display device J10 and the harness may be connectable to the main control board M, the sub control board S, or the prize ball payout control board KH. Further, when the incoming state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the sub-control board S or the prize ball payout control board KH in the backside direction of the gaming machine, the main control board M and the incoming state display device J10 are provided. The board (the sub-control board S or the prize-ball payout control board KH) that is present may be housed in one case. When the incoming state display unit is connectable to the main control board M, the incoming state display unit and the main control board M may be housed in one case. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable to use a transparent case so that the inside of the case can be visually recognized. Further, the incoming state display device J10 of the main control board M in the rear side of the gaming machine, the prize ball payout control board KH in the rear side of the gaming machine, and the sub-control board S in the rear side of the gaming machine. Even when it is provided on the surface, the substrate on which the entry state display device J10 is provided may be covered with a transparent case. Further, in the case where the main control board M has a polygonal shape and the entrance state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side of the gaming machine, the main control from the entrance state display device J10 is performed. The distance from the ball entering state display device J10 to the nearest side of the main control board M may be shorter than the distance to the center of gravity of the surface of the board M in the back side of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the influence of noise generated by the display on the ball entering state display device J10 on the main control board M.

  The ball entry state display device J10 is configured to display 4 bits of upper 2 digits and lower 2 digits, and is configured to start the display when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Also, what is displayed is (a) cumulative total character ratio, (b) cumulative character ratio, (c) cumulative base value in time-reduced game state (d) total value in non-time-reduced game state. There are four types of base value, and after switching on the power of the gaming machine, the values are switched in the order of “(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) ... It is configured to display a type of item. It should be noted that the display mode on the incoming-ball state display device J10 is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the display order or the type of items to be displayed is changed. As an example, as in the eighth embodiment described above, the cumulative role ratio may be displayed in addition to the cumulative continuous role ratio during the last 60,000 balls fired. Apart from the object ratio, it may be configured to display the character ratio in the latest 60000 ball firing period. In such a configuration, (A) cumulative total character ratio, (B) continuous character ratio in the last 60,000 shots, (C) cumulative character ratio, (D) latest 60,000. Six types of character ratios in the period of ball firing, (E) Cumulative base value in the time-reduced gaming state (F) Cumulative base value in the non-time-reduced gaming state, from the power-on of the gaming machine to )-> (B)-> (C)-> (D)-> (E)-> (F)-> (A) ... "in order of 2 seconds, and 6 types of items are displayed. . Further, like the base value, the cumulative continuous character ratio in the time-reduced game state may be displayed, or the continuous character ratio in the last 60,000 balls fired in the time-reduced game state may be displayed. Alternatively, the cumulative continuous character ratio in the non-time-reduced game state may be displayed, or the continuous character ratio in the last 60,000 balls fired in the non-time-reduced game state may be displayed. It is also possible to display the cumulative character ratio in the time-reduced game state, or to display the character ratio in the latest 60,000 balls fired in the time-reduced game state. The cumulative character ratio in the time-reduced game state may be displayed, or the character ratio in the last 60,000 balls fired in the non-time-reduced game state may be displayed. Cormorant may be configured. Also, the base value may be configured to display the base value in the last 60,000 balls fired in the time-reduced game state, or the base value in the last 60,000 balls fired in the non-time-reduced game state. It may be configured to display. In addition, when the base value in a predetermined game state is displayed in a situation in which the last 60,000 balls are fired over the game state, for example, “(1) 10,000 balls are fired in the non-time shortened game state → (2 ) 30,000 balls are shot in the time-reduced game state → (3) 20,000 balls are fired in the non-time-reduced game state ". When displaying the base value in the non-time-reduced game state," (1) Non "10000 shots in the time-reduced game state + (3) 20000 balls in the non-time-reduced game state = 30000 spheres", such as totaling only the game balls launched in the non-time-reduced game state The base value may be calculated (the character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be the same). Further, when the continuous character ratio is displayed on the incoming state display device J10, if the counter value of the continuous character counter MHc-6 is 0, that is, the value used in calculating the continuous character ratio is When the jackpot is not won during the period of measurement, the display of the continuous winning role ratio on the incoming state display device J10 is displayed as "99", and the display of "99" is an accurate value. It may be configured to indicate that it is not. In addition, regarding the items displayed on the incoming state display device J10 other than the continuous winning accessory ratio, "99" may be displayed if an accurate value has not been calculated.

  Further, as a specific display mode, it is suggested which item is currently displayed in the upper two digits, "A0" is the cumulative continuous character ratio, "A1" is the cumulative character ratio, It is displayed that "BH" is the base value in the time-reduced gaming state and "BL" is the base value in the non-time-reduced gaming state. In addition, the value of the item currently displayed in the lower two digits is displayed in%. It should be noted that, when the ratio of the continuous character displayed is over 60, the display mode of the lower two digits is made to blink so as to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases. Is lit up). In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio exceeds 70, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink in order to indicate that the value is not a normal value (in other cases, Is lit). As in the case of the eighth embodiment, if the data of shots of 60,000 balls is not stored, for example, if only 20,000 game balls have been shot since the game machine started operating, the top 2 The display mode of the digit may be configured to be a blinking display (in other cases, it is lit and displayed). The items displayed on the incoming-ball state display device J10 are not limited to those shown in the figures, and the display mode is merely an example.

  With the above configuration, in the ninth embodiment, by referring to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter, the number of game balls shot in the game area can be measured and the base value and the like can be calculated. It is possible to generate and display the information related to entering the ball in real time. In addition, the number of shot balls of the game ball, the number of balls entered into each winning opening, etc., which are necessary to generate information on the number of shot balls such as the number of shot balls of the game ball, are set as a time-reduced game state and a non-time-reduced game state Since it is configured to be able to measure separately, it is possible to generate and display the base value in the non-time shortened gaming state and the base value in the time shortened gaming state.

In the ninth embodiment, the base value can be generated and displayed for each game state (whether it is the time-reduced game state or the non-time-reduced game state), but the present invention is not limited to this. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be generated and displayed for each game state. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the base value is displayed for each game state, and the base value in the non-time-reduced game state and the base value in the time-reduced game state can be displayed separately. The configuration for displaying the base value separately for each situation may be configured as follows.
(1) A situation in which a left-handed game is executed to advance a game (a non-time-reduced gaming state and a big jackpot is not running), and a situation in which a right-handed game is executed to advance a game (a non-time-reduced gaming state and a big jackpot is running) , (Time-reducing game state) and (2) non-time-reducing game state and a situation where the jackpot is not being executed and a time-reducing game state and a situation where the jackpot is not being executed may be configured as described above. Further, it may be configured to display only the base value in the non-time shortening game state and the situation in which the big hit is not being executed on the ball entering state display device J10.

  In addition, the timing (sequence) for executing the process of determining the game state (process of determining whether it is the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state) when generating the information related to the ball is the winning opening It may be the timing of detecting the entry of a game ball into the prize hole (every time it enters the prize hole), or the timing of calculating the number of prize balls related to entering the prize hole (every time determining the prize ball number). Good.

  Further, it may be configured to have a ball entering state button that can be operated to change the display mode of the ball entering state display device J10 (when the ball entering state display device J10 is controlled by the main control board M, The ball status button is also controlled by the main control board M, and when the ball status display device J10 is controlled by the prize ball payout control board KH, the ball status button is also controlled by the prize ball payout control board KH), In such a case, by operating the ball entry state button, it is possible to display only the information relating to the ball entry when a predetermined number or more of game balls have been launched. Each time the ball state button is operated, the display in the ball entering state display device J10 may be switched to "character ratio → continuous character ratio → base value".

  In addition, the incoming ball state display device J10 is configured to display the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value when the number of shot balls equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 60000 balls) is measured. It may be good (when the number of fired balls is less than the predetermined number, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value are not displayed on the ball entering state display device J10).

  In addition, in the ninth embodiment, each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) In the case of a ball, the total number of prize balls corresponding to each prize hole is calculated based on the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize hole, and the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value are calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to calculate information relating to a ball for each winning opening. As an example, each time the player enters the first main game starting opening A10, the number of prize balls at the first main game starting opening A10 is calculated, and "the calculated number of prize balls at the first main game starting opening A10 / firing" The number of balls may be calculated, and the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls for each winning opening may be calculated. With this configuration, even when a person involved in the game hall or the like carefully enters the game ball into the predetermined entrance and intentionally adjusts the base value to an appropriate value, By confirming the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls related to the ball mouth, it is possible to make it easier to find the fraud. In addition, as a method of calculating the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls discharged for a predetermined prize hole, (1) the number of prize balls is calculated every time a player enters a predetermined prize hole, and added at any time, and thereafter, The ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls related to a predetermined prize hole is calculated using the number of prize balls after the addition. (2) The number of prize balls is added every time the player enters a predetermined prize hole, and thereafter , Calculate the total number of prize balls from the added number of balls, and use the calculated total number of prize balls to calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls related to a predetermined winning opening, etc. It may be configured as follows.

  In this example, the total number of game balls shot in the game area can be measured by measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, but the shot game balls are in the game area. Immediately after flowing into (for example, the return ball prevention unit provided on the launch rail), a sensor that can detect the game ball is provided, and the game ball can be detected in the game area, such as measuring the number of game balls detected by the sensor. By providing such a sensor, the total number of game balls shot in the game area (the total number of game balls discharged from the game area) may be measured.

(10th Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the information relating to the ball entering can be displayed on the ball entering state display device, and the processing such as generation / display of the information relating to the ball entering is executed on the main control board. However, the configuration related to processing such as generation / display of information regarding entry is not limited to that of the present embodiment. Therefore, as a configuration relating to processing such as generation / display of information regarding entry of balls, a configuration different from the configuration according to the present embodiment will be referred to as a tenth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. .

  In the tenth embodiment, the prize ball payout control board KH is a counter that receives and measures from the main control board M side that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has detected a game ball in the non-time shortened gaming state. , Award ball payout control board KH main non-time saving total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-91 stored in the RAM area, and the main control board that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has detected a game ball in the time shortened gaming state It is a counter that receives and measures from the M side, and has a payout time short total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-92 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Also, the number of game balls entered in the non-time-reduced game state into the first main game starting opening A10 where the electric accessory is not provided and the general winning opening P10 is received and measured from the main control board M side. It is a counter, and the payout non-time saving non-incident object counter HHc-7 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side and the non-time reduction in the second main game starting opening B10 in which the electric accessory is provided. A counter for receiving and measuring the number of game balls entered in the game state from the main control board M side, and a payout non-hour saving accessory counter HHc-8 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side. , A counter for receiving and measuring the number of game balls entered in the time-reduced game state in the first main game starting port A10 in which the electric accessory is not provided and the general winning port P10, Yes, prize ball payout system The payout time non-incident object counter HHc-9 stored in the RAM area on the board KH side and the number of game balls entered in the time-reduced game state in the second main game starting opening B10 in which the electric accessory is provided. It is a counter that receives and measures from the main control board M side, and has a payout short time accessory counter HHc-10 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side. In addition, it is a counter that receives and counts the number of game balls that entered the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 from the main control board M side, and is stored in the RAM area on the prize winning payout control board KH side. It has a payout continuous accessory counter HHc-6.

  First, FIG. 126 is an example of a diagram showing a structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the entry state display device J10 is provided as in the eighth embodiment, but the position where the entry state display device J10 is provided is different from that in the eighth embodiment. It is provided on the ball payout control board KH. Note that the display mode on the incoming state display device J10 in the tenth embodiment is similar to the display mode illustrated in FIG. 125. In addition, the ball entry state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the prize ball payout control board KH in the direction toward the back side of the game machine, and unlocks the door unit D18 with the key held by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to open the door unit D18 and check the substrates attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check the boards.

  Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2531 (tenth) and step 2532 (tenth), that is, in step 2506, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a flag of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. After turning on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the area, in step 2531, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 sends a total discharge confirmation count command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH and confirms the total discharge confirmation). The command relating to the fact that the sensor C90s detects the game ball) is set. Next, in step 2532 (tenth), the total discharge ball confirming means MJ11-C90 is a command related to the game state (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH, whether or not the time shortening game state, etc.). Command relating to the game state) and shifts to the step 2508.

  Next, FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the award ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2706 (tenth), step 2715 (tenth), step 2725 (tenth) and step 2735 (tenth), that is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means. After the MH adds the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10 to the prize ball number counter value, in step 2706 (tenth), the prize ball payout determination means MH 1 main game start opening ball entry command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, a command to the effect that a game ball entered the first main game start opening A10) is set, and the routine proceeds to step 2708.

  Further, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the prize ball number (three balls in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10 to the prize ball number counter value, and then step 2706 (tenth). Then, the prize ball payout determination means MH is a command to enter the second main game start opening ball (command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a command to the effect that the game ball entered the second main game starting opening B10. ) Is set and the process moves to step 2718.

  Further, in step 2724, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) related to the first prize hole C10 (second prize hole C20) to the prize ball counter value. In step 2725 (10th), the prize ball payout determination means MH is the first (2nd) special winning hole entrance command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the first special winning opening C10 or A command indicating that a game ball has entered the second special winning opening C20) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2728.

  In addition, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (in this example, 10 balls) related to the general winning opening P10 to the prize ball number counter value, and then in step 2735 (10th), The ball payout determination means MH sets a general winning a prize entrance command (a command to the award ball payout control board KH side and a command indicating that a game ball entered the general award winning entrance P10), and proceeds to step 2738. To do. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the winning holes such as the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20, and the general winning opening P10. When a game ball enters, the main control board M side is configured to send a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side that the game ball has entered the winning opening. The information included in the first main game starting mouth entrance command, the second main game starting entrance entrance command, the first (second) big prize entrance entrance command, and the general prize entrance entrance command is each prize. The information that the game ball has entered the mouth (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) is included. In addition to the information that the game ball has entered each prize hole, it is configured to include information on the number of prize balls paid out by entering the game ball into each prize hole. Good. In addition, when a plurality of game balls continuously enter a predetermined winning opening in a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds), information on the total number of award balls paid out by entering the short period. May be configured to be transmitted from the main control board M side to the prize ball payout control board KH, or the total prize balls from the number of game balls entered in each winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The number may be calculated, and the information may be transmitted from the main control board M side to the prize ball payout control board KH side as information regarding the total number of prize balls of each winning opening for each predetermined period.

  Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 30 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3102 (tenth) and step 3126 (tenth), that is, in step 3102 (tenth), the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj causes the payout incompletion flag (unpaid prize). After the ball information is set, it is determined whether or not the flag which is turned on until the main control board M side receives the fact that the payout of the game balls is completed on the prize ball payout control board KH side is off. If Yes in step 3102 (10th), the process moves to step 3105, and if No, the process moves to step 3130. In step 3125, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj erases the unpaid award ball information corresponding to the award ball payout command set this time from the unpaid award ball information temporary storage means, shifts subsequent information, and then the step 3126 In (10th), the payout information transmitting / receiving unit MHsj turns on the payout incompletion flag, and proceeds to step 3130. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the payout incompletion flag is turned off, that is, until the information regarding the completion of the payout process (prize ball payout completion information) is received from the prize ball payout control board KH. The process of 3130 is configured to repeatedly transmit the prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side.

  Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. 30 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3232 (tenth), that is, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj is set to the send command temporary storage means (the prize ball payout command (for completion of the present payout). After clearing the prize ball payout command), in step 3232 (the tenth), the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj receives information (prize ball payout completion information) indicating that the payout is completed from the prize ball payout control board KH side. By doing so, the payout incompletion flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side in the tenth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 4650 (tenth) and step 4800 (tenth), that is, in step 4600, after the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the motor error time process, In step 4650 (tenth), the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a ball count measuring process described later. Next, in step 4800 (tenth), the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a later-described ball incoming state calculation process, and shifts to the next process (process of step 4100).

  Next, FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the number of entered balls measurement process according to the subroutine of step 4650 (tenth) of FIG. 131 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 4652, the payout control means 3300 refers to the command relating to the game state received from the main control board M side {command set in step 2532 (tenth)}, and the current game state is a non-time-reduced game. It is determined whether or not the state. In the case of Yes in step 4652, in step 4700 (tenth), the payout control means 3300 executes a non-time saving ball count processing, which will be described later, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 4800 (tenth)}. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4652, in step 4750 (the 10th), the payout control means 3300 executes the time saving ball count measuring process described later, and shifts to the next process {the process of the step 4800 (the 10th)}. To do.

  Next, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the non-hourly shortened ball count measuring process according to the subroutine of step 4700 (tenth) of FIG. 132 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 4702, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first main game starting mouth entrance command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4702, in step 4704, the payout control unit 3300 sets the counter value of the payout non-time saving non-income object counter HHc-7 to the number of prize balls related to the first main game starting opening A10 (3 balls in this example). ) Is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 4706. On the other hand, if No in step 4702, the process moves to step 4706. Next, in step 4706, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the second main game starting opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4706, in step 4707, the payout control unit 3300 sets the counter value of the payout non-short time shortened object counter HHc-8 to the number of prize balls related to the second main game starting opening B10 (three balls in this example). Is added (incremented) and the process proceeds to step 4708. On the other hand, if No in step 4706, the process moves to step 4708.

  Next, in step 4708, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a general winning opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 4708, in step 4710, the payout control unit 3300 adds (increments) the number of prize balls (10 balls in this example) related to the general winning opening P10 to the payout non-time saving non-income object counter HHc-7. ), And then proceeds to step 4712. On the other hand, if No in step 4708, the process moves to step 4712. Next, in step 4712, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first (second) special winning opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4712, in step 4714, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout continuous winning accessory counter HHc-6 to the number of prize balls (in this example, the first big winning opening C10, 13 balls are added to each of the two major winning openings C20, and the process proceeds to step 4716. On the other hand, if No in step 4712, the process moves to step 4716. Next, in step 4716, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the total ejection confirmation number command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4716, in step 4718, the payout control unit 3300 increments the counter value of the payout non-hourly total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-91 by 1 (increment), and performs the next process {step 4800 (tenth). )}. On the other hand, if No in step 4716, the process proceeds to the next process {step 4800 (tenth)}.

  Next, FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the time-shortened ball count measuring process according to the subroutine of step 4750 (tenth) of FIG. 132 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 4752, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first main game starting mouth entrance command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4752, in step 4754, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout time non-incident object counter HHc-9 to the number of prize balls related to the first main game starting opening A10 (three balls in this example). Is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 4756. On the other hand, if No in step 4752, the process moves to step 4756. Next, in step 4756, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the second main game starting opening entrance command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4756, in step 4757, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payoff short time accessory counter HHc-10 to the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10. Addition (increment), and the process proceeds to step 4758. On the other hand, if No in step 4756, the process moves to step 4758.

  Next, in step 4758, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a general winning opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4758, in step 4760, the payout control unit 3300 adds (increments) the number of prize balls (10 balls in this example) related to the general winning opening P10 to the payout time non-income object counter HHc-9. Then, the process proceeds to step 4762. On the other hand, if No in step 4758, the process moves to step 4762. Next, in step 4762, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a first (second) special winning opening entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4762, in step 4764, the payout control unit 3300 sets the counter value of the payout continuous winning accessory counter HHc-6 to the number of prize balls (in this example, the first big winning opening C10, 13 balls are added to each of the two major winning openings C20, and the process proceeds to step 4766. On the other hand, if No in step 4762, the process moves to step 4766. Next, in step 4766, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the total ejection confirmation number command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 4766, in step 4768 the payout control means 3300 increments the counter value of the payout time total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-92 by 1 and performs the next process {step 4800 (10th). } To move. On the other hand, if No in step 4766, the process proceeds to the next process {step 4800 (tenth)}.

  Next, FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the entering state calculating process according to the subroutine of step 4800 (tenth) of FIG. 131 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 4802, the payout control means 3300 determines, as the character ratio, "(payout non-time saving part counter value + payout short time property counter value + payout continuous part effect counter value) / (payout non-time saving part counter value). + Payment-time short accessory character counter value + Payout continuous accessory character counter value + Payment non-time-short non-characteristic object counter value + Payout-time short non-incident object counter value) × 100 ”is calculated. Next, in step 4804, the payout control unit 3300 sets the continuous winning character ratio as “payout continuous winning character counter value / (payout non-short time minor object counter value + payout short time minor object counter value + payout continuous winning object counter value +). The payout non-short time non-incident object counter value + the payout short time non-incident object counter value) × 100 ”is calculated. Next, in step 4806, the payout control means 3300 refers to the command relating to the game state received from the main control board M side {command set in step 2532 (tenth)}, and the current game state is shortened in non-time. It is determined whether or not the game state. In the case of Yes in step 4806, in step 4808, the payout control means 3300 sets "(payout non-time saving auction object counter value) + payment non-time saving non-working object counter value" as a base value in the non-time shortening game state. The total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100 ”is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 4812. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4806, in step 4810, the payout control means 3300 sets “(payout-time short part counter value + payout-time short non-part counter value) / payout-time short total discharge confirmation as the base value in the time reduction game state. The number counter value × 100 ”is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 4812.

  Next, in step 4812, the payout control unit 3300 calculates the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value (the base value in the non-time-reduced game state or the base value in the time-reduced game state) calculated in steps 4802 to 4810. ) Is updated and temporarily stored (the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value which are temporarily stored in the predetermined storage area of the prize ball payout control board KH are calculated based on the calculated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio. And the base value is overwritten and temporarily stored). Next, in step 4814, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the display update timing has been reached. Here, the display update timing is the timing to start displaying the continuous accessory ratio on the entry state display device J10, as in the case described above in the ninth embodiment. In the case of Yes in step 4814, in step 4816, the payout control unit 3300 temporarily stores (a temporary storage in the processing of step 4812) character ratio, continuous character ratio, base value in the non-time shortening game state. And, the base value in the time shortening game state is displayed on the entry state display device J10 (the display mode is a display mode in which four items are displayed for two seconds each as described above. As a specific example, FIG. 125 is shown. Described in detail above), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4100). Even if No in step 4814, the process moves to the next process (process in step 4100).

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment, the entry state display device J10 is attached to the surface of the prize-ball payout control board KH on the back side of the gaming machine and the prize-ball payout control board. By configuring the KH to execute the display control of the entry state display device J10, the main control board M performs the process relating to the display control of the entry state display device J10 and the process relating to the generation / storage of information relating to the entry. It becomes unnecessary to execute the above, and the data capacity on the main control board M side can be reduced. Further, by transmitting the information regarding the total number of game balls shot from the main control board M side to the game area and the information regarding the game state to the prize ball payout control board KH side, the prize ball payout control board KH side. In addition to being able to generate information relating to a ball entering such as a base value, it is possible to generate information relating to a ball entering for each gaming state.

(Eleventh Embodiment)
In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the structure which can display the information regarding a ball entry in the ball entry state display device J10 was illustrated, the structure which can display the information relevant to a ball entry in the ball entry state display device J10 was mentioned above. The configuration is not limited to the above. Therefore, as a configuration capable of displaying the information regarding the ball entry on the entry state display device J10, a configuration different from the configuration according to the above-described embodiment is referred to as an eleventh embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described below. , Will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 136 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the eleventh embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1034 (11th) to step 1042 (11th), step 1044 (11th), step 1020, step 1022 (11th), step 1030 (11th), step 2850 (. 11th) and step 1032 (11th).

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, when the main control board M determines in step 1002 that the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated after powering on the gaming machine, in step 1034 (eleventh), the main control board M. Determines whether the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1034 (eleventh), in step 1038 (eleventh), the main control board M stores the information relating to the entry (the information to be displayed on the entry state display device J10) in the RAM. A predetermined range excluding the storage area is determined and set, and the process proceeds to step 1042 (11th). In addition, in No in step 1034 (11th), it transfers to step 1040 (11th). In step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area (for example, compares the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption with the amount of information stored in the RAM area), and then in step 1036 ( Eleventh), the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is not normal. In the case of Yes in step 1036 (11th), in step 1040 (11th), the main control board M displays the information regarding the entry of the RAM in the RAM (to display on the entry state display device J10). Information) is set and set in a specific range including a storage area, and the process proceeds to step 1042 (11th). If the answer is No in step 1036 (11th), the process moves to step 1012. Next, in step 1042 (11th), the main control board M initializes the RAM in the initialization range (predetermined range or specific range) determined in step 1038 (11th) or step 1040 (11th). (Sometimes referred to as RAM clear) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1006. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the power failure recovery data in the RAM is normal and the RAM clear is executed (when the RAM clear button is operated), it is generated by the process in the second ROM / RAM area. In addition, when the memory area that stores the information regarding the stored ball to be stored is configured not to be initialized, when the power failure recovery data in the RAM is abnormal and the RAM clear is executed (the RAM clear button is operated. RAM clearing is executed even if no operation is performed), the storage area storing the information related to the ball entry generated and stored in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is configured to be initialized. Has been done. As described above, the information regarding the entry is not the data used during the normal progress of the game. In other words, the game can be normally proceeded without using the information regarding the entry, so that the RAM is stored in the RAM. When the data is normal, it is configured not to initialize (clear the data) even if RAM clear is executed, but when the power recovery data is abnormal, the information regarding the ball entry is normal. Since it cannot be determined whether or not the RAM is cleared, the information relating to the ball entering is initialized (data is cleared). As an example of the case where the power restoration data becomes abnormal, (1) discharge occurs because the power remains off for one week or more, and (2) the main control board M and the power supply unit E are connected. If the connector (one of the connectors that electrically connects the main control board M and the power supply unit E) is disconnected or disconnected, (3) the result of checking the contents of the RAM area is abnormal, The power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal. It should be noted that turning on the power when the power recovery data is abnormal may be referred to as abnormal power startup.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 1018, the main control board M executes various random number update processing, and then in step 1044 (eleventh), the main control board M determines whether or not the power is cut off. If Yes in step 1044 (11th), the process moves to step 1018, and various random number updating processes are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if No in step 1044 (11th), in step 1020 (11th), the main control board M sets the power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area (storage area). .. Next, in step 1022 (11th), the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the main loop processing (processing that is not the interrupt processing) is configured to determine whether or not power failure has occurred. With this configuration, in the case where the power is cut off in a situation where the interruption process such as the process related to the information regarding the ball entry (ball entry state calculation process) and the process in the second ROM / RAM area are being executed Also, it is configured to determine that power failure has occurred in the main loop processing (processing in the first ROM / RAM area) after execution of interrupt processing, and execute processing when power failure occurs. Accordingly, it is possible to configure so that the processing when the power failure occurs is executed after the completion of the interrupt processing, that is, the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is executed after the processing of the second ROM / RAM area is completed. , The processing in the first ROM / RAM area (for example, the processing at the time of power interruption) is started during the execution of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area. It is possible to prevent the UNA situation. When an NMI interrupt is generated at the time of power failure and the processing at the time of power failure is executed by the processing at the time of the NMI interrupt as in the above-described embodiment, the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is executed. If the power is cut off during that time, the NMI interrupt is preferentially executed, and the processing in the first ROM / RAM area is executed during the execution of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
Further, when the timer interruption process is started, the processes in steps 2000 to 1600 are executed as the process in the first ROM / RAM area, and then, in step 1030 (the eleventh), the main control board M sets the second ROM. Executes a process call in the RAM area.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2850 (eleventh), the main control board M executes a ball entering state calculation process. Next, in step 1032 (eleventh), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Note that the ball entry state calculation process of step 2850 (11th) is the same as the ball entry state calculation process of step 2850 (9th) described above in the ninth embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. To do. In addition, in the entry state calculation process, the display of the information regarding the entry displayed on the entry state display device J10 before the display update timing (the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, the base value, etc.) It is configured to execute a clear process and a display content update process for displaying information relating to a new ball to be displayed on the ball entering state display device J10 when the display update timing is reached.

  With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to provide the first ROM area and the second ROM area, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area, and to set the base value. By reducing the data capacity used in the first ROM / RAM area of the main control board M by configuring the processing of calculating the base value and the processing of displaying the base value in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area. Will be possible. Further, when the power is cut off, it is determined that the power cut has occurred in the main loop process which is a process different from the interrupt process without generating the NMI interrupt as in the above-described embodiment ( By executing a process for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred), and then executing a process at the time of power failure in the main loop process, a ball entry state calculation that is a process in the second ROM / RAM area and an interrupt process Even if the power is cut off during the execution of the processing (processing for generating / displaying information related to ball entry), the processing in the second ROM / RAM area in which the interrupt processing is being executed is finished, and the first ROM in which the interrupt processing is being executed -A configuration for executing the process related to power-off in the process main loop process in the first ROM / RAM region after the process in the RAM region is completed Therefore, the power is turned off during the execution of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, and after the power is turned on, the power is turned off even though the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is executed when the power is turned off. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the processing in the first ROM / RAM area is executed, and when the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is executed, the execution of the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is completed. It is possible to provide a fair game machine that executes the processing in the first ROM / RAM area.

  In the eleventh embodiment, since it is impossible to determine whether or not the information regarding the ball entry is normal data when the abnormal power source is turned on, the processing in the second ROM / RAM area for the information regarding the ball entry is performed. Although the relevant storage area is also configured to be initialized, the information relating to the ball entry is not initialized but is normally accumulated in order to confirm whether or not it is operating as a fair game machine. Is preferred. Therefore, as a measure for preventing abnormal power supply startup, a connector connecting the main control board M and the power supply unit E (all connectors electrically connecting the main control board M and the power supply unit E) ), A caulking portion may be provided so as not to be removed, or a button battery may be provided inside the caulking of the main control board M so that a ball is inserted even when an unintended power interruption occurs. The backup of the information related to the above may be configured to be executable.

  In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the power is cut off is executed at the start of the interrupt process, and when it is determined that the power is cut off, the power cut flag is turned on to turn off the power. If it is determined that the power failure has not occurred, the power-off flag is turned off. After that, the power-off flag is checked at the start of the main-loop processing after the execution of interrupt processing is completed, and if it is determined that the power-off flag is on = power-off, the power is cut off in the main-loop processing. You may comprise so that the process of time may be performed. Here, in a process that is executed as in “main loop process → interrupt process → main loop process → interrupt process → ...”, the execution period of one main loop process (after the interrupt process ends, the next The period during which one interrupt process is executed is longer than the period (until the interrupt process starts), and the process at power-off is relatively short. By executing the processing in the main loop processing, it becomes difficult for the power to be cut off when noise occurs. In addition, when the main loop process executes a process for determining whether or not the power is cut off, and when the determination process determines that the power is cut off a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in succession, the main loop The processing may be configured to execute the processing when the power is cut off, and by such a configuration, when it is determined that the noise is accidentally generated and the power is cut off, the power is turned off. It is possible to prevent the processing at the time of disconnection from being executed. In addition, when the main loop processing executes the processing for determining whether or not the power is cut off, and when it is determined once that the power cut has occurred in the judgment processing, the processing when the power is cut off is executed in the main loop processing. It may be configured to execute, and by doing so, the execution period of one main loop process is short with respect to the period of executing one "main loop process → interrupt process". The occurrence of power failure determined in the execution period of the main loop process can be treated as an effective determination. In such a configuration, it is preferable to use a noise filter to reduce the influence of noise on the gaming machine.

(Twelfth Embodiment)
In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the like can be generated as the information regarding the ball entering, but the information regarding the ball that can be generated is not limited to that described above. Therefore, as the information regarding the enterable ball that can be generated, a configuration capable of generating the information regarding the entering ball in a mode different from that generated in the above-described embodiment is referred to as a twelfth embodiment. Only the differences will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 137 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the twelfth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1037 (twelfth), step 2850 (twelfth) and step 2900 (twelfth). That is, when the timer interrupt processing is started, first, step 1037 (twelfth). ), The main control board M turns on when a short-term payout excess A flag {excessive payout A (details described later) detected when the number of prize balls paid out is large in a predetermined period is detected. Flag is off. If Yes in step 1037 (twelfth), the process proceeds to step 2000, and the subsequent timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, if No in step 1037 (twelfth), the process proceeds to step 2850 (twelfth) without executing the timer interrupt processing of steps 2000 to 3000. Thus, when the short-term payout excess A flag is on (when the payout excess A is detected), the processing of steps 2000 to 3000 related to normal game progression is not executed, In other words, it is configured to stop the progress of the game (details will be described later).

  In addition, after executing the prize ball payout command transmission control processing in step 3000, or when it is determined in step 1037 (twelfth) that the short-term payout excess A flag is ON, in step 2850 (twelfth), The control board M executes a ball entering state calculation process described later. Next, in step 2900 (twelfth), the main control board M executes a ball entering state determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3500.

  Next, FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2530 (twelfth), that is, 1 is added (incremented) to the total discharge confirmation number counter value in step 2508, and then in step 2530 (twelfth), the total discharge balls are counted. The confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-T90 (a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s in a predetermined period), The process shifts to the next process (process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2740-1 (twelfth), step 2740-2 (twelfth), step 2740-3 (twelfth) and step 2740-4 (twelfth), that is, step In 2704, after adding the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the first main game starting opening A10 to the prize ball number counter value, in step 2740-1 (twelfth), the prize ball payout determination means MH , The short-term prize ball number counter TMHc (a counter that measures the total number of prize balls related to all winning openings paid out in a predetermined period) is added to the count value of the first main game starting opening A10 (this example). Then, 3 balls) are added, and the process proceeds to step 2708. In addition, after adding the number of prize balls related to the second main game starting opening B10 (three balls in this example) to the prize ball number counter value in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination is made in step 2740-2 (12th). The means MH adds the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the second main game starting opening B10 to the counter value of the short-term prize ball counter TMHc, and proceeds to step 2718. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of prize balls associated with the first main game starting opening A10 is three, and the number of prize balls associated with the second main game starting opening B10 is three. The number of prize balls is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls related to the first main game starting port A10 may be four or more (four or five, etc.), or the prize related to the second main game starting port B10. The number of balls may be less than 3 (1 or 2), and candidates for these award balls (the number of award balls related to the first main game starting port A10 is 3 or more, and related to the second main game starting port B10) From 1 to 3 prize balls, the number of prize balls related to the first main game starting opening A10 and the number of prize balls related to the second main game starting opening B10 may be combined as appropriate (all implementations). Applicable to the form).

  In addition, after the number of prize balls related to the first (second) special winning opening C10 (C20) (13 balls in this example) is added to the prize ball number counter value in step 2724, step 2740-3 (twelfth) Then, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) related to the first (second) special winning opening C10 (C20) to the counter value of the short-term prize ball number counter TMHc, Go to step 2728. In addition, after adding the number of prize balls (10 balls in this example) related to the general winning opening P10 to the prize ball number counter value in step 2734, in step 2740-4 (the twelfth), the prize ball payout determination means MH Then, the number of prize balls (10 balls in this example) related to the general winning opening P10 is added to the counter value of the short-term prize ball counter TMHc, and the process proceeds to step 2738. In the twelfth embodiment, the number of prize balls associated with the first (second) special winning opening C10 (C20) is 13, but the number of prize balls of each special winning opening is not limited to this. The number of prize balls for the first special winning opening C10 may be set to any of 10 to 15, or the number of prize balls for the second special winning opening C20 may be set to any of 10 to 15. Of course, the first big prize is selected from the candidates for the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls for the first big prize hole C10 is 10 to 15 and the number of prize balls for the second big prize hole C20 is 10 to 15). The number of prize balls related to the winning hole C10 and the number of prize balls related to the second big winning hole C20 may be appropriately combined (applicable to all the embodiments). Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of award balls related to the general winning opening P10 is set to 10, but the number of award balls related to the general winning opening P10 is not limited to this, and the number of award balls related to the general winning opening P10 is not limited to this. The number may be set to any of 3 to 10. In addition, the second general winning opening P20 which doubles as an auxiliary game starting opening and a general winning opening (when a game ball enters the second general winning opening P20, an auxiliary game content determination random number is obtained and the prize ball is paid out. The number of prize balls related to the second general winning opening P20 may be set to one or two. Moreover, you may comprise so that one or more general winning openings P10 may be provided and one or more second general winning openings P20 may be provided. In such a configuration, the general winning openings P10 flow down on the left side of the game area. A position where the game ball easily enters (a position where the game ball easily enters when left-handed, for example, a direction in which the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area deviates from the flow path toward the first main game starting opening A10) It is provided at a position where the ball can enter when it flows down), and on the other hand, the second general winning opening P20 is a position where the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area can easily enter (the game ball can easily enter by hitting the right side). The position may be provided, for example, near the special winning opening, upstream of the special winning opening, or downstream of the special winning opening).

  Next, FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 20 in the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1426 (twelfth), step 1350 (tenth), step 1442 (twelfth) and step 1444 (twelfth), that is, the changing flag is off in step 1419. If it is determined that there is, in step 1426 (the twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the fluctuation fixing flag (the flag that is turned on when the fluctuation fixing time is ON) is ON. Or not. If Yes in step 1426 (twelfth), the process proceeds to step 1444 (twelfth), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

  Further, after turning off the changing flag in step 1424, in step 1350 (the twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a variable fixed time determination process described later. Next, in step 1442 (twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuation fixing flag, and then proceed to step 1444 (twelfth). Next, in step 1444 (twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, the timer value of the variable fixed time timer MN30t (decrement timer, a timer for measuring the variable fixed time) Is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1444 (twelfth), the process proceeds to step 1430, and if No in step 1444 (twelfth), the next process (the process of step 1500) proceeds. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the fact that the fluctuation is not fixed is added to the fluctuation start condition determined in step 1403.

  Next, FIG. 141 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1350 (12th) of FIG. 140 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 1352, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, short-term payout excess B flag {excessive payout B detected when the number of prize balls paid out in a predetermined period is large (for details, (Described later) is detected, it is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on when the following is detected. In the case of Yes in step 1352, in step 1354, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set a long fixed time in the variable fixed time timer MN30t (relatively long variable fixed time. Then, 5 seconds) is set, the variable fixed time timer MN30t is started, and the process proceeds to the next process {process 1442 (process 12)}. On the other hand, if No in step 1352, in step 1356, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are detected when the short-term payout excess C flag {the number of prize balls paid out in a predetermined period is large. It is determined whether or not the flag C which is turned on when an excessive number of balls C (details described later) are detected}. If Yes in step 1356, in step 1358, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the variable fixed time timer MN30t to a medium fixed time (shorter than long fixed time and shorter than short fixed time). This is a fixed time of fluctuation of the time value which is a long time, and in this example, 1 second) is set, the fixed time fixed timer MN30t is started, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1442 (twelfth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1356, in step 1360, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have a short fixed time in the variable fixed time timer MN30t (the variable fixed time is a relatively short time. , (In this example, 0.3 seconds) is set, the variable fixed time timer MN30t is started, and the process proceeds to the next process {process 1442 (the twelfth) process}. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, it is configured to be able to detect the excessive payout amount when the number of prize balls paid out is large during a predetermined period. There are three ball overruns, C overball. The details will be described later, but in the order of the total number of payouts in a predetermined period, in other words, the total number of prize balls related to all winning holes in the predetermined period, "excessive payout A> excess payout B> payout" It is "Excessive C", and the game progress is stopped when the excessive payout A is detected, so it is necessary to determine the variable fixed time used only when the excessive payout A is detected. Configured to not. In addition, when the excess balls are detected, it can be determined that the game balls have been excessively paid out in the short term. Therefore, the excess balls are detected as compared with the case where the excess balls are not detected. In this case, the variable fixed time is longer. In addition, in a situation where there is an excess of payouts, a case where there is an excess of payouts C is more than a case where there is an excess of payouts C, that is, all winning holes in the predetermined period are concerned. When the total number of prize balls is large (the pace at which game balls are paid out is fast), the variable fixed time is set to be long.

  Next, FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the entering state calculating process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (12th) of FIG. 137 in the twelfth embodiment. First, at step 2870, the ball entry information control means NS determines whether or not the payout rate timer counting flag (a flag which is turned on when the payout rate timer DRt is counting) is off. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, the ratio of the total number of prize balls for all winning openings to the total number of balls fired for each predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, which may also be referred to as a confirmation value). The short-term payout rate is calculated, and the predetermined period is measured using the payout rate timer DRt. If Yes in step 2870, in step 2871, the entry information control means NS clears the timer value of the payout rate timer DRt to zero and starts the payout rate timer DRt. Next, at step 2872, the ball entry information control means NS turns on the ball output rate timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 2873. Even if No in step 2870, the process moves to step 2873.

  Next, in step 2873, the entry information control means NS temporarily stores the confirmation value (the short-term prize ball count counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation count counter value as the timer value of the pay-out rate timer DRt, and the short-term payout rate. Is a timer value serving as a cycle for calculating, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 60 seconds) has been reached. If Yes in step 2873, the entry information control unit NS overwrites the counter value of the short-term prize ball number counter TMHc on the oldest area of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball number counter value and temporarily stores it (FIG. 143). reference). Next, at step 2875, the entry information control means NS overwrites the counter value of the short-term total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-T90 on the oldest area of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total emission confirmation number counter value and temporarily stores it. (See FIG. 143). Next, in step 2876, the ball entry information control means NS sets the sum of the short-term prize ball number counter values stored in the ring buffer as the short-term payout rate ÷ the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter stored in the ring buffer. “Value × 100” is calculated, and the calculated short-term payout rate is overwritten and temporarily stored. The short-term payout rate is the total number of prize balls for all winning openings with respect to the total number of shot balls in a predetermined period. In the twelfth embodiment, the short-term payout rate for the last 600 seconds is 60 seconds. It is configured to calculate the ball rate. Next, at step 2877, the ball entry information control means NS clears the counter value of the short-term prize ball number counter TMHc and the counter value of the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-T90 to zero. Next, in step 2878, the incoming ball information control means NS turns off the payout rate timer counting flag, and proceeds to the next process {process 2900 (twelfth) process}. Even if No in step 2873, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2900 (twelfth)}.

  Next, FIG. 143 is a short-term payout rate calculation image diagram in the twelfth embodiment. In the figure, a mode in which the short-term prize ball count counter value is stored in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball count counter value, which is a ring buffer used for calculating the short-term payout rate, and the short-term total discharge confirmation count counter value. The mode of storing the short-term total emission confirmation number counter value in the ring buffer corresponding to will be described in detail. A1 to A13 represent short-term prize ball number counter value data, and B1 to B13 represent short-term total emission confirmation number counter value data. First, as shown in the first row, "1 = A1", "2 = A2", "3 = A3" ... "8 =" in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball count value. It is stored as "A8", "9 = A9", "10 = A10", A1 is the oldest data, and A10 is the latest data. In addition, "1 = B1", "2 = B2", "3 = B3" ... "8 = B8", "9 =" are stored in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total emission confirmation number counter value. B9 ”and“ No. 10 = B10 ”are stored, B1 is the oldest data, and B10 is the latest data (the latest data is stored in the No. 10 area). The address indicating the area storing the latest data is stored and managed in a predetermined variable such as a pointer, and the area for storing the latest data can be specified by sequentially changing the address. it can. In addition, the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value for 60 seconds is stored in the area corresponding to one number of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball number counter value. In the area corresponding to one number of the ring buffer corresponding to the value, the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value for 60 seconds is stored.

  60 seconds after the data relating to the short-term prize ball number counter value and the short-term total emission confirmation number counter value are stored as shown in the first row of the same figure, as shown in the second row of the same figure, the short-term prize ball is shown. In the first area where "A1", which is the oldest data of the ring buffer corresponding to the number counter value, is stored, it is the short-term prize ball number counter value for the newly measured 60 seconds. Since "A11" is overwritten and stored, the data stored first is "A1" to "A11". Similarly, in the first area where "B1", which is the oldest data in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total emission confirmation number counter value, is stored, the short-term total measured for the newly elapsed 60 seconds is calculated. Since the discharge confirmation number counter value “B11” is overwritten and stored, the data stored first is “B1” to “B11”. The area in which the latest data is stored is changed from the area No. 10 to the area No. 1 (see the second row in the figure).

  After a further 60 seconds have passed, as shown in the third row of the same figure, the oldest data "A2" of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball number counter value is stored in the second area. Since the short-term prize ball number counter value "A12" that has been newly measured for 60 seconds is overwritten and stored, the data stored in No. 2 changes from "A2" to "A12". Similarly, in the area No. 2 in which the oldest data “B2” of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total emission confirmation number counter value is stored, the short-term total measured for the newly elapsed 60 seconds. Since the discharge confirmation number counter value "B12" is overwritten and stored, the data stored in the second number is "B2" to "B12". The area in which the latest data is stored is changed from the area No. 1 to the area No. 2 (see the third row in the same figure).

  After a further 60 seconds have passed, as shown in the fourth row of the same figure, the oldest data "A3" in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball number counter value is stored in the third area. Since the short-term award ball count counter value "A13" for the newly elapsed 60 seconds is overwritten and stored, the data stored in No. 3 changes from "A3" to "A13". Similarly, the short-term total measured in the newly elapsed 60 seconds is stored in the third area where "B3", which is the oldest data in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value, is stored. Since the discharge confirmation number counter value "B13" is overwritten and stored, the data stored in the third number is "B3" to "B13". The area in which the latest data is stored is changed from the area No. 2 to the area No. 3 (see the fourth row in the figure).

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the short-term prize ball number counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value, which are measured every 60 seconds in the 60 seconds, are stored by overwriting the oldest data. Since the ring buffer is configured, the short-term prize ball number counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value for the last 600 seconds (60 seconds × 10 pieces) are stored. The short-term payout rate for 600 seconds is updated every 60 seconds by calculating the short-term payout rate using the short-term prize ball count value and the short-term total discharge confirmation count counter value for the last 600 seconds. It is configured so that it can be calculated.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the ring buffer is used to store the short-term prize ball count counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation count counter value to calculate the short-term payout rate. If the short-term payout rate can be calculated each time, the method of storing the short-term prize ball count counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation count counter value can be changed in any way.

  Next, FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the ball entry state determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 (12th) of FIG. 137 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 2902, the entry information control means NS determines whether or not data is stored in all the areas of the ring buffer relating to the payout rate. Here, the ring buffer relating to the payout rate is the ring buffer relating to the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value and the ring buffer relating to the short-term prize ball number counter value described above. For example, immediately after the power is turned on (when 300 seconds have passed since the power was turned on), data is not stored in all areas of the ring buffer relating to the throwing rate (data is stored in one area every 60 seconds, Since it has individual areas, it takes 600 seconds until data is stored in all areas), and too many balls (too many balls A, too many balls B, and too many balls C) have occurred. It is configured so as not to determine whether or not it is.

  In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the entry information control means NS has a short-term payout rate that is temporarily stored as a predetermined value A (a short-term payout rate at which the excess payout A is detected). , In this example, 400%) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the entry information control means NS turns on the short-term excess ball A flag. Next, in step 2908, the incoming-ball information control means NS sets a short-term payout excess A command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a command regarding that the excess payout A is detected), The process shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

  Further, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2910, since the short-term payout rate is less than 400%, the short-distance payout excess A flag is turned off (the short-term payout excess A flag). Is already off, the process of step 2910 is not executed). Next, in step 2912, the entering information control means NS determines that the temporarily stored short-term payout rate is a predetermined value B (the short-term payout rate at which the excess payout B is detected. , 350%) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2912, in step 2914, the entry information control means NS turns on the short-term excess ball B flag. Next, at step 2916, the entry information control means NS sets a short-term payout excess B command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a command regarding the fact that the excess payout B is detected), The process shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

  In addition, in the case of No in step 2912, in step 2918, since the short-term payout rate NS is less than 350%, the short-term payout excess B flag is turned off (short-term payout excess B flag). Is already off, the process of step 2918 is not executed). Next, in step 2920, the entry information control means NS has a temporarily stored short-term payout rate which is a predetermined value C (a short-term payout rate at which the excess payout C is detected. , 300%) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2920, in step 2922, the ball entry information control means NS turns on the short-term excess ball C flag. Next, in step 2924, the incoming-ball information control means NS sets a short-term payout excess C command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is a command regarding that the excess payout C is detected), The process shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

  Further, in the case of No in step 2920, in step 2926, since the short-term payout rate NS is less than 300%, the short-term payout excess C flag is turned off (the short-term payout excess C flag is If it is already off, the process of step 2922 is not executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). Even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500). In the twelfth embodiment, since the short-term payout rate is overwritten and temporarily stored each time the short-term payout rate is calculated, the temporarily-stored short-term payout rate determined in step 2904, step 2912, or step 2920 is It is the latest calculated short-term payout rate. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the short-term payout rate is excessively high, it is configured to detect excessive payout. In addition, there are three payout excesses, namely, a payout excess A, a payout excess B, and a payout excess C, which are configured to distribute the payout excess according to the high short-term payout rate. ing. In addition, in order from the one with the highest short-term payout rate, the three withdrawal excesses are in order from the highest payout A (short-term payout rate 400% or more)> excess payout B (short-term payout rate 350% or more and less than 400%)> Excessive payout C (short-term payout rate of 300% or more and less than 350%) ". In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the excessive number of coins is detected, it is configured so as to delay (or stop) the progress of the game, thereby eliminating the excessive coins. The process of delaying (or stopping) the progress of the game is configured to be different depending on the type of excess balls (which is being detected).

  Next, FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 137 in the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1643-1 (twelfth), step 1643.2 (twelfth) and step 1850 (twelfth), that is, after turning off the conditional device operation flag in step 1642. In step 1643-1 (twelfth), the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game end demo execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 1643.2 (twelfth). Note that, when it is determined in step 1602 that the condition device operation flag is off, or when it is determined in step 1627 that the timer value of the release timer has not reached the predetermined time at which the round ends, Then, the process proceeds to step 1643-2 (twelfth). Next, in step 1643-2 (twelfth), the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the final round of the special game being executed has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1643-2 (twelfth), in step 1850 (twelfth), the special game control means MP30 executes the special game end demo time control process described later, and the next process (process of step 1900) Move to. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 1643-2 (twelfth), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the special game end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (12th) of FIG. 145 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 1852, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the special game end demonstration running flag (a flag that is turned on during execution of the special game end demo time) is off. If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the short-term payout excess B flag is on. If Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the special game control means MP30 sets the end demo time timer SDt (a timer for measuring the special game end demo time and a decrement timer) to a long demo time (relatively long time). It is the special game end demo time, in this example, 120 seconds) is set, the end demo time timer SDt is started, and the process proceeds to step 1864.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1854, in step 1858, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the short-term payout excess C flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1858, in step 1860, the special game control means MP30 sets the end demo time timer SDt to a special demo time value of medium demo time (shorter than long demo time and longer than short demo time). It is a game end demo time, in this example, 10 seconds) is set, the end demo time timer SDt is started, and the process proceeds to step 1864. On the other hand, if No in step 1858, in step 1862 the special game control means MP30 sets the end demo time timer SDt to a short demo time (a special game end demo time which is a relatively short time, and in this example, 3). Second) is set, the end demo time timer SDt is started, and the process proceeds to step 1864.

  Next, in step 1864, the special game control means MP30 sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the sub-control board S side). In the twelfth embodiment, the special game end display instruction command includes information on the special game end demo time determined in step 1856, step 1860 or step 1862 (set in the end demo time timer SDt). By receiving the special game end display instruction command, the sub control board S side knows whether the special game end demo time is a long demo time, a middle demo time, or a short demo time. It is configured so that Next, in a step 1866, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game end demonstration executing flag, and shifts to the step 1868. Even if No in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1868.

  Next, in step 1868, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the timer value of the end demo time timer SDt is 0. If Yes in step 1868, in step 1870, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game end demonstration in progress flag. Next, at step 1872, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game end demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 1700, the special game control means MP30 executes the above-mentioned game state determination process after the end of the special game, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the special game end demo time is relatively long when the excessive payout B occurs (when the short-term payout excess B flag is on). In the example, it is set to 120 seconds, and when the excessive payout number C occurs (when the short-term payout amount C flag is on), the special game end demo time is longer than the short demo time. Then, it was set to 10 seconds). That is, when the excessive payout B or the excessive payout C occurs, the short-term payout ratio is suppressed by setting the special game end demonstration time to be longer than when the excessive payout occurs. Is configured to be possible. In addition, when the excessive payout A occurs, the progress of the game is stopped {see the processing of step 1037 (twelfth) of FIG. 137}, and only when the excessive payout A is detected. It is configured so that it is not necessary to determine the special game end demo time used. In this way, when the excessive payout B or the excessive payout C occurs, the variable fixed time in the symbol variation becomes relatively longer than when the excessive payout does not occur, and the special game end demonstration time appears. It is configured to take a relatively longer time than when there is no excess ball, and it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the short-term payout rate. In addition, in the case where the excessive payout B or the excessive payout C occurs in the situation where the special game is not being executed, the short-term payout rate is suppressed by setting the fluctuation fixed time in the symbol variation to a long time, and the special game In the case where the excessive payout B or the excessive payout C occurs while the game is being executed, the special game end demo time is set to be a long time so that the short-term payout rate is suppressed. Regardless of whether or not the game is being executed, it is possible to suppress the short-term payout rate when a large number of payouts occur. In addition, it is configured to have a special game start demonstration time (time provided before the start of the first round in the special game), and the number of balls output is too large (ball output B or The short-term payout rate may be suppressed by configuring the special game start demonstration time to be relatively long when the excess ball C) has occurred. In addition, the configuration is shown in which the short-term payout rate can be suppressed by adjusting the time values of the special game end demo time and / or the special game start demo time, but by adjusting the inter-round time, the short-term payout ratio can be adjusted. The rate may be suppressed (the short-term payout rate is suppressed by increasing the time between rounds).

In the gaming machine according to the present example, the configuration regarding the special game end demo time may be configured as follows.
(1) As a special game, a high-profit special game with a relatively high expected value for winning a prize ball (for example, a jackpot in which the number of execution rounds is 16R and a probability variation game state is entered after the jackpot is over), and an expected value for winning a prize ball is relatively high. Has a relatively low low-profit special game (for example, the number of execution rounds is 4R and a big hit that shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state after the big hit ends).
(2) The special game end demo time in the high profit special game won in the non-time shortened game state (non-electric power saving state) is relatively long (for example, 10 seconds), and the non-time shortened game state (non-electrical state) The special game end demo time in the low profit special game won in the support state is relatively short (for example, 5 seconds).
(3) Special game end demo in the high profit special game won in the time shortened game state (electric support state) is the special game end demo in the high profit special game won in the non-time shortened game state (non-electric support state) It is shorter than the time (for example, 6 seconds).
(4) Special game end demo in low profit special game won in time saving game state (electric support state), special game end demo in low profit special game won in non-time shortening game state (non-electric support state) It is the same value as time (for example, 5 seconds), or the special game end demo time in the low profit special game won in the time shortened game state (electric support state) is the non-time shortened game state (non-electric support state) It is shorter than the special game end demo time in the low profit special game that was won (for example, 4 seconds), but it is not the special game end demo time in the low profit special game that was won in the time shortening game state (electric support state). The difference in time value between the special game end demo time in the low profit special game won in the time shortening game state (non-electric support state) is the high profit special game won in the time shortening game state (electric support state). Less than the difference of the time value of the special game end demo time in the high-profit special game that was elected in abbreviated special game end demo time and non-time-gaming state (non-conductive support state) in.
The configurations of (1) to (4) above may be applied to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. It should be noted that the above-mentioned numerical values (numerical values in parentheses) are merely examples, and if the magnitude relationship of the exemplified values (including the magnitude relationship of each difference) has the above configuration, change the respective values. No problem. Further, although the above-mentioned configuration is the configuration related to the special game end demo time, the same configuration may be applied to the special game start demo time.

  Next, FIG. 147 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control section SM side according to the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 6500 (twelfth) and step 5600 (twelfth), that is, the loop processing of repeatedly executing (e) which is the iterative processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM is executed. In this case, first, in step 6500 (twelfth), the sub-control board S executes a payout excess display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5100. In addition, after executing the decorative symbol display control process in step 5500, in step 5600 (the twelfth), the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later, and proceeds to step 5700.

  Next, FIG. 148 is a flowchart of a payout excess display control process according to the subroutine of step 6500 (12th) of FIG. 147 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 6502, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not a short-term excess ball A command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 6502, in step 6504, the error notification control means SM30 issues a command to display the excessive payout display A (display for notifying that the excessive payout A has been detected) on the effect display device SG. set. Next, in step 6505, the error notification control means SM30 is an ending effect on the effect display device SG (an effect that is executed during a period in which the progress of the game is stopped because the excessive number of balls A is being detected). , A production mode in which the end of the production executed during the special game is displayed, the details of which will be described later) is set. In addition, the ending effect will be ended when the excessive number of payouts A is resolved and the progress of the game is resumed. Next, in step 6506, the error notification control means SM30 causes the frame decoration lamp D18-L to be in a lighting mode A (a lighting mode corresponding to a situation in which the excessive number of balls A is detected, which is red in this example). The command to turn on is set and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 5100). In addition, in the case of No in step 6502, in step 6508, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the short-term payout excess B command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 6508, in step 6510, a command for displaying the excessive payout amount display B (display for notifying that the excessive payout amount B has been detected) is set in the effect display device SG. Next, in step 6512, the error notification control means SM30 is a lighting mode B of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (a lighting mode corresponding to a situation in which the excessive number of balls B is detected, in this example, red). A command to light is set at (flashing), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Even if No in step 6508, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). In this way, when the excessive payout A or the excessive payout B is occurring, the effect display device SG is displayed on the effect display device, and the frame decoration lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the excessive payout. D18-L is configured to light up. Further, when the excessive payout C occurs, the short-term payout rate is lower than when the excessive payout A or the excessive payout B occurs, and the urgency of suppressing the short-term payout rate is relatively low. The display of SG and the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L are configured not to notify that there is an excessive number of balls C. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the excessive payout C is generated, the fact that the excessive payout C is generated is displayed by the display on the effect display device SG or the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L. Good. Further, as a configuration for notifying that there is an excessive number of balls due to the lighting mode, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is configured to be lit, but the invention is not limited to this, and games other than the frame decoration lamp D18-L are played. The effect lamp (only) may be configured to be turned on, or the frame decoration lamp D18-L and the game effect lamp other than the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be configured to be turned on. In addition, since the progress of the game is stopped when the excessive ball output A occurs, the excessive ball output A is generated by the voice output from the speaker D24 as a notification mode other than the display on the effect display device SG and the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured to notify that the speaker D24 is performing (only the voice output from the speaker D24 may be performed, or the display on the effect display device SG, the lighting on the frame decoration lamp D18-L, and the voice output from the speaker D24 may be appropriately combined. May be). Also, an LED (error lamp SS3 or the like described above) dedicated to detecting excessive ball output is provided near the effect display device SG, and when the excessive ball output A or the excessive ball output B is detected, the LED is turned on. The above configuration may be adopted (the LED lighting mode may be different between when the excessive ball output A is detected and when the excessive ball output B is detected). In addition, the notification mode (the notification mode in the effect display device SG and various LEDs) on the side of the sub-control board S when the excessive number of balls A is generated is a notification mode in which it is easy to recognize that the importance is high (a notification mode noticeable to the player). The notification mode (the notification mode in the effect display device SG and various LEDs) on the side of the sub-control board S when the excess B is generated is a notification mode in which it is easy to recognize that the importance is low (a notification mode that is not noticeable to the player. Alternatively, it may be a notification mode that can be recognized only by those involved in the game hall.

  Next, FIG. 149 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 (12th) of FIG. 147 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 5631, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 5631, in step 5632 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5632, in step 5633 the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag. Next, in step 5634, the background effect display control means SM23 performs big hit start display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit), and proceeds to step 5635. Even if No in step 5631, the process moves to step 5635.

  Next, in step 5635, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the winning number on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (game). It may be executed as needed based on the nature and type of jackpot). Next, in step 5636, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game end display instruction command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5636, in step 5637, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the received special game end display instruction command, and the special game end demo time in the special game being executed is long demo time (this example). Then, it is determined whether it is 120 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 5637, in step 5638, the background effect display control means SM23 has a blessing effect (obtaining a large number of game balls) as the end demo time effect (effect executed at the special game end demo time). Is a production mode for informing the player of the above, details of which will be described later) are set, and the process proceeds to step 5642.

  Further, in the case of No in step 5637, in other words, in the case where the special game end demo time in the special game being executed is the middle demo time (10 seconds in this example) or the short demo time (3 seconds in this example) In step 5640, the background effect display control means SM23 is executed as the end demonstration time effect (the effect executed at the special game end demo time) when the normal effect (the above-mentioned blessing effect as the end demonstration time effect is not executed). Is a production, which is a production mode for informing that the special game is over, and the details will be described later) are set, and the process proceeds to step 5642. Next, in step 5642, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700). Even if No in step 5632 or step 5636, the process moves to the next process (process in step 5700). As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the presentation mode of the end demo time effect may be different depending on the length of the special game end demo time (whether it is a long demo time or not). The variable fixed time may also be configured such that the effect mode during the fixed fixed time may differ depending on the time value of the fixed fixed time.

  Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram at the time of detecting an excessive number of balls in the twelfth embodiment. In the same figure, when the excessive ball output A is detected during the execution of the special game, when the excessive ball output B is detected during the execution of the special game, and the excessive ball output C is executed during the execution of the special game. And the case where it is detected.

<When too many balls are detected A>
First, "777", which is a big hit symbol, is stopped as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (it may be already detected that the number C of payouts is too large). After that, the big hit is started, and the excessive ball output B is detected (the short-term ball output rate is 350% or more). Therefore, the excessive ball output display B is displayed on the effect display device SG. The frame decoration lamp D18-L is lit in the lighting mode B (blinking red). After that, since the short-term payout rate has further increased during the execution of the big hit, the excess payout A is detected, and the progress of the game is stopped. Further, on the effect display device SG, the character image and "Congratulations !!" are displayed as the ending effect, and at the same time, the excess payout display A is displayed. Here, when the progress of the game is stopped, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are closed and the winning is invalidated, and other winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, etc.) The prize winning is also invalidated, the main game symbol is not changed, and the game ball cannot be shot. After that, the short-term payout rate declines and the excess payout A is resolved, the game resumes (the stopped jackpot is also resumed), and the special game ends with the excess payout B detected. Since the demo time has started, the special game end demo time is 120 seconds, which is a long demo time, and the end demo time effect is displayed as a blessing effect with a character image and "great explosion!". The game is not restarted until the excessive payout A is resolved (the excessive payout B is detected). After that, the special game end demo time ends, and the special game ends. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, even when an excessive number of balls A is detected and the progress of the game is stopped, an error is detected when an illegal magnetism or an illegal electric wave is detected (for example, a speaker). The warning sound is output from the player, and the effect display device SG notifies that the injustice is detected), and the effect of displaying the character appearing during the pattern change is configured to be executed. It can be configured so as not to cause excessive anxiety to the player that an abnormality is occurring in the gaming machine. still. The game is stopped because the excess ball A is detected, and then the shortage ball excess A is resolved and the excess ball B is detected because the short-term ball-out rate has decreased. When the excessive number of balls A is detected, the progress of the game is stopped again.

<When detecting too many balls B>
First, "777", which is a jackpot pattern, is stopped as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. After that, the big hit is started, and the excess ball C is detected. However, when the excess ball C is detected, the notification is not executed on the sub-control board S side, so the display mode on the effect display device SG does not change. After that, since the short-term payout rate further increased during the execution of the jackpot, the excess payout B was detected, and on the effect display device SG, the display "Congratulations !!" was executed and the excess payout display B was displayed. Is displayed. After that, the special game end demo time was started with the excess ball A being detected, so the special game end demo time was 120 seconds, which is a long demo time, and the end demo time production was a blessing production with the character image and "large explosion". Is displayed. After that, the special game end demo time ends, and the special game ends.

<When excessive C is detected>
First, "777", which is a jackpot pattern, is stopped as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. After that, the big hit is started, and the excess ball C is detected. However, when the excess ball C is detected, the notification is not executed on the sub-control board S side, so the display mode on the effect display device SG does not change. After that, the special game end demo time was started while the excess C was detected, so the special game end demo time is 10 seconds, which is the middle demo time, and the end demo time effect is a normal effect display at the end of the special game. {Display the number of consecutive games (the number of consecutive big hits won in the time-saving game state including the first win) and the total number of game balls won at the continuous games} are executed, and the special game ends. Become.

  In the twelfth embodiment, when the special game end demo time is started in a situation where the excessive number of balls B is detected, the special game end demo time of 120 seconds, which is a long demo time, is configured. However, even when the excess ball B is eliminated during the special game end demo time, the special game end demo time is configured not to end until the long demo time of 120 seconds elapses, but is not limited to this. If, in the middle of the special game end demonstration time, the excessive payout ball is resolved (for example, if the excessive payout ball B is eliminated and the excessive payout ball C is detected), the special game end demo time is forced to end. Alternatively, the special game end demo time may be shortened (for example, the special game may be finished 10 seconds after the excessive payout B is eliminated and the excessive payout C is detected). When configured in this way, it is preferable to configure so that no discrepancies in the production occur in the end demo time effect, and it is possible to smoothly switch even when the special game end demo time is forcibly ended or shortened. It may be configured so as to be in the form of the end demo time effect.

  With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment, the total number of prize balls related to all the winning openings occupies the total number of shot balls in a predetermined period (600 seconds in this example). The short-term payout rate, which is a ratio, can be calculated each time a specific period (60 seconds in this example) elapses, and if the short-term payout rate is excessively high, a numerical value of the short-term payout rate. In accordance with the above, it is possible to detect three levels of excessive payout (excessive payout A, excessive payout B, and excessive payout C). In addition, depending on the type of excess balls detected, the presence or absence of the notification on the side of the sub control board S, the notification mode, the performance mode during the special game, the performance mode of the end demo time performance, the progress of the game on the main control circuit board M side. By configuring so that the presence / absence of stoppage, the length of the special game end demo time, the length of fluctuation fixed time, etc. can be different, the game is stopped if the short-term payout rate is too high, and the short-term payout When the rate is a little high, you can execute the control suitable for the numerical value of the short-term payout rate, such as delaying the game progress without executing the notification, and the excessively raised short-term payout rate becomes an appropriate value. It is possible to put it back. In addition, by configuring in this way, in the case of conducting a type test, even if a condominium that rarely occurs in normal games happens accidentally, the short-term payout rate is Can be suppressed. Even when controlling the short-term payout rate by controlling to stop the progress of the game or delay the progress of the game, the display on the effect display device SG causes an error such as executing an effect to celebrate the player. The player is able to concentrate on the game without being distracted by the excessive number of payouts, because the player is configured not to execute a warning such as a time, which is easily recognized as a warning.

  In addition, in this example, when the excess ball A is detected during the execution of the special game, the main control board M is configured to stop the progress of all the games including the big hit. The number of payouts is not limited, and during the detection of the excess A, the progress of the big hit may not be stopped, and the symbol variation may not be executed (whether the detection of the entrance to various winning openings is valid or invalid). Good). In such a case, if the excess coin A is detected after the jackpot is over, the variation of the main game symbol is not started until the excess coin A is resolved, so the excess coin A is resolved. The jackpot end demonstration time may be extended until it is done, or the production of the same production mode as the end demo time production (the production mode of the end demo time production that seems to be extended is It may be configured so as to execute an effect. In addition, as a configuration that can be applied to all excessive ball output (excessive ball output A, excessive ball output B, and excessive ball output C), during the execution of a big hit, a notification indicating that excessive ball output has occurred (outgoing It may be configured such that at least one of the excessive ball display A, the excessive ball display B, the excessive ball display C, etc. and the stop of the game progress is not executed.

  Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the short-term payout rate is calculated every 60 seconds to monitor the presence or absence of excessive payout, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. The short-term payout rate may be calculated to monitor whether or not excessive payout has occurred. In addition to the short-term payout rate, the long-term payout rate may be calculated every 10 minutes as the ratio of the total number of award balls associated with all winning openings to the total number of shot balls in the last hour. Good. In the case of such a configuration, the notification mode on the effect display device SG and various LEDs may be different depending on whether the short-term payout rate is excessive or the long-term payout rate is excessive.

  Further, in the twelfth embodiment, three types of excessive payout, namely, excessive payout A, excessive payout B, and excessive payout C, are configured to be detected as excessive payout. There is no problem even if the number of points increases or decreases, and there is no problem if the threshold value of the short-term payout rate at which various kinds of ball payouts are detected is changed.

  In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the excessive ball output A or the excessive ball output B is detected, the fact that the excessive ball output is detected on the side of the sub-control board S is notified (effect display device SG and The frame decoration lamp D18-L is used to notify), but an LED dedicated for excessive ball detection or LED dedicated for error detection, which is controlled by the main control board M side, is provided and the LED is used for ball ejection. It may be configured to notify the excess. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the main control board M side is configured to execute the calculation of the short-term payout rate and the determination of whether or not excessive payout has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board M side is Information regarding the detected ball entry may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side may be configured to calculate the short-term payout rate and determine whether or not excessive payout has occurred.

  Next, FIG. 151 is an example of control at the time of an error applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. The error type, the error occurrence condition, the main control board side process, the sub control board side process, and the error cancellation condition in the error configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example may be configured as follows.

<< Error type: Electric prize winning abnormality >>
<Error condition>
(1-1) Second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d from the start of opening to the end of the opening period, the second main game starting opening B10 wins 20 balls or more (1-2) second main game starting opening electric accessory In the period other than the period from the opening of B11d to the end of the opening period, 13 or more balls are won in the second main game starting opening B10 (1-3) Second after the occurrence of (1-1) or (1-2) above. Win one or more balls in the main game starting port B10 <Processing on the main control board side>
No change in game status <Processing on the sub-control board side>
(2-1) Various LEDs (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) are lit or blinking. (2-2) Abnormality notification sound is output from the speaker D24 <Error cancellation condition>
(3-1) Releasing the error by turning the power off and then on (3-2) If the power is not turned off, the lighting or blinking of the LED in (2-1) above is completed in 300 seconds after the error occurs (3 -3) When the power is not turned off, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker D24 in the above (2-2) ends 100 seconds after the error occurs.

  Incidentally, in the above-mentioned electric prize winning abnormality, (1-1) and (1-2) end of the opening period of the second main game starting port electric role object B11d, 1 of the second main game starting port electric role object B11d The opening period may end at the timing of the last opening in the opening mode of one time (winning on the auxiliary game side once) → closing, or one opening mode of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d ( After the last opening → closing in one auxiliary game side winning) until the opening of the next second main game starting port electric auditorium B11d starts (the interval period related to this opening ends) Up to). Further, the number of various LEDs of (2-1) may be only one, or a plurality of LEDs may be lit / blinking. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are turned on and off, a predetermined LED may be turned on and off and a specific LED may be turned on.

<< Error type: Large prize mouth winning abnormalities >>
<Error condition>
(4-1) Win 10 or more balls in the big winning opening during the execution of a small hit (4-2) Win a large number of balls in the big winning opening during the execution of a big hit. 3 balls or more in the special winning opening in a situation where no hit is performed (4-4) 1 or more balls in the special winning opening after occurrence of (4-1), (4-2) or (4-3) Prize <Processing on the main control board side>
No change in game status <Processing on the sub-control board side>
(5-1) Various LEDs (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) are lit or blinking. (5-2) Abnormality notification sound is output from speaker D24 <Error cancellation condition>
(6-1) Power OFF → ON to release the error (6-2) If the power is not turned OFF, the lighting or blinking of the LED in (5-1) above is completed 300 seconds after the error occurs (6 -3) When the power is not turned off, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker D24 in (5-2) above is finished 100 seconds after the error occurs.

  In addition, when applying the above-mentioned big winning mouth winning abnormality, it is preferable to configure so as to have a small hit. Even if only the first main game side has the small hit, only the second main game side. Or both the first main game side and the second main game side may have. Moreover, you may have only one big winning opening, and may have two big winning openings, a first big winning opening and a second big winning opening. Further, the special winning opening corresponding to the above-mentioned "big winning opening" may be only the first big winning opening, only the second big winning opening, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. It may be both. Further, the "predetermined number of balls based on the big hit symbol" in (4-2) has a different value depending on the big hit symbol. For example, in the case of a big hit whose execution round number is 4R, it is 80 balls, and is executed. In the case of a big hit with a round number of 16R, it is like 320 balls. Further, the number of various LEDs of (5-1) may be only one, or a plurality of LEDs may be lit / blinking. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are turned on and off, a predetermined LED may be turned on and off and a specific LED may be turned on. Further, (4-4) may be configured to be applied after the occurrence of (4-1), (4-2) or (4-3), and when the power is kept on. However, as long as the RAM clear is not executed, it may be configured to be applied even when the power is turned off → on after the occurrence of (4-1), (4-2) or (4-3).

  Next, FIG. 152 is an example of control at the time of an error applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. The error type, the error occurrence condition, the main control board side process, the sub control board side process, and the error cancellation condition in the error configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example may be configured as follows.

<< Error type: Large prize mouth winning abnormalities >>
<Error condition>
(7-1) A game ball enters the special winning opening after one second has passed from the opening to closing of the big winning opening. (7-2) A big winning opening in a situation where neither a big hit nor a small hit is executed. A game ball enters * The error notification is executed when the number of prizes corresponding to (7-1) or (7-2) above reaches a predetermined number <Processing on the main control board side>
No change in game status <Processing on the sub-control board side>
(8-1) Various LEDs (for example, the frame decoration lamp D18-L) are lit or blinked when the prize corresponding to (7-1) or (7-2) is 15 balls or more (8- 2) When the prize corresponding to the above (7-1) or (7-2) is 30 balls or more, an abnormality notification sound is output from the speaker D24 <error release condition>
(9-1) If the number of winnings corresponding to (7-1) or (7-2) is less than 30 balls, the error notification is terminated after 2 seconds have passed (9-2) (7-1) or If the prize corresponding to (7-2) is 30 balls or more, the error notification ends after 60 seconds have passed.

  In addition, when applying the above-mentioned special winning opening winning anomaly, it may have only one big winning opening, or has two big winning openings, a first big winning opening and a second big winning opening. You may have. Further, the special winning opening corresponding to the above-mentioned "big winning opening" may be only the first big winning opening, only the second big winning opening, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. It may be both. Further, it may be configured to have a small hit, or may be configured not to have a small hit. Further, the number of various LEDs of (8-1) may be only one, or a plurality of LEDs may be lit / blinking. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are turned on and off, a predetermined LED may be turned on and off and a specific LED may be turned on.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments is added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An operable operation member (for example, a sub-input button SB, a firing handle D44) provided on the front side of the gaming machine,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10 and an effect display device SG) is provided,
The game to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20). The information display section (for example, the ball entering state display device J10 and the effect display device SG) can display a ball entering state display that is a display based on the ball entering state of the ball,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined operation is performed on the operation member (for example, the sub-input button SB, the firing handle D44), and the entering state display is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (2),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An operable operation member (for example, a RAM clear button) provided on the back side of the gaming machine,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10 and an effect display device SG) is provided,
The game to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). The information display unit (for example, the entry state display device J10) can display a entry state display, which is a display based on the entry state of the ball,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that a ball entry state display is displayed by executing a predetermined operation on an operation member (for example, a RAM clear button) while satisfying a predetermined condition. is there.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (3),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
An information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls information display,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information to be executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S). MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), the information display content control unit (for example, the information display content control unit for controlling the information display content displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). , Effect display control means SM20),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
As the control information, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, and the general winning opening P10) detected by the entering determination means (for example, the entering determination means MJ10). , The first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) to the sub-gaming section (for example, the sub-control board S) side, the ball detection information which is information based on the status of the game balls entering each winning hole Can be sent,
When the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) receives the ball detection information from the main game section (for example, the main control board M), based on the ball detection information, the plurality of winning openings (for example, , The first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) based on the entry status of the game ball into each winning opening Pachinko game characterized by being configured so as to generate ball entry state information, which is information, and a display based on the created ball entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG). It is a machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (4),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
An information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls information display,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Information based on the entry of the game ball into the plurality of winning openings (eg, the first main game starting opening A10 and the general winning opening P10) based on the detection result by the winning determination means (eg, the entering determination means MJ10). Ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating the ball entry state information
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information to be executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S). MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving unit (for example, the information transmission / reception control unit SM40), an information display content control unit for controlling the information display content displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Prepare,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
As the control information, it is possible to transmit incoming ball state information to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
When the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) receives the incoming state information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the information display unit (for example, the display based on the incoming state information) It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it can be displayed on the effect display device SG).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (5),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game is provided,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determining means (for example, entrance determining means MJ10) capable of detecting
Equipped with
Based on the detection result by the ball determination means (for example, the ball determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first The winning state information, which is information based on the entering state of the game ball into each winning port at the special winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20), is generated, and the display based on the generated winning state information is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that it can be displayed by a section (for example, a ball entering state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (6),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game section (for example, a main control board M) provided on the back side of the game machine for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display unit (for example, a ball entering state display device J10) capable of displaying information attached to a main game unit (for example, a main control board M) is provided,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determining means (for example, entrance determining means MJ10) capable of detecting
Equipped with
Based on the detection result by the ball determination unit (for example, the ball determination unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first The winning state information, which is information based on the entering state of the game balls into the special winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20, is generated, and the display based on the generated entering state information is displayed on the information display unit (for example, This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that it can be displayed on the entry state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (7),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
The main game department is
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) A period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period for monitoring
Based on the detection result detected by the entry determination means (eg, entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start) Mouth A10, second main game starting mouth B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Is configured to obtain
A pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that a display based on the entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the entry state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (8),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, entry state display device J10),
A launching device (eg, launching device D42) capable of launching a game ball into the game area,
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
And a period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring a period during which a game ball is being shot by a launching device (for example, launching device D42),
Based on the detection result detected by the entry determination means (eg, entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (eg, base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start) Mouth A10, second main game starting mouth B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Is configured to obtain
A pachinko game machine characterized by being configured so that a display based on the entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the entry state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (9),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering a predetermined prize hole, it has a first game state and a second game state in which it is easier to enter the predetermined prize hole than the first game state,
The game to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). The information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the ball entry state display device J10) can be configured to display a ball entry state display, which is a display based on the ball entry state,
It is configured such that the display mode of the entry state display is different between the case where the entry state display is displayed in the first gaming state and the case where the entry state display is displayed in the second gaming state. It is a pachinko machine featuring.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (10),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result detected by the ball determining unit (for example, the ball determining unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, With a winning state information generating means (for example, a maintenance mode controlling means MO) that generates the entering state information which is information based on the entering state of the game ball into the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20). Equipped with
A pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be able to retain the relevant entry state information even after the power is cut off while the entry state information is being held, and the power has been recovered from the interruption. Is.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (11),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result detected by the ball determining unit (for example, the ball determining unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, With a winning state information generating means (for example, a maintenance mode controlling means MO) that generates the entering state information which is information based on the entering state of the game ball into the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20). ,
With a ball input state output terminal (for example, an external terminal) which is an output terminal capable of outputting ball state information,
Pachinko characterized by being configured to output the incoming state information generated by the incoming state information generating means (for example, the maintenance mode control means MO) at an incoming state output terminal (for example, an external terminal). It is a game machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (12),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game is provided, and a region different from the first display region and the first display region is a region of the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). And a second display area that is,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determining means (for example, entrance determining means MJ10) capable of detecting
Equipped with
Based on the detection result by the ball determination unit (for example, the ball determination unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first The winning state information, which is numerical information based on the entering state of the game balls into the respective winning openings at the special winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20), is generated, and the generated winning status information is displayed in the information display unit ( For example, the effect display device SG) is configured to be displayed,
When the incoming state information is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the display mode of the incoming state information displayed in the first display area is configured to be the predetermined mode A,
When the incoming state information exceeds a predetermined value, the display mode of the incoming state information displayed in the first display area is set to a predetermined mode B different from the predetermined mode A. ,
In a certain period, enter into the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) When the total number of game balls that have been sphered has not reached the predetermined number of balls, the display mode of the entry state information displayed in the second display area is configured to be the specific mode A,
In the certain period, to the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) When the total number of game balls entered has reached a predetermined number of balls, the display mode of the entered state information displayed in the second display area is set to a specific mode B different from the specific mode A It is a game machine characterized by being played.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (13),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
An information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) is provided with a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls information display,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball determination unit (for example, the ball determination unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first Main winning opening state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode controlling means MO) that generates main game entering state information that is information based on the entering of game balls into the big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20). When,
Control information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information to be executed on the side of the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S). MT), and as the control information, the incoming game detection information, which is information related to the detection result detected by the incoming ball determination unit (for example, the incoming ball determination unit MJ10), is the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S). Can be sent to
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S),
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main gaming section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the entry detection information received by the control information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, and general winning) Sub game entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance) that creates sub game entry state information that is information based on entry of game balls into the mouth P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20). Mode display control means SM32),
The main game entry state information is configured so that it can be generated every predetermined period,
The sub game entry state information is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be generated for each specific period that is shorter than the predetermined period.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (14),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
A current time measuring unit (for example, a real-time clock RTC) having a frequency oscillating unit and capable of measuring time based on a clock signal oscillated by the frequency oscillating unit,
An authentication information operation unit (for example, a sub-input button SB) capable of inputting input authentication information is provided,
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means (for example, entrance determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball determination unit (for example, the ball determination unit MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first A winning state information generating means (for example, a maintenance mode controlling means MO) which generates the winning state information which is information based on the entering of the game ball into the special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20),
Ball entry related information display control means for displaying the ball entry status information generated by the ball entry status information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) on an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
Authentication information generation means (for example, maintenance mode display control means SM32) capable of generating or updating gaming machine authentication information,
Further, an authentication information determination unit (for example, maintenance mode display control unit SM32) capable of determining whether the input authentication information input to the authentication information operation unit (for example, the sub input button SB) and the gaming machine authentication information match. Prepare,
The current time clock unit (for example, the real-time clock RTC) is configured to be able to hold time information, which is the elapsed time from a predetermined reference time, as the current time,
The authentication information generation means (for example, maintenance mode display control means SM32) is configured to generate or update the gaming machine authentication information based on the current time.
When it is determined that the input authentication information and the gaming machine authentication information match, the incoming state information is configured to be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is a game machine.

Pachinko game machine related to this concept (A1),
A game area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means capable of detecting
Discharge number measuring means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (for example, the game area D30),
Based on the detection results by the ball determination unit and the discharge number measuring unit, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10. , The second big winning opening C20) has a game state information generating means for generating game state information which is information based on the game ball entered.
It is configured so that the entry state information can be generated at a predetermined time and temporarily stored,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the temporarily stored entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (eg, entry state display device J10).

Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (A2),
A game area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means capable of detecting
Discharge number measuring means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (for example, the game area D30),
Based on the detection results by the ball determination unit and the discharge number measuring unit, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10. , The second big winning opening C20) has a game state information generating means for generating game state information which is information based on the game ball entered.
As a game state relating to the easiness of entering a predetermined winning port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the first gaming state and the predetermined winning port rather than the first gaming state (for example, the second main game) It has a second game state that makes it easy to enter the starting opening B10),
The entering state information generating means,
Based on the detection results by the ball entry determination means and the discharge number measurement means in the first gaming state, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening) P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) the first entry state information which is information based on the entry of the game ball, and the entry determining means and the discharge in the second gaming state. Based on the detection result by the number measuring means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is configured to be able to generate the second entry state information, which is information based on the entry of the game ball into C20),
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the generated first ball entry status information or second ball entry status information can be displayed on an information display unit (eg, ball entry status display device J10). .

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (A3),
A game area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A main control board (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A payout control board (for example, a prize ball payout control board KH) for controlling the payout of prize balls, which is communicatively connected to a main control board (for example, a main control board M);
An information display unit (for example, a ball entering state display device J10) capable of displaying information, which is connected to a payout control board (for example, a prize ball payout control board KH),
The main control board (for example, the main control board M) is
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means capable of detecting
Discharge number measuring means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (for example, the game area D30),
The payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH) side is provided with control information transmitting means for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information to the payout control board (for example, prizeball payout control board KH) side. ,
The payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH) is
Control information receiving means for receiving control information transmitted from the main control board (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the first 2 major winning opening C20) is provided with a game state information generating means for generating game state information which is information based on the game ball entering,
The payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH) is
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that the generated entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (eg, entry state display device J10).

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (A4),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball determination unit, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning And a ball entry state information generating means for producing ball entry state information which is information based on entry of a game ball into the mouth C20),
The generated entry state information is configured to be displayed on an information display unit (eg, entry state display device J10),
As an information storage area for storing processing result data by the program, at least a first information storage area for storing at least entry state information and a second information storage area that is an area different from the first information storage area are provided. And
When executing the initialization of the information storage area,
When it is determined that the power is turned on normally when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the second information storage area is initialized, but the first information storage area is not initialized.
When it is determined that the power is turned on abnormally when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to initialize the first information storage area and the second information storage area. Is.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (A5),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entering state display device J10),
Entering game balls into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Entrance determination means capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball determination unit, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning And a ball entry state information generating means for producing ball entry state information which is information based on entry of a game ball into the mouth C20),
The generated entry state information is configured to be displayed on an information display unit (eg, entry state display device J10),
After receiving the supply of the power supply voltage for driving, the generation of the interrupt process controlled to be generated periodically is permitted, and the non-interrupt process other than the interrupt process is executed,
When the interrupt processing is executed, it is configured to generate the ball entering state information,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to determine the occurrence of power interruption when the non-interrupt processing is executed.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (A6),
A game area in which the game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30),
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, a general winning opening P10, in which a game ball can enter and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters First prize hole C10, second prize hole C20),
A predetermined notification unit (for example, effect display device SG, frame decoration lamp D18-L) capable of reporting the occurrence of an error is provided,
As a state relating to the payout rate, a state A in which the payout rate is a specific value A or more, and a state in which the payout rate is a specific value B or more and a specific value A less than the specific value A At least B and
For each of the case of the state A and the case of the state B, presence or absence of notification of occurrence of an error in the predetermined notification unit (for example, the effect display device SG), and the predetermined notification unit (for example, effect) The display device SG) is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured such that at least one of the notification modes when notifying the occurrence of an error is different.

(13th Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the information relating to the ball entering can be displayed on the ball entering state display device, and the processing such as generation / display of the information relating to the ball entering is executed on the main control board. The configuration related to processing such as generation / display of information regarding entry is not limited to that of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration related to processing such as generation / display of information regarding entry will be described in detail as a thirteenth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 153 is an example of a diagram showing a structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, similar to the eighth embodiment, the incoming state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M, but the configuration of the incoming state display device J10 is different from that of the eighth embodiment. A 4-digit 8-segment display is arranged in a row in a row, and is configured to be able to display section information, base ratio, and the like based on the total number of outs. The entry state display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the rear side of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key held by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check them.

  Next, FIG. 154 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the thirteenth embodiment. The difference from FIG. 105 of the eighth embodiment is that step 1000 (13th), step 1001-1 (13th), step 1001-2 (13th), step 1018-1 (13th), step 1018. -2 (13th), Step 1992 (13th), Step 1992-1 (13th), Step 1992-2 (13th), Step 1992-3 (13th), Step 1992-4 (13th), These are Step 8650 (13th), Step 1992-6 (13th), Step 8000 (13th), Step 7000 (13th), Step 1992-7 (13th), and Step 1992-8 (13th).

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, after the power is turned on, in step 1000 (thirteenth), the main control board M confirms the first RAM area and the second RAM area in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area (for example, check Sam). Next, in step 1001-1 (thirteenth), the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the first RAM area or the second RAM area.

<Processing in first ROM / RAM area, processing in second ROM / RAM area>
If Yes in step 1001-1 (13th), in step 1001-2 (13th), the main control board M clears all data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. At this time, the order of clearing the data in the RAM area is 1. Data in the second RAM area, 2. It is the data of the first RAM area. The first RAM area is updated only by the first ROM / RAM control (processing in the first ROM / RAM area), and the second RAM area is updated only by the second ROM / RAM control (processing in the second ROM / RAM area). The first RAM area is cleared by the processing in the first ROM / RAM area, and the second RAM area is cleared by the processing in the second ROM / RAM area.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
If No in step 1001-1 (13th), the process moves to step 1002, and the main control board M determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated. If Yes in step 1002, the process proceeds to step 1004, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1012. In step 1012, the main control board M acquires various power-off commands from the RAM, and in step 1014, the main control board M transmits the acquired various information commands to the sub side, and proceeds to step 1016. To do.

  As the processing in the first ROM / RAM area, after performing the processing of step 1018, in step 1018-1 (thirteenth), the main control board M loads the value of the input port of the power-off signal. Next, in step 1018-2 (thirteenth), the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the input port is a value indicating occurrence of power failure. For example, when the value of the input port is 0, it indicates that the power is not cut off, and when the value of the input port is 1, it is indicated that the power is cut off. If Yes in step 1018-2 (13th), the process moves to step 1018. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1018-2 (thirteenth), the main control board M performs the processes of step 1020 and step 1022, and waits until the power is turned off. In the timer interruption process, after executing the processes of steps 2000 to 1990, in step 1992 (thirteenth), the main control board M calls the process in the second ROM / RAM area.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
In step 1992-1 (thirteenth), the main control board M saves the stack pointer, switches the stack area, and sets the second stack area for use. Next, in step 1992-2 (thirteenth), the main control board M saves the value of the register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area to the second stack area. Next, in step 1992-3 (thirteenth), the main control board M creates and outputs a signal for external output from the value of the first RAM area or register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area. A test signal output process (test signal will be described later) is executed. Next, in step 1992-4 (thirteenth), the main control board M refers to the values of the first RAM area and the register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area to determine the current game state. The second area game state inspection process is executed. Next, in step 8650 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes a SW (switch) totaling process. Next, in step 1992-6 (thirteenth), the main control board M performs a register setting process for setting "F2H" in a register Q described later in order to refer to the RAM in the second area. Next, in step 8000 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes a ball entering state display device calculation process described later. Next, in step 7000 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes a ball entering state display device display control process described later. Next, in step 1992-7 (thirteenth), the main control board M restores the value of the register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area from the second stack area. Although the value of the register Q is "F2H" in step 1992-6 (13th), all the register values are saved in step 1992-2 (13th). The value of the register Q is also restored by the (thirteenth) process (“F0H” is set). Next, in step 1992-8 (thirteenth), the main control board M restores the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and makes settings for using the first stack area. It should be noted that the process which often refers to the value of the RAM used in the first area or the register used in the processing of the first area (for example, test signal output processing, second area game state inspection processing, SW totalization processing, etc.) is registered in the register Q. Of the RAM of the second area or the value of the register used in the processing of the second area is often referred to before changing the value of the value (for example, a ball entering state display device calculation process, a ball entering state display device). It is possible to arrange the display control processing, etc.) after changing the value of the register Q, and simplify and speed up the processing depending on the frequency of use of the LDQ instruction described later.

  As a supplement, after the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is called in the timer interrupt processing which is the processing in the first ROM / RAM area, the processing is performed using the second ROM / RAM area instead of the first ROM / RAM area. Is executed. Note that the counters and control data (register values and the like) used for processing on the main control board M side are backed up, and therefore, in the same manner as the data stored in the first RAM area, All the data stored in the second RAM area is also backed up. In addition, the term “clear” in the 13th embodiment is not limited to zero-clearing, and includes initialization (that is, the term “clear” is used for returning to the initial state that is the game start state). To).

  When the data in the first RAM area and the data in the second RAM area are cleared in step 1001-2 (thirteenth), the main control board M causes the sub control board S to write the data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. When the data indicating that the data has been cleared is transmitted (command A is transmitted) and the data in the first RAM area is cleared in step 1004, the main control board M causes the sub control board S to send the first RAM to the first RAM. A command indicating that the data in the area has been cleared may be transmitted (command B is transmitted). With such a configuration, the sub control board S can perform notification in a mode corresponding to the command A and the command B received from the main control board M (for example, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp D26 is If the command A is received, the game effect lamp is made to emit red light for 5 seconds, and if the command B is received, the game effect lamp is made to emit blue light for 5 seconds, etc.) Thus, the hall staff can be made to confirm whether the first RAM area and the second RAM area have been cleared.

  Next, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of a program for clearing data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area in the thirteenth embodiment. The left side is the present invention, the data is cleared in the order of the data in the second RAM area → the data in the first RAM area, and the right side is the assumed data of the first RAM area → the data in the second RAM area. The data is cleared in order. First, the program configuration of the present invention will be described in the order of the program. (1) It is determined whether or not the RAM data is normal. (1-1) When normal: Continue processing (1- 2) Abnormal: Jump to RAM clear processing, (2) Determine whether RAM clear button was operated, (2-1) When "Yes": Jump to first RAM area clear processing, ( 2-2) When “none”: Jump to normal power failure recovery processing (processing to recover power failure without clearing RAM), (3) RAM clear processing, (3-1) Second RAM area clear processing, (3-2) Clear processing of the first RAM area, (4) Normal power failure recovery processing. Next, the hypothetical program structure will be described in the order of the programs. (1) Determine whether or not the RAM data is normal. (1-1) When normal: Continue processing (1- 2) Abnormal: Jump to RAM clear processing, (2) Determine whether RAM clear button was operated, (2-1) When "Yes": Jump to first RAM area clear processing, ( 2-2) When "none": Jump to normal power failure recovery processing (processing to recover power failure without clearing RAM), (3) RAM clear processing, (3-1) First RAM area clear processing, (3-2) It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is operated, (3-2-1) Operation: jump to normal power interruption recovery processing, (3-2-2) Non-operation: second RAM Clear the area, (3-3) Clear processing of 2RAM area, has become (4) Normal power interruption recovery process, and.

  That is, in the configuration in which the data is cleared in the order of the data in the first RAM area → the data in the second RAM area, which is a hypothesis, “(3-2) Judgment as to whether or not the RAM clear button is operated, (3- 2-1) Operation: Jump to normal power failure recovery processing, (3-2-2) Non-operation: Perform processing to clear second RAM area ", if" RAM data is normal, and Even if you want to clear the first RAM area and not the second RAM area when there is a RAM clear button operation ”, the first RAM area clear processing and the second RAM area clear processing are performed. Both will be executed. Therefore, in order to avoid such a configuration, "(3-2) It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is operated, (3-2-1) Operation: jump to normal power interruption recovery process, ( 3-2-2) Non-operation: Perform processing for clearing the second RAM area ”. That is, in the hypothetical program structure, an extra program is provided, which puts pressure on the program capacity. By adopting a program configuration that clears, the program capacity is reduced.

  Next, FIG. 156 is a list of test signals that can be output in the test signal output process in the thirteenth embodiment. A description of each signal will be omitted. In the test signal output processing, the values of the first RAM area and the register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area are used to create the signal data to be output. For example, the first main game symbol high probability state signal, the first main game symbol variation time shortened state signal, the second main game symbol high probability state signal, the second main game symbol variation time shortened state signal, normal symbol high probability state signal In order to output the normal symbol variation time shortened state signal, the normal electric accessory release extended state signal, etc., it is possible to use the value of the first RAM area or register used in the processing in the first ROM / RAM area. The test signal is a signal used in the model test, and is a signal that can be output to the outside of the gaming machine by using a dedicated jig from the model test dedicated terminal provided on the main control board M. .

  Next, FIG. 157 is a flowchart of the SW tabulation processing that is control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8650 of FIG. 154 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 7500, the main control board M reads the detection information of each winning opening in the first RAM area. Specifically, in the program by the second ROM, if the detection information of the first RAM area is ON, it is determined that there is a ball in one edge detection (OFF → ON), and if it is determined that there is a ball, Of the storage area (2 bytes) of the entry information in the second RAM area, the flag of the storage area of the corresponding winning opening is turned on (1 is set). For example, when the detection information of the second main game starting opening of the first RAM area is ON, when the program of the second ROM determines that the detection information of the second main game starting opening of the first RAM area is ON. , Once, it is determined that it is ON, 1 is set to D1 which is the storage area of the entry information in the second RAM area. Then, in the next step 8651, the presence / absence of a ball is determined based on the ball entry information set here. Note that the storage area of the ball entry information in the second RAM area is not limited to 2 bytes, and may be changed to 1 byte or the like depending on the number of ball entry sensors. Next, in step 8651, the main control board M determines whether or not the incoming flag of any of the incoming sensors is ON. If Yes in step 8651, in step 8651-1, the main control board M determines which of the ball entry sensors to confirm the ball entry flag (which ball entry sensor to check the ball entry flag of. Determined based on the value of α). On the other hand, if No in step 8651, the procedure moves to the next process (process in step 8800). First, when α = 0, in step 8652, the main control board M determines whether or not the second special winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8652, in step 8653, the main control board M turns off the second special winning opening winning ball flag, and in step 8654, the main control board M turns on the second special winning opening winning ball flag. , 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8652, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 1, in step 8655, the main control substrate M determines whether or not the first special winning opening entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8655, in step 8656, the main control board M turns off the first special winning opening winning ball flag, and in step 8657, the main control board M turns on the first special winning opening winning ball flag. , 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8655, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 2, in step 8658, the main control substrate M determines whether or not the second main game starting opening entrance flag is on. If Yes in step 8658, in step 8659, the main control board M turns off the second main game starting mouth entrance flag, and in step 8660, the main control board M sets the second main game starting mouth prize ball flag. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8658, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 3, in step 8661, the main control substrate M determines whether or not the first main game starting opening entrance flag is on. If Yes in step 8661, in step 8662, the main control board M turns off the first main game starting mouth entrance ball flag, and in step 8663, the main control board M sets the first main game starting mouth prize ball flag. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8661, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 4, in step 8664, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 1 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8664, in step 8665, the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 1 winning ball flag, and in step 8666, the main control board M turns on the general winning opening 1 winning ball flag, step At 8679, 1 is added to α and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8664, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 5, in step 8667, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 2 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8667, in step 8668, the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 2 winning ball flag, and in step 8669, the main control board M turns on the general winning opening 2 winning ball flag, step At 8679, 1 is added to α and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8667, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 6, in step 8670, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 3 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8670, the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 3 winning ball flag in step 8671, and the main control board M turns on the general winning opening 3 winning ball flag in step 8672. At 8679, 1 is added to α and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8670, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 7, in step 8673, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening 4 entry flag is on. If Yes in step 8673, in step 8674, the main control board M turns off the general winning opening 4 winning ball flag, and in step 8675, the main control board M turns on the general winning opening 4 winning ball flag, step At 8679, 1 is added to α and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8673, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process advances to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α = 8, in step 8676, the main control substrate M determines whether or not the total discharge confirmation sensor flag is on. If Yes in step 8676, in step 8677, the main control board M turns off the total discharge confirmation sensor flag, in step 8678, the main control board M turns on the out-number counter addition flag, and in step 8679-1. α is cleared, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8676, α is cleared in step 8679-1 and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, in step 8680 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes a counter addition process, and shifts to the next process (process of step 8800). It should be noted that a plurality of ball entry sensors for general winning openings may be integrated into one, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a right hit is made during an auxiliary game state (high base state), a ball can be entered when a left hit is made. The second general winning a prize entrance ball which is equipped with a first general winning a prize entrance sensor for detecting the entrance into the award winning openings 1 to 3, and detects the entrance into the general prize opening 4 which can be entered when the player hits the ball right. It may be configured to include a sensor.

  Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the counter addition processing which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8680 of FIG. 157 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8682, the main control substrate M executes addition of the normal prize ball number counter. It should be noted that a condition for executing addition of the normal prize ball number counter is provided, and when the gaming state is the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, and the jackpot is not the big hit, the prize ball flag (second big Prize mouth prize ball flag, first big prize mouth prize ball flag, second main game start mouth prize ball flag, first main game start mouth prize ball flag, general prize mouth 1 prize ball flag, general prize mouth 2 prize ball flag , The general prize opening 3 award ball flag and the general prize opening 4 award ball flag are ON, the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is executed. In addition, it may be configured to execute addition of the normal prize ball number counter in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, but (1) When in the non-probability variation state and non-time reduction game state If the position to be changed does not change (for example, left-handed), the normal prize ball number counter may be added in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (2). When the position to be fired changes in the non-probability variation state and non-time reduction game state (for example, it changes from left-handed to right-handed), the number of normal prize balls in the probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state It is preferable that the counter is not added. In the case of the configuration (1), the number of prize balls in the non-assistant game state (low base state) other than during the big hit is counted. When the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is completed, the prize ball flag is turned off. As a supplement, the normal prize ball number counter consists of 2 bytes, and check whether the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls exceeds the upper limit (whether a carry flag is generated). , Is not added (when the upper limit value of 2 bytes is maintained). Next, in step 8684, the main control board M executes addition of the normal-time out number counter. In addition, there is a condition to execute the addition of the normal out number counter, and the out number counter addition flag is set when the game state is the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the jackpot is not in a big hit. When it is on, the normal out-number counter is configured to be added. Further, like the normal prize ball number counter, the normal time out number counter may be configured to execute addition in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state, and (1) non-probability varying state and non-probability If the position to be fired does not change when the game is in the time-reduced game state (for example, left-handed), it is configured to execute addition of the normal time out number counter in the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state. May be, (2) When the position to be fired changes in the non-probability variation state and non-time reduction game state (for example, from left-handed to right-handed), the probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game It is preferable that the normal out-number counter is not added in the state. When configured as in (1), the number of outs in the non-assistant gaming state (low base state) other than during the big hit is counted. As a supplement, the normal-time out number counter consists of 2 bytes, and it is checked if the added value exceeds the upper limit (whether a carry flag is generated), and if it exceeds. Is configured not to be added (maintained at the upper limit value of 2 bytes). Since the out number counter addition flag is also used in the addition of the total out number counter in the next step 8686, it is not turned off even after the addition of the normal out number counter is completed, and is kept on. Next, in step 8686, the main control board M executes addition of the total out number counter. If the out number counter addition flag is on, the normal prize ball number counter is configured to be added. When the addition is completed, the out number counter addition flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800). To do. As a supplement, the total out number counter consists of 2 bytes, and it is checked if the added value exceeds the upper limit value (whether a carry flag is generated). Are not added (maintained at the upper limit of 2 bytes).

  Next, FIG. 159 is a configuration diagram of a register in the thirteenth embodiment. The registers include a register A, a flag register F, a register B, a register C, a register D, a register E, a register H, a register L, and a register Q, each of which has 8 bits. The registers B and C, the registers D and E, and the registers H and L can also be used as 16-bit registers in total. Further, there are a register A ', a flag register F', a register B ', a register C', a register D ', a register E', a register H ', and a register L', each of which is also composed of 8 bits. Further, it also has a register I (interrupt register), a register R (refresh register), a register IX (index register), a register IY (index register), an SP (stack pointer), and a PC (program counter).

  Next, FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how to read data stored in the RAM area using the register Q in the thirteenth embodiment. In this embodiment, when reading the data stored in the RAM area, the main control board M does not specify all the upper and lower addresses of the RAM area in which the data is stored, but the lower address of the RAM area. It is possible to read the data by specifying only. The data referred to by the program is stored in the F000H to F3FFH areas of the RAM area. Further, the main control board M is provided with a dedicated register (register Q) for storing the upper address of the data storage area as a fixed value, and fixed values 0F0H, 0F2H, etc. are set in the register Q. To do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 160, the case where the data stored at the address F230H in the RAM area is read is shown. In this case, using the command LDQ for reading data using the register Q, only the lower address 30H is designated and the data read operation is performed (specifically, LDQ A, (30H) is executed). . Then, the main control board M specifies the upper address of the data storage area from the fixed value set in the register Q (for example, F2H), and also specifies the lower address 30H specified by the LDQ instruction to determine the upper and lower addresses. It is specified that the address of the data storage area obtained by combining the above is F230H. Then, the main control board M reads the data (α) stored in the data storage area corresponding to the specified F230H and stores it in the register A. In this figure, the fixed value is F2H, and the example of reading the data corresponding to F230H has been described. However, as described above, the fixed value may be changed, and if the fixed value is F0H, for example, the lower address By specifying only 30H, the data read operation is performed (specifically, LDQ A, (30H) is executed), and the data (30H) stored in the data storage area corresponding to F030H is read. , Register A. Whereas a normal LD instruction requires 2 bytes for addressing, an LDQ instruction only requires 1 byte for addressing. That is, in the present example, where 2 bytes of F230H (11110010B / 00110000B) are required, the higher-order F2H (11110010B) is set in the register Q, so only the lower address 30H (00110000B) is designated. In other words, the processing for one byte can be reduced by one addressing instruction, and the capacity and the reading speed are also increased by one byte.

  Note that the initial value setting of the register Q is configured so that F0H is set in the register Q according to the setting by the program executed at the start of the program when the power is supplied to the gaming machine and the power supply is started. Alternatively, the system may be initialized by hardware upon system reset and automatically set to the initial value F0H. For example, when power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the lower 4 bits of the Q register are initialized to 0, and the upper 4 bits are inverted by the inversion circuit to be all 1s. Thus, F0H can be automatically set as the initial value of the register Q.

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the entry state display device arithmetic processing which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8000 of FIG. 154 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8500, the main control board M executes a section determination described below. Next, in step 8500-2, the main control board M executes a calculation preparation process described later. Next, in step 8800, the main control board M executes arithmetic processing described later.

  Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the section determination which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8500 of FIG. 161 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8502, the main control board M determines whether the display data switching flag 1 is 0 or not. The display data switching flag 1 is a flag indicating a section in the ball entering state display device calculation process, and if the display data switching flag 1 is 0, the section A {for example, the total number of outs from the first power-on is predetermined. If the display data switching flag 1 is 1, the section B {for example, the total number of outs from the first power-on is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 300) and a specific number (for example, 300)). For example, less than 60,000) and if the display data switching flag 1 is 2, it is switched every time the value of the total out number counter reaches a specific number (for example, 60,000) in a period N (for example, period B and thereafter). This is a flag indicating that it is "section". Further, the display data switching flag 1 is configured to be backed up so as not to be cleared even when the power is cut off. Next, in the case of Yes in step 8502, in step 8600, the main control board M executes the later-described section A o'clock determination, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8800). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8502, in step 8700, the main control board M executes time determination after section B, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the section A o'clock determination which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8600 of FIG. 162 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8602, the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 300 or more (the numerical value of “300” used here is an example, and an inspection at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine is performed). It should be a value that is larger than the expected value counted in the process). Next, in the case of Yes in step 8602, in step 8608, the main control board M sets 1 to the display data switching flag 1 (changes from 0 to 1). Next, in step 8610, the main control board M executes counter clearing, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 8800). The counters cleared here are a normal prize ball number counter, a normal out number counter, and a total out number counter. On the other hand, if No in step 8602, the process moves to the next process (process in step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of determination in the time after the section B which is control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8700 of FIG. 162 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8702, the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 60000 or more (the numerical value of 60000 used here is an example, and the shooting interval of the game balls is 100 / In the case of minutes, it is an assumed value that the firing time of the game ball has reached 10 hours). Next, if Yes in step 8702, in step 8706, the main control board M sets 2 to the display data switching flag 1 (including resetting 2 to the display data switching flag 1). Next, in step 8707, the main control board M stores the final base value of the section. Next, in step 8708, the main control board M executes counter clear, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 8800). The counters cleared here are a normal prize ball number counter, a normal out number counter, and a total out number counter. On the other hand, if No in step 8702, the process moves to the next process (process in step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 165 is a flowchart of the calculation preparation process according to the subroutine of step 8500-2 of FIG. 161 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8500-2-1, the main control board M determines whether or not there is a section change. If Yes in step 8500-2-1, in step 8500-2-2, the main control board M executes the base calculation data creation process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8800). In addition, in the case of No in step 8500-2-1, the process of step 8500-2-2 is not executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the base calculation data creation process according to the subroutine of step 8500-2-2 of FIG. 165 in the thirteenth embodiment. In this subroutine, in step 8500-2-2-1, the main control board M performs “normal out number counter value × 100” and stores the calculation result as the calculation result A. When the process of step 8500-2-2-1 is completed, the process moves to the next process (process of step 8800).

  Next, FIG. 167 is a flowchart of the arithmetic processing which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 8800 of FIG. 161 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 8802, the main control board M determines whether or not there is a section change. If Yes in step 8802, in step 8804 the main control board M executes base calculation. Here, the base value is calculated by the formula of "normal prize ball number counter value / calculation result A". In addition, when the value of the normal out-number counter is 0, it is determined as an abnormal state, and a predetermined value (for example, 127) is stored as a calculation result. Next, in step 8806, the main control board M displays the base value (entering state information) calculated in step 8804 on the entering state display device J10 as the current base value (entering state information). It is stored for display, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 7000). The base value (ball entry state information) stored here is a value rounded to the first decimal place. On the other hand, if No in step 8802, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 7000).

<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 168 is a flowchart according to the entry state display device display control processing (step 7000 (thirteenth)) which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area of FIG. 154 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, in step 7600 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes a display content update process described later. Next, in step 7610, the main control board M updates the blinking state. Here, when the first segment information is set to “blink” in step 7630, which will be described later, a blinking display control that switches on and off every 0.3 seconds during the display related to the first segment information ( If the second segment information is set to “blink” in step 7640 described later in step 7640 described later, the light is turned on and off during the display related to the second segment information. If the third segment information is set to "blinking" in step 7642, which will be described later, when blinking display control (preferably a period of 0.6 seconds ± 10%) that switches every 0.3 seconds is executed, During the display related to the 3 segment information, a blinking display control for switching on and off every 0.3 seconds (preferably a period of 0.6 seconds ± 10%) is executed, and in step 7644 described later, the 4th segment information is displayed. If is set to “blinking”, the Control of flashing for switching the turning on and off in the display according to the segment information for each 0.3 seconds (period 0.6 sec ± 10% is preferable) is executed. Here, the display switching method will be described by using <update of blinking state> at the bottom of the figure. First, at the time of blinking, 1 is added to the blinking frequency counter every time it is switched on (0.3 seconds) and turned off (0.3 seconds), and the value of the blinking frequency counter becomes 15 (details will be described later). When the light-off period in 15 ends, the display is switched by the display switching process of the segment information described later, and when the display switching (change of display content) by the display switching process is completed, the value of the blinking counter is reset to 0. Is configured. With this configuration, when the display mode starts from lighting (it is configured to be lit when the value of the blinking counter is 0), it is turned off at a timing of 15 (0. 3 seconds), the display can be switched without any discomfort by switching the display at this timing. More specifically, it is configured such that the value of the blinking counter is reset to 0 at 4.8 seconds, and the display content is switched at the same time when the light is turned off and the light is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to switch the display at the timing when the light is turned off by starting the light-off and switching the display when the value of the blinking counter is 14. . However, it is preferable to switch the segment information within 5 seconds ± 10%. Further, although the process of adding the value of the blinking frequency counter is exemplified, there is no problem in the process of subtracting the value. For example, when the value of the blinking frequency counter is subtracted from 15 and becomes 0, the display is switched by the segment information switching process. Can also be configured to be performed. Returning to the flowchart, next, in step 7620, the main control board M executes a display switching process of segment information. For example, the 1st segment information, the 2nd segment information, the 3rd segment information, and the 4th segment information are switched in this order every 4.8 seconds (within 5 seconds ± 10%) (after the 4th segment information, the 1st segment information). Return to). The first segment information to the fourth segment information are composed of an identification segment and a ratio segment, and the two left 8-segment displays of the entry state display device J10 identify the segment {display the base value of the current section. "BL." Indicating that the previous base section is displayed, "b1." (Displaying the section one time before), "b2." (Section two times before) Is displayed), "b3." (Indicating the section three times before) is displayed}, and the two right 8-segment displays are ratio segments ("-", base value, "00", "99"). . ”Is displayed). When the process of step 7620 ends, the process moves to the next process (step 1992-7).

  Next, FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the display content update processing which is the control by the second ROM / RAM area according to the subroutine of step 7600 of FIG. 168 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, the functions of the first segment information, the second segment information, the third segment information, and the fourth segment information will be described. First, the first segment information is information about the base value that is updated in real time in the current section, and the second segment information is the final value (section one time before) of the section immediately before the current section. The final base value), the third segment information is information about the final value (final base value) in the section two times before the current section, and the fourth segment information is the third section of the current section. This is information about the final value (final base value) in the previous section.

  Next, a flowchart of the display content update process will be described. First, in step 7630, the main control board M sets (updates) the first segment information. As a premise, the ratio segment is configured to display "00" when the value of the normal out-number counter is 0 and "99." when the calculation result (calculated base value) is 100 or more. There is. In addition, in the second segment information, the third segment information, and the fourth segment information, if the value of the normal out number counter of the corresponding section ends with 0, "00" may be displayed, and the final base value is 100 or more. If so, “99.” is displayed. Even if the calculation result cannot be displayed as it is, it is properly displayed so that the confirmer (for example, a store clerk) can understand the display content. ing. In the section A (when the display data switching flag 2 described later is 0), the display content of the first segment information is set to blink “bL.” On the identification segment and display “−−” on the ratio segment. It In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), "bL." Is blinkingly displayed in the identification segment when the normal out number counter value is 0 to 5999, and when the normal out number counter value is 6000 or more. “BL.” Is lit up and the ratio segment is set to display the base value stored in step 8806. In the section C to the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), when the normal out number counter value is 0 to 5999, “bL.” Is blinkingly displayed in the identification segment, and the normal out number counter value is 6000. In the above case, "bL." Is lit and the base value stored in step 8806 is displayed in the ratio segment. As described above, the sections C to N are sections that are switched each time the value of the total out number counter reaches 60000 after the section B.

  Next, in step 7640, the main control board M sets (updates) the second segment information. In the section A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), the display content of the second segment information is set so that “b1.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “b1.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b1.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the first measurement (section B) is displayed in the ratio segment. To be done. In the section D (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b1.” Is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the second measurement (section C) is displayed in the ratio segment. To be done. In section E (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b1.” Is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the third measurement (section D) is displayed in the ratio segment. To be done. In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b1.” Is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base) in the (N−1) th measurement {section (N−1)} is displayed in the ratio segment. Value) is displayed.

  Next, in step 7642, the main control board M sets (updates) the third segment information. In the section A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), the display content of the third segment information is set so that “b2.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “b2.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b2.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section D (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b2.” Is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the first measurement (section B) is displayed in the ratio segment. To be done. In section E (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b2.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the second measurement (section C) is displayed in the ratio segment. To be done. In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "b2." Is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base) in the (N-2) th measurement {section (N-2)} is displayed in the ratio segment. Value) is displayed.

  Next, in step 7644, the main control board M executes setting (updating) of the fourth segment information. In the section A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), the display content of the fourth segment information is set so that “b3.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), “b3.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b3.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In the section D (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b3.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment. In section E (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), “b3.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the final value (final base value) in the first measurement (section B) is displayed in the ratio segment. To be done. In the section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "b3." Is lit up in the identification segment and the final value (final base) in the (N-3) th measurement {section (N-3)} is displayed in the ratio segment. Value) is displayed.

  Next, in step 7650, the main control board M updates the display data switching flag 2. The display data switching flag 2 is a flag that is updated in accordance with the display data switching flag 1 and is a display flag for displaying the base value on the entry state display device J10.

  Next, FIG. 170 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the thirteenth embodiment. In the figure, the stacking of data in the stack area and the switching of the first stack area and the second stack area are shown, and the addresses circled represent the stack pointers that have been set. . First, processing is being executed in the first ROM / RAM area, and the stack pointer A (address is A) for using the first stack area is set. Next, the process is executed in the first ROM / RAM area, and then the process in the second ROM area is called. Next, in the processing of the second ROM area, the stack pointer A is saved in the second RAM area, and the stack pointer B (address is B) for using the second stack area is set. Next, after saving all the registers in the second stack area, the address of the stack pointer B is changed. Next, the processing by the second ROM / RAM area is executed to restore all the registers. Next, the stack pointer A of the first stack area is restored, the caller of the first ROM area is restored, and thereafter the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is executed.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the second RAM area is checked when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the power is turned on), and the second ROM / RAM is configured as described above. Compared with the processing in which the second RAM area is checked every time the processing in the area is executed, the efficiency of the processing can be improved without excessively executing the check in the second RAM area.

(14th Embodiment)
Next, FIG. 171 is an electrical overall block diagram in the fourteenth embodiment. The difference from FIG. 6 which is the present embodiment is a flow path image diagram of the game ball. In the fourteenth embodiment, not only one of the total discharge confirmation sensors C90s but also the first discharge confirmation sensor and the second discharge confirmation sensor are provided as sensors for detecting the number of game balls out. The first discharge confirmation sensor is mainly configured to detect a winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, general winning opening) that enters the ball when left-handed and a gaming ball that enters the out opening. 2 The discharge confirmation sensor mainly detects the game ball that has entered the winning opening (the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) which is entered when the player hits the ball to the right. It is configured. When configured in this way and further configured to detect each winning opening in series in the SW totaling process of step 8650 (that is, the second winning opening → the first winning opening → the second main game start (Mouth → first main game start opening → general winning a prize opening 1 to 4 → confirm every time in order of discharge confirmation sensor)) A case may occur in which two balls are added by one counter addition process. At this time, the value of the total out number counter in which the section is changed may exceed 60000. In this case, the result of adding two balls may be stored as the final base value of the section. In this way, in order to calculate the incoming balls and the award balls that occur at the same time as the base value in the same section, by adding the values of the normal prize ball number counter and the normal out number counter for two balls, It is possible to calculate an accurate base value.

Further, in the above gaming machine, when the RAM clear processing (clear processing of the first RAM area) occurs during the prize ball payout operation (for example, the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned off, abnormal due to noise or flashing electricity). It is assumed that power will be restored after power failure). For example, when the RAM clear processing occurs when the payout of a predetermined number (for example, 6) is completed during the payout operation for the specific number (for example, 10), the stored information of the remaining number of the prize balls (for example, 4) is obtained. It is cleared, the payout for the remaining number of prize balls is not executed, and the payout operation ends, but the ball entry state display device displays the base value calculated by adding the specific number of prize balls. To be done. With this configuration, it is possible to intentionally adjust the ball entry information such as the base value, and it is possible to generate the entry information that is configured based on the number of balls entered into the winning opening.
(15th Embodiment)

  Next, FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of the maximum use route of the stack area in the fifteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the configuration of the program in this figure is at least partially different from the configuration of the program in the above-described embodiments (first to fourteenth embodiments). This is illustrated as a modified example in which the program may be configured. The upper diagram is an example of the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area. Here, the route that maximizes the stack area used when executing the process related to "variation of main game symbol" is shown, and like the process related to "variation of main game symbol", it may change depending on the model. By designing a small amount of processing as the maximum use route, it becomes possible to easily determine the size of the stack area (first stack area) that must be secured. The lower diagram is an example of the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area. Here, the route in which the stack area used when executing the process relating to the "ball-on state display device calculation process" is the maximum is shown, and like the case of the first ROM / RAM region, it may change depending on the model. By designing a small amount of processing as the maximum use route, it becomes possible to easily determine the size of the stack area (second stack area) that must be secured. In addition, when describing the maximum stack area use route in the document submitted when applying for a model, if the same route is used for different models, the same route can be entered each time Work becomes simple and quick. The maximum stack use route in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area and the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area will be specifically described below.

  First, the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area will be described. The maximum stack area use route in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is, in a simple representation, the case of the timer interrupt generation → main game symbol display processing → command transmission setting processing. First, a CALL instruction that calls a timer interrupt subroutine is used to store 2 bytes of data as an address for returning from the subroutine. Next, by the CALL instruction that calls the subroutine of the main game symbol display processing, 2 bytes of data are stored as the address to be returned from the subroutine. Next, a total of 14 bytes of data are stored by a CALL instruction and a PUSH instruction that call each processing in the main game symbol display processing. Specifically, a CALL instruction that calls a subroutine of the determination process in the variable waiting state stores 2 bytes of data as an address to be returned from the subroutine. Next, a CALL instruction that calls a subroutine of the fluctuation start process stores 2 bytes of data as an address to return from the subroutine. Next, a CALL instruction for calling the variable time determination process is used to store 2 bytes of data as an address for returning from the subroutine. Next, in order to store the value of the BC register in the variable time determination process, 2 bytes of data are stored by the PUSH instruction. Next, by the CALL instruction that calls the subroutine of the command transmission data setting process, 2 bytes of data are stored as the address to be returned. Next, in order to store the value of the BC register in the command transmission data setting process, 2 bytes of data are stored by the PUSH instruction. Next, the CALL instruction that calls the subroutine of the command transmission setting process stores 2 bytes of data as the address to be returned. When the above processing is executed, it becomes the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area, and a total of 18 bytes are used. That is, the maximum usage amount of the stack area when the process is executed by a route other than the root is smaller than the maximum usage amount of the stack area when the process is executed by the route. In this way, in the main game symbol display process, there are many processes for saving the value of the register, and the amount of stack area used is increased. However, the route is not limited to this, the route for executing the prize monitoring process for monitoring whether or not there is a prize in the winning opening, the route for executing the random number updating process for updating the random number, etc. may be the maximum stack area using route, or , There is no problem even if there are a plurality of maximum stack area use routes in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area, for example, a route for executing a prize monitoring process for monitoring whether there is a prize at a winning opening, a random number updating process for updating a random number. It is also possible to configure the route for executing the above to be the maximum stack area use route.

  Next, the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area will be described. The maximum stack area use route in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area is simply expressed as follows. Saving the registers used in the first ROM / RAM control (when the processing moves to the second ROM / RAM area) → This is the case where the incoming state display device calculation process → calculation preparation process → base calculation data creation process. First, when the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is shifted to the processing of the second ROM / RAM area, 14 bytes of data are stored by the PUSH instruction for saving the register used for the first ROM / RAM control (command: PUSH According to ALL, register Q, register I, register A, register F, register B, register C, register D, register E, register H, register L, upper register IX, lower register IX, upper register IY, register IY The lower data of is stored in 1 byte each). Next, by a CALL instruction that calls a subroutine of the ball entry state display device arithmetic processing, 2 bytes of data are stored as an address to be restored. Next, a CALL instruction that calls a subroutine of the operation preparation process stores 2 bytes of data as an address to be returned. Next, the CALL instruction that calls the subroutine of the data calculation process for base calculation stores 2 bytes of data as the address to be restored. When the above processing is executed, it becomes the maximum stack area use route in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area, and a total of 20 bytes is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the route for executing the b1 calculation process may be the maximum stack area use route, and there is no problem even if there are multiple maximum stack area use routes in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area. For example, the route for executing the b1 arithmetic processing can be configured to be the maximum stack area use route.

  In this example, in order to obtain the above-described effect, the maximum stack area use route is intentionally established so that the number of stack areas used is one. However, the "base calculation data creation process", which is the process of the second ROM / RAM area, does not necessarily have to be configured as one module, and can be performed in the "calculation preparation process". In this case, the maximum number of stack areas used for processing the second ROM / RAM area is 18 bytes, and the maximum number of stack areas used may be the same as other processing routes. There will be a plurality of processing routes with the maximum number.

Here, looking at the maximum stack area usage amount in the fifteenth embodiment, it is clear that the following feature points are provided.
(1) There is only one maximum stack area use route in the program of one gaming machine. As described above, the maximum stack area use route (using 20 bytes) in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area is the maximum stack area use route in the game machine program.
(2) The maximum stack area usage amount (20 bytes) in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area is larger than the maximum stack area usage amount (18 bytes) in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area. . The capacity of the processing program (first control area) in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area (2749 bytes) and the capacity of the processing program (second control area) in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area (612 bytes) are as follows: The capacity of the processing program in the first ROM / RAM area is larger.
(3) The maximum stack area use route in the processing program in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is when executing the process relating to the "main game symbol display process (process relating to fluctuation of the main game symbol)", and other processes It is configured so that the stack area usage is larger than when it is executed.

  As described as the fifteenth embodiment, the size of the storage area of the stack area (first stack area) in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area and the storage of the stack area (second stack area) in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area. Regarding the size of the area, it is desirable that the storage area of the stack area (second stack area) in the processing of the second ROM / RAM area is larger. Further, in order to enlarge the work area of the RAM (first work area) in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area, the processing that can be executed by both the processing of the first ROM / RAM area and the processing of the second ROM / RAM area will be described. , The second ROM / RAM area is preferably configured to be executed.

  For example, with respect to the total storage area of RAM (for example, 1024 bytes), the storage area (first work area + first stack area) usable in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area is half the storage area (here, It may be required to configure so as not to exceed 512 bytes), and in this case, if the storage area of the first stack area is enlarged, the storage area of the first work area that directly affects the progress of the game. Must be reduced. Therefore, as described in the thirteenth embodiment, a process (eg, step 8000 (thirteenth), step 7000 (thirteenth), etc.) relating to the entry state display device J10 that does not directly affect the progress of the game, The storage of the register values used in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area (step 1992-2 (thirteenth)) is configured as the processing of the second ROM / RAM area, and the second work area and the second stack area are set. It is desirable to reduce the storage area of the first work area and the first stack area by using the storage area.

  More specifically, referring to FIG. 67, as a restriction on game machine development, 512 bytes from the first work area to the first stack area (F000H to F1FFH) are used in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area. Storage area must be configured. Note that, in FIG. 67, an unused area (F18AH to F1EBH) of a predetermined number (for example, 16 bytes) or more is provided between the first work area and the first stack area for the sake of convenience. It is not necessary to provide a use area, and there is no problem if the first work area and the first stack area are adjacent to each other. However, when the first work area and the first stack area are adjacent to each other, the first stack As the area increases, the first work area will be pressed.

In summary, the following two points make it possible to secure a large use area of the first work area.
(1) For processing that does not directly affect the progress of the game, by using the second work area, it is possible to use a large storage area of the first work area (progress of the game) Processing amount that does not directly affect the).
(2) By storing the second stack area by performing the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, the processing that can be executed in both the processing in the first ROM / RAM area and the processing in the second ROM / RAM area is executed. If the area becomes large, the storage area of the first stack area becomes small, and if the storage area of the first stack area becomes small, a large use area of the first work area can be secured.

  Further, as a modified example, in the gaming machine described in the present embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, a setting change button that allows the jackpot winning probability by the winning / winning lottery means MN10 to be intentionally changed by a game hall manager or the like is provided. It is also possible to store the normal prize ball number counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, the final base value of each section (up to the last three sections) for each setting, and display the entry state It is also possible to configure the display on the device. Specifically, the prize payout control board KH is provided with a RAM clear button, a setting change button, and a setting display device. It is not necessary that the prize ball payout control board KH be provided, but the main control board M and the like may be provided. Further, the RAM clear button, the setting change button, and the setting display device may be provided on different substrates. Next, a method of changing the settings will be described. First, as described above, the setting change means that the jackpot winning probability can be intentionally changed by the manager of the game hall or the like. Next, the setting means that the setting 1 has a high probability (for example, 1/250), the setting 2 has a medium probability (for example, 1/300), and the setting 3 has a low probability (for example, 1/320). ) Shows the jackpot winning probability. In addition to the jackpot winning probability, the number of prize balls of each prize hole (for example, the number of prize balls of the prize hole is 1:15, 2:14, 3:13). Maximum number of balls (the number of big winning openings is closed, for example, setting 1:10, setting 2: 9, setting 3: 8), round distribution in special games (eg, ratio of 16 round jackpot) However, setting 1: high, setting 2: normal, setting 3: low) can be changed. Next, the setting change method is configured such that the manager of the game hall is changed to operate the setting change button when the power (power switch Ea) of the gaming machine is on, and the current setting is set. Is configured to be displayed on the setting display device. It should be noted that instead of making the setting change button operable at any time, a setting change key switch for executing the setting change (for example, when the power of the gaming machine is off, turn the setting change key to the left to change the setting It becomes a possible state, and when the setting change button is operated in this state, the setting is changed, and when the setting is returned to the original state, the setting change is confirmed).

  In the gaming machine provided with such “settings”, it is preferable to generate the entry state information to be displayed on the entry state display device J10 for each setting. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current setting (for example, the jackpot winning probability or the number of prize balls at each winning opening) is read, and further, the storage area corresponding to the current setting (for example, , A normal-time prize ball number counter value, a normal-time out number counter value, a total out number counter value, a final base value of each section, and the like) are set. Then, the entrance state information is generated and displayed based on the values stored in the respective storage areas. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately generate and display the entrance state information (for example, the base value) for each setting. Further, regarding the entry state information displayed on the entry state display device J10, the display content is switched by operating a dedicated entry state display switching button or by operating a setting change button (for example, a configuration). , If the current setting is 1, when the entry state display switching button is operated once, the entry state information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated one more time, the entry state information of setting 3 Is displayed), the latest information for each setting may be confirmed. Here, when the setting change button is used, the configuration using the above-described setting change key switch is used so that the setting is not changed by operating the setting change button. It is preferable that the display contents be switched by operating the setting change button in the state of being turned counterclockwise. It should be noted that, when the display of the entry state information is switched by the entry state display switching button or the setting change button, it may be configured to return to the display of the current setting after a lapse of a predetermined time.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the incoming state information for every set value may be displayed on the incoming state display device J10, for example, "bL." "B1. "B2." And "b3." Are displayed, but by changing the display of "b" to "setting value", it is possible to check the entry state information (base value) for each setting. May be. Specifically, if it is the setting 1, "1L." "11." "12." "13." is displayed on the two left 7-segment displays of the entry state display device J10. For example, “2L.”, “21.”, “22.”, and “23.” are displayed on the two left 7-segment displays of the entry state display device J10. It is also possible to operate the setting change button to switch the entry state information in the set value so that the entry state information for each setting can be confirmed, and further, at a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). It is also possible to confirm the incoming state information for each setting. In particular, if the target of the setting change is only the probability of winning or losing the special symbol, there will be no difference in the base value for each set value, so the same base value will always be obtained at any set value, but the target of the setting change , Ordinary symbol win probability, small win probability, etc., there is a difference in the base value for each set value, so by managing and displaying the incoming state information for each set value individually, the set value It is possible to confirm the base value according to. The above display may be performed only when a specific operation is performed (for example, the setting confirmation method described below). Specifically, when a specific operation is not performed, “bL.” “B1.” “B2.” “B3.” Is displayed, but when a specific operation is performed, The set values may be displayed such as “1L.” “11.” “12.” “13.” “2L.” “21.” “22.” “23.”. Further, the set value may be displayed on the set value display device for displaying the set value instead of being displayed on the incoming state display device J10. The set value display device is composed of a 1-digit 7-segment display and a 2-digit 7-segment display. When configured with a 1-digit 7-segment display, the setting value is displayed as "1" "2" "3" "4" "5" "6", and the first RAM area or the second RAM area. "E" is displayed when there is any abnormality or when there is another abnormality. In the case of a 2-digit 7-segment display, the set value is displayed as "01", "02", "03", "04", "05", "06", and the first RAM area or the first When there is an abnormality in the 2RAM area, "E1" is displayed, and when there is another abnormality, "E2" is displayed. The display indicating the type of error may be changed depending on the type of error, and “E” is used in the case of a RAM abnormality (abnormality in the first RAM area or the second RAM area), and “F” in other errors. May be displayed. Further, it is preferable that the information that can be displayed as the set value is configured to display error information different from that of a display device (for example, the error display KH3) indicating another error.

  The configuration for displaying the above-mentioned entry state information on the entry state display device J10 is the configuration of the gaming machine in the embodiments and examples described below (for example, 16th embodiment, 17th embodiment, each). Setting change method and setting confirmation method).

(16th Embodiment)
Next, a configuration in which a plurality of set values is provided will be described in detail as a 16th embodiment.

  First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment has a plurality of setting values for varying the winning probability or the like of the main gaming symbol, and therefore, as a setting changing means, a key switch and a setting changing button for changing the setting. It is provided. In the following, a setting change key switch and a setting change button will be described as the setting change device in this example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a general input device such as a DIP switch may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to use a key for changing the setting from the viewpoint that only a specific administrator can change the setting, but in addition to this, authentication with high security performance such as password input, biometric authentication, etc. The system may be used so that the setting can be changed.

  Here, in this example, the key switch for setting change can be switched between an on state and an off state by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction. ing. In this example, when the power is turned on (under a predetermined condition) and the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state, the setting change mode is set and the operation (for example, pressing) by the setting change button is effective. On the other hand, when the setting change key switch is in the off state, the setting change mode is not entered, and the operation (for example, pressing) by the setting change button becomes invalid. Further, as a predetermined condition for enabling the setting change button, a door opening signal of the door D18 input to the main control board M can be cited. With this configuration, it is necessary to set two conditions, "the key switch for setting change is in the ON state" and "the door D18 is in the open state", as the situations in which the setting change can be executed. Since the condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress a state in which the key switch for setting change is turned on with the door D18 closed (that is, an illegal setting change).

  In the following, a process related to setting change at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. 173.

  First, FIG. 173 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the sixteenth embodiment. Differences from the main processing shown in FIG. 8A, which is the present embodiment, will be described. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 1001 (sixteenth), the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is off. If Yes in step 1001 (16th), the process moves to step 1002. If No in step 1001 (sixteenth) (setting key switch is on), the main control board M executes the process of step 1003 (sixteenth) (setting change process, which will be described later), and in step 1004. Move to processing. After step 1014, in step 1014-1 (sixteenth), the main control board M sets the return of the solenoid and shifts to the processing of step 1015.

  In this example, the gaming machine has a plurality of setting values, but the correspondence between the operation mode of the setting change button and the change in the setting value of the gaming machine can be freely designed as appropriate. For example, when the number of setting values in this example is 6 (the setting value is any of “1” to “6”) and the setting value at power-on is “6”, the setting change button is 1 According to the number of times the setting change button is operated, the setting value becomes “5” when the setting operation button is operated three times, and the setting value becomes “3” when the setting change button is operated three times. The configuration may be such that the setting value is moved down to "1" (similarly, the setting value may be sequentially increased from "1" to "6" depending on the number of times the setting change button is operated). . Also, in this case, if the setting value is "1" and the setting change button is operated once, the setting value becomes "6". When the button is operated, the set value may be changed to the upper limit value. Similarly, the setting value is incremented according to the number of times the setting change button is operated, and when the setting change button is operated while the setting value is at the upper limit value (“6” in this example), The set value may be changed to the lower limit value (“1” in this example). Alternatively, the set value may be sequentially changed by long-pressing the operation button.

  Note that the number of set values can be freely designed, such as 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, for example. The smaller the number of set values (for example, when the number of set values is 2 or 3), the interest of the game based on having a plurality of set values is improved and the configuration of the gaming machine is simplified. It becomes possible, and the more the number of set values is (for example, when the number of set values is 5 or 6), the more interesting the game can be made.

  Here, FIG. 174 shows a state in which the main control board M is housed in a case and a cross section around the setting operation unit. As shown in FIG. 174, in the main control board M, the CPU MC is provided in the upper right of the main control board M, and the mounting area of the test terminal TS that is attached only when performing a payout test or the like is formed in the upper center. At the lower right portion of the main control board M, the above-described ball entering state display device J10 is provided. Further, in the upper left portion of the main control board M, an operation unit for changing the setting and a set value display device are provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU, the test terminal, the entry state display device J10, the operation unit for setting change, and the set value display device do not overlap in plan view (rear view of the gaming machine) (do not overlap). ), And a predetermined interval (for example, 30 mm or more) is provided so as to prevent misidentification between the entry state display device J10 and the set value display device. In this example, the left side in FIG. 174 is the free end when the gaming machine frame is opened, and the set value is set by arranging the operation unit for setting change and the set value display device near the free end side. While paying attention to making it easier to change the work, the entry state display device J10 is arranged on the rotary shaft side when the game machine frame is opened to display information when the game machine frame is opened. Consideration is given to prevent the player from unintentionally seeing. Of course, when giving priority to fraud prevention when changing the set value, the operation unit for changing the setting and the set value display device may be formed on the right side in the front view of the main control board (rotating shaft side of the game frame). Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above points, the opening / closing lid SKC is provided in a portion corresponding to the operation unit for setting change so that the operation unit for setting change cannot be easily accessed, and the setting value is changed. The operation unit for changing the setting is configured not to be exposed except for work and confirmation of setting information. Hereinafter, the operation unit for changing the setting and the set value display device will be described with reference to the lower diagram of FIG. 174 (partial cross-sectional view of a relevant portion).

  First, the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key slot of the setting key switch SK1 on the upper surface of the substrate case corresponding to the operation unit for changing the setting, and the setting change button SK2 can be operated. An opening of a predetermined size is formed so that However, a partition wall such as a side wall is formed from the opening toward the upper surface of the substrate, so that other electronic components (for example, CPU) of the main control board M cannot be accessed through the opening. Further, a setting key SK1 having a setting key insertion opening corresponding to this opening and a push-type setting change button SK2 are arranged vertically, and an opening / closing lid SKC corresponding to the size of the opening is provided. Is attached to the substrate case so as to be openable and closable while being biased in a direction to always close the opening.

  Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method for changing settings and the operation of setting change / setting display. When confirming the set value, first open the opening / closing lid SKC by a predetermined angle against the biasing force, insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the setting key switch SK1, and move the key to the right. Rotate in the direction. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device formed of the 7-segment LED, indicating the setting display mode. Therefore, the segment DP (dot) is displayed. In the present embodiment, although the set value can be displayed (set to the setting confirmation state) when the gaming machine is activated (power is turned on), the set value changing process is possible. It is configured so that it cannot be performed (it cannot shift to the setting change mode newly).

  On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 3) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid SKC is opened at a predetermined angle against the biasing force, and the setting key is pressed. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the switch SK1 and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 3) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, the corresponding numerical value if the setting value range is 1 to 6) is displayed blinking on the setting value display device formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting change mode is displayed. The segment DP (dot) is turned off to show. When the setting change button SK2 is pressed in this state, a new set value obtained by incrementing the current set value by +1 is temporarily stored, and the stored set value is displayed on the set value display device. The administrator operates the setting change button SK2 so as to obtain an arbitrary set value. In the present embodiment, if the setting value at power-on is "1", "1" "2" ... "5" "6" "1" every time the setting change button SK2 is pressed once. The setting value candidates after the setting change are changed as shown in FIG. Then, by operating the setting change button, the key inserted in the setting key switch SK1 is rotated to the left while the setting value is changed to the desired setting value (the desired value is displayed on the setting value display device). After the change process is completed, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) and the segment DP (dot) is displayed on, and then both displays are turned off. In this example, after selecting a candidate for the setting value after the setting change, the key inserted in the setting key switch SK1 is rotated counterclockwise to complete the setting change process (the setting value is confirmed). However, the present invention is not limited to this. (1) Detecting that a game ball has entered a predetermined entrance, (2) newly providing a switch for setting confirmation, and operating the switch. (3) The setting change process may be completed (the set value is confirmed) by pressing the setting change button for a long time (maintaining it for one second or more).

  In addition, when the set value is changed, if the set value is configured to be displayed on the front side of the gaming machine, the setting change (change of the set value) can be performed smoothly, but during the business hours of the game hall (the player's If the setting is changed during the game), the set value can be confirmed and the fairness of the game is hindered. However, in the gaming machine of this example, since the setting key is used when changing the setting value, only the specific administrator who holds the setting key can change the setting value, and the sales of the game hall are limited. The setting is configured not to be changed during the time (while the player is playing the game). In this case, the existing light emitting means provided in the game machine (for example, the special symbol display device of FIG. 1 (the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20)) is also used, and the setting is changed. By displaying the set value only during or during the setting confirmation, the set value can be easily confirmed.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a flow of setting change processing according to the sixteenth embodiment. When the setting change process is started, in step 1003-1, a command indicating that the setting change process has started is set and transmitted to the sub control board S. As a result, the sub-control board S can display "in setting change mode" or the like on the effect display device (FIG. 175). At the same time, it outputs to the external terminal board as an outer end signal (security signal). In step 1003-2, it is confirmed whether or not the set value (set value data) is in the normal range (“1” to “6”). If Yes, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. If NO in step 1003-2, that is, if it is determined that the set value (set value data) is an abnormal value other than “1” to “6”, the minimum payout rate is set in step 1003-3. The value (setting value data) "1" is set, and the process proceeds to step 1003-4. In step 1003-4, a special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20 or second main game symbol display device B20) may be referred to in a display mode (for example, all lighting) indicating that the setting is being changed. ) LED is turned on, and at the same time, the current set value is displayed on the setting display device. Next, in step 1003-5, it is confirmed whether or not the setting change button is input. If NO, the process proceeds to step 1003-11. If Yes in step 1003-5, the setting value data switched by the setting change button is acquired in step 1003-6, and the process proceeds to step 1003-7. In step 1003-7, it is confirmed whether or not the current setting value (setting value data) is not the maximum value. If Yes, the process proceeds to step 1003-9, and 1 is set in the setting value (setting value data). to add. If NO in step 1003-7, that is, if it is determined that the set value (set value data) is the maximum "6", the minimum payout rate "1" is set in step 1003-8. At the same time, the process proceeds to step 1003-9, and 1 is added to the set value (set value data). Subsequently, in step 1003-10, the setting value data is updated, and in step 1003-11, it is confirmed whether or not the setting key signal has fallen. In step 1003-11, if there is no fall of the setting key signal, the process proceeds to step 1003-5, and the processes of steps 1003-5 to 1003-11 are performed until the fall of the setting key signal is confirmed. repeat. In the case of Yes in step 1003-11, that is, when it is determined that the setting key switch has returned to the state before the setting is changed, in step 1003-12, the LEDs of the special symbol display device are all turned off to change the setting. After clearing the display mode indicating that, in step 1003-13, a command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is set and transmitted to the sub-control board S. As a result, the sub-control board S hides "in the setting change mode" being displayed on the effect display device, and stops the output to the external terminal board. After the process of step 1003-13 is completed, the process proceeds to step 1004 of this process to execute the RAM clear. Further, in the processing flow of the fifteenth embodiment, the setting value switched by the setting change button is determined by the falling edge of the setting key signal (step 1003-11), but the processing is not limited to this. The setting value may be fixed by performing any of the main operations (not shown, a ball lending button, a handle sensor, etc.). Furthermore, the set value may be fixed by input information (various gates, starting openings, attackers, etc.) of various switches provided on the board, and in this case, the player touches various switches. In this way, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized setting change, and also to prevent an unauthorized setting change by adopting a complicated procedure for the setting change in this way. Further, although “1” to “6” are used as the setting value data managed by the RAM throughout the entire processing, the setting value data may be replaced with the setting value data “0” to “5”. . By doing this, when the RAM clear occurs due to the RAM abnormality, the abnormality determination (NO in step 1003-2) due to the value of the RAM that manages the set value data being set to "0" is avoided. You can When the set value data is managed by "0" to "5", since "0" is treated as the set value data, it is not judged as abnormal. Further, when some sort of lottery is performed using the set value data (for example, when different data is set for each set value in the prefetch table or the like), there is an advantage that the offset process in the table selection can be easily performed. Specifically, when the set value data is managed by "1" to "6", when it is used as it is as the offset data for the table selection, it is necessary to perform processing such as decrementing the start address by one. When managing the value data with “0” to “5”, the value as it is can be used as the offset data. Actually, when the set value data is displayed on the setting display device, it is displayed as "1" to "6" by adding 1 to the set value data.

In this example, in step 1003-2, it is determined whether or not the set value (set value data) is within the normal range, in other words, the setting value (set value data) confirmation processing is executed. However, as the execution timing of the confirmation process,
(1) Timing immediately after the power is turned on (2) Timing to enter a predetermined entrance (3) Timing to enter the main game starting opening (4) Timing to enter the auxiliary game starting opening (5) Grand prize Entry timing to the mouth (6) Main game symbol fluctuation start timing (7) Timing immediately after the game state is switched (8) Timing immediately after the big hit starts (9) Timing immediately after the big hit end Execute at the above timing Good. The confirmation processing of the set value (set value data) may be executed only at any one of the above nine timings, or the set value (set value data) may be confirmed at a plurality of the above nine timings. The confirmation process may be executed. For example, since the checksum process is executed when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to provide a process for checking only the set value (set value data). It may be configured not to execute the confirmation processing of (setting value data).

  Next, a description will be given of processing in the case where a key switch for changing settings (sometimes referred to as a setting key switch) is turned on in a situation other than when the power is turned on (a predetermined condition).

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt process performed by the main control board M according to the sixteenth embodiment. The CPU of the main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the regular interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1000-S (16th), the CPU of the main control board M causes the setting key operation determination to be described later. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1000-1.

  The setting key operation determination processing determines whether or not the setting key switch has been operated (whether or not the setting key is input to the setting key insertion port, and the key switch for changing the setting is turned on). It is a process of determining whether or not). In the setting key operation determination process in the timer interrupt process, when it is determined that the setting key switch is operated (that is, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port, and the setting key is rotated in the predetermined direction). By doing so, when the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state), the current set value of the gaming machine is displayed on a predetermined display device (the set value display device in this example).

Here, as described above, in the setting change process performed when the power is turned on (under a predetermined condition), if the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the next process until the setting key switch is turned off. On the other hand, in the setting key operation determination process, even if the setting key switch is on, it is possible to shift to the next process without waiting for the setting key switch to turn off. Therefore, the situation in which the setting change process is being executed (specifically, the setting is being changed) and the situation in which the setting key switch is determined to be ON in the setting key operation determination process (specifically, the setting value is set). It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the process that can be executed is different between (during display). Here, the following table shows an example of processing that can be executed when the setting is being changed and when the setting value is being displayed. In the table, "○" indicates that the corresponding process can be executed, "X" indicates that the corresponding process cannot be executed, and "△" indicates that the corresponding process is temporarily stopped. Indicates that In the table, “game-related input” is, for example, a sensor input from a winning opening. Further, the "abnormality notification A" is, for example, an abnormality notification such as an error in opening the frame of the glass frame set / game board D35, an error due to a shock or the like. The "abnormality notification B" is, for example, an abnormality notification relating to magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, and radio waves. Further, the "production control command" is, for example, command transmission to the sub control board S side. The "payout control command" is, for example, command transmission to the prize ball payout control board KH. Further, "random number update" is, for example, a random number per normal symbol (for example, an auxiliary game symbol random number), a normal symbol random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number), a special symbol random number (for example, a symbol lottery random number). ), And a process for updating a soft random number per special symbol. The “external output” is, for example, an output of a security signal (a signal indicating that the setting is being changed or the set value is being displayed) output to the external terminal board. The “maintenance mode” is various setting modes regarding information output on the side of the sub-control board S. The "notification" is a notification that the setting is being changed or the setting value is being displayed on the sub-control board S side. Further, the "payout" is a game machine payout process on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Further, "launch" means the launch or non-launch of the game ball on the launch control board D40 side.

  Next, the arrangement of each device will be described.

<< Arrangement of setting change means >>
First, the arrangement of the setting key insertion port will be described. The setting key insertion port is mounted on the main control board M, and is provided separately from the entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button, and the like.

≪Set value display device≫
Next, the set value display device will be described. The gaming machine according to the present example is provided with a set value display device on the main control board M for displaying a set value to be set when the setting is changed. The set value display device is a 7-segment display, and the display of "1" to "6" makes it possible to discriminate between 6 stages of settings 1 to 6. In the sixteenth embodiment, an example in which the set value display device is provided separately from the ball entering state display device J10, the RAM clear button and the like has been described. You may make it display a setting value. In this case, both the set value and the base value are displayed on the incoming state display device J10, but the set value is displayed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation state, and in other cases. May be configured to display the base value. It is also possible to keep displaying the base value during the setting change mode, in which case the display of the set value and the base value can be switched by time or operation of any input device. Can be considered. Furthermore, by changing the display mode of the incoming state display device J10, both the set value and the base value may be simultaneously displayed in a 4-digit 7-segment display. For example, the present setting value may be displayed on the most significant digit of the four-digit 7-segment, and the base value may be displayed on the remaining three digits.

≪Change target≫
In the sixteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the win / loss lot of the main game symbol in the one game state can be changed. For example, six stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided, and the winning probability of the jackpot in each of the probability variation game state and the non-probability variation game state is gradually increased in the order of setting 1 to setting 6 (to the player. The winning probability of the probability varying gaming state for each setting is twice the winning probability of the non-probability varying gaming state. Specifically, the winning probability of the non-probability fluctuation game state is set 1: 1/320 (205/65536), setting 2: 1/318 (206/65536), setting 3: 1/317 (207/65536) , Setting 4: 1/315 (208/65536), setting 5: 1/314 (209/65536), setting 6: 1/312 (210/65536), the probability of winning in the probability variation gaming state is , Setting 1: 1/160 (410/65536), setting 2: 1/159 (412/65536), setting 3: 1/158 (414/65536), setting 4: 1/58 (416/65536), setting 5: 1/157 (418/65536) and setting 6: 1/156 (420/65536). It should be noted that the winning probability of the win / loss lot of the main game symbol includes the winning probability of the small hit, and the winning probability of the small hit is irrespective of the set value and the gaming state (probability variation gaming state, non-stochastic variation gaming state) It is set to a constant value (for example, 1/99). It should be noted that the probability of winning in the probability variation game state is within 10 times that in the non-probability variation game state, that is, setting 1: 1 / 30.7, setting 2: 1 / 30.3, setting 3: 1 /. 29.9, setting 4: 1 / 29.5, setting 5: 1 / 28.0, and setting 6: 1 / 27.0 may be provided.

Next, the storage area for set values will be described.
≪Setting value storage area≫
The RAM area in the sixteenth embodiment has a storage area (specific area) for setting values and another game data storage area (for example, main game side random number, number of rounds, etc.), and storage area for setting values. Are configured to be stored from the top address of the RAM area. In addition, when the setting change by the setting key switch is executed and there is an abnormality in the RAM area, all the RAM areas including the storage area of the set values are cleared (initialized). In the RAM clear by the operation, the storage area of the set value is not cleared, but only the data of the other game data storage area is cleared (initialized). Further, although an example in which the setting value is stored at the head address of the RAM area has been described for the purpose of facilitating the designation of the clear range when clearing the RAM, it does not matter if the setting value is stored at any address of the RAM area. Further, even if the setting is changed and the RAM area has an abnormality, a storage area that is not cleared may be provided. For example, when the setting is changed and the RAM area has an abnormality, The information regarding the display on the entry state display device J10 may be configured not to be cleared.

≪Confirmation timing of set value data≫
Next, a process of confirming the set value at the time of winning / winning lottery will be described. Confirmation processing of the set value at the time of winning / winning lottery is performed before step 1410-1 during the main game symbol display processing of step 1400 in the timer interruption processing, confirms the currently set setting value, and is set. This is a process of setting the main game table 1 (that is, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the above setting) corresponding to the set value. After confirming the setting value in the win / win lottery, in step 1410-1, the CPU of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and determines the first main game content determination random number ( Based on the second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol win / win lottery is executed.

≪Process during setting change≫
Next, the process during the setting change will be described.

<Processing on the main control side>
First, the CPU of the main control board M is configured to be able to display that the setting is being changed on the special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20). Specifically, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are turned on during the setting change. In addition, it is desirable that the LEDs of the special symbol display device are all lit so that they are not displayed during the game of the player. Further, if it is possible to indicate that the setting is being changed, it is not always necessary to use the special symbol display device, and for example, various LEDs provided on the board surface may be used. In addition, by providing a dedicated LED and processing so that it is displayed only during setting changes, various LEDs for displaying other game information {special symbol display device or normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20)} It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to the combined use of.

<Processing on the sub-control side>
Next, the CPU of the sub-control board S is configured to be able to suggest that the setting is being changed by the effect display device SG, the speaker D24, and the like. Specifically, the effect display device SG is configured to display an image of “setting is being changed”, and the speaker D24 is configured to output a voice of “setting is being changed”. Also, during the setting change, it is configured to be able to change game data not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPU of the main control board M). For example, it is possible to change volume setting (enabled or disabled), RTC setting, energy saving mode setting (light intensity is lower during normal game than during normal game), and sub-input These changes can be made by operating the button SB or the cross key. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and an input device such as a touch panel may be used instead. In this case, in addition to the effect display device used for the main game as the effect display device, it is desirable to provide another effect display device for performing only sub-input and use it as a touch panel.

<Input restrictions>
Next, the input restriction during the setting change will be described. Specifically, in the process (setting change process) of step 1003 (sixteenth), it is configured not to detect a ball entering the starting port (first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10). There is. For example, even if the input signal is input to the input port due to the input being detected by the first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device (A11s) or the second main game starting entrance detecting device (B11s). Since the CPU of the main control board M does not allow the timer interrupt process, it does not check the input port. However, error detection such as door opening detection and magnet detection is possible. In the present embodiment, these abnormality detections are configured to be detected only in the timer interrupt processing, but in the 15th embodiment, the main control board side main processing (setting change processing) detects door opening, magnet detection, etc. By making it possible to detect the error, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed while the setting is being changed.

<External output>
Next, information that the CPU of the main control board M outputs to the outside will be described. The information output from the CPU of the main control board M to the outside is 1. Setting value, 2. It is possible to output a signal indicating that the setting is being changed. In this example, 1. External output of set value, 2. Both the information indicating that the setting is being changed are output from the main control board M to the hall computer. The signal indicating that the setting is being changed is continuously output during the setting change, and is continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) elapses from the end of the setting change. Further, the CPU of the main control board M is configured to send a set value command, a setting change start command, and a setting change end command to the CPU of the sub control board S and the CPU of the prize ball payout control board.

<Payout processing>
Next, a process when the power is cut off during the payout process and then the setting is changed will be described. Specifically, when power is cut off in the situation where prize balls are paid out in the prize ball payout unit KE10, the power is turned off while the remaining prize balls are backed up in the RAM area. . Then, when the power is restored, in the normal power restoration (that is, not RAM clear), the remaining award balls are still stored, so the remaining award balls are paid out after the power is restored, but the setting key switch is operated. When the power is restored in the ON (on) state, all RAM areas including the storage area for the set values are cleared, so the number of remaining award balls that have been backed up is also cleared, Even if the power is cut off during payout, the number of remaining prize balls is not paid out when the power is restored. Although not shown, when the setting change mode is entered, the CPU of the main game board M indicates that the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board) has entered the setting change mode. A command (sometimes referred to as a setting change start command) is transmitted, and when the setting change mode ends, a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended (sometimes referred to as a setting change end command) is transmitted. . The number of remaining prize balls may be cleared after the setting is effectively changed.

<Random number update process>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the random number update process is not performed during the setting change. That is, the random number is updated by updating the random number in step 1018 of the main processing on the main control board side or by updating various random numbers in the timer interrupt process (not shown), initial value update type random number update process (not shown), and initial value random number update. It is only performed in the process (not shown), and the process of updating the random number is not provided in the setting change process.

≪Display during setting confirmation≫
Next, the display during setting confirmation (sometimes referred to as setting confirmation state and setting display) will be described.

<Display on the main control side>
First, on the main control side, as described above, the special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) is configured to be able to display that the setting is being changed. However, the LED of the special symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is configured to be able to display that the setting is being confirmed even during the setting confirmation. During the setting confirmation, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are configured to blink. In addition, it is desirable that the mode in which all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are displayed in a blinking manner is a mode that is not displayed during the game of the player (a mode displayed during the game of the player is, for example, (A certain LED and another LED are alternately blinking and displayed). Further, when the setting confirmation is in progress during the change of the special symbol, the variable display of the main game symbol in the special symbol display device (the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20) is It is configured to be displayed with priority over the display of set values.

<Display on sub-control side>
Next, during the setting confirmation, on the side of the sub-control board S, the image display of "setting confirmation" is performed on the effect display device SG, and the voice output of "setting confirmation" is performed on the speaker D24. During the setting change (sometimes referred to as setting change mode or setting change mode), game data that is not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPU of the main control board M, does not affect the result of the game) Although it is configured to be changeable (maintenance mode), during setting confirmation, even game data that is not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPU of the main control board M, does not affect the game result) is changed. It is configured to be impossible, and is configured not to be settable. In addition, it is desirable to set the output time according to the importance with other errors that extend the output time (for example, the importance of the notification of the setting change is higher than the notification at the initialization, If the output extension time is 5,000 ms, the setting can be changed to 6000 ms, which is longer than that.)

<Restriction of input information>
Next, the limitation of input information will be described. As described above, the input information is restricted during the setting change, but the input information is not restricted during the setting confirmation. Specifically, the main control side (main) such as the detection of a ball entering the starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10) whose input was restricted during the setting change It is configured to detect and process all information relating to the game regardless of the control by the CPU of the control board M) and the sub-control side (control by the CPU of the sub-control board S).

<External output>
Next, the external output during setting confirmation will be described. First, regarding the set value for performing the external output during the setting change, the external output is not performed during the setting confirmation. Next, during the setting confirmation, a signal indicating that the setting is being confirmed is continuously output. Further, after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continuously performed until a specific time (for example, 500 ms), and the output is performed for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) during the setting change.

<Payout processing>
Next, prize ball payout control during setting confirmation will be described. First, when the setting is being confirmed while the prize balls are paid out by the prize ball paying device KE, the prize ball payout control is temporarily interrupted. The setting can be confirmed by a game shop employee or the like opening the game machine frame and using the setting key switch from the rear side of the game machine. In other words, by opening the gaming machine frame, there is a possibility that ball supply from the store-side ball supply device to the gaming machine will not be performed normally. Therefore, it is preferable to temporarily suspend the payout of the prize balls. Although not shown, when the payout of prize balls is temporarily interrupted, the CPU of the main game board M shifts to the setting confirmation state of the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board). A command to that effect (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation start command) is transmitted, and when the setting confirmation state ends, a command to the effect that the setting confirmation state has ended (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation end command) is transmitted. Has been done.

<Internal processing such as random number update processing>
Next, internal processing such as random number updating processing during setting confirmation will be described. While the setting is being changed, the random number updating process is not performed, but during the setting confirmation, the random number updating process is performed as in the game.

<< Process when power is restored >>
Next, a process at the time of recovery from power failure will be described.

<Normal power off recovery>
First, when the settings are not changed and the RAM is not cleared when the power is restored, the settings including the set values are restored to the game state before the power was turned off, and the game is started.

<Process when setting is changed>
Next, the processing when changing the settings will be described. When the setting is changed, all the data in the RAM area including the set value is cleared, and then the set set value is stored.

<Processing when RAM is cleared>
Next, the processing when the RAM is cleared will be described. In the RAM clear when the RAM clear button is operated, other game data is cleared except for the set value. Further, in the RAM clear when there is an abnormality in the RAM area, all the data in the RAM area including the set value is cleared.

≪Command transmission timing≫
Next, in the present embodiment, the command is transmitted in the control command transmission processing in step 1990 in the timer interruption processing, but when the setting change mode in the sixteenth embodiment is started or the setting change mode is started. When is finished, the CPU of the main game board M, to the prize ball payout control board KH (CPU of the prize ball payout control board), immediately after the setting change mode is started, the command related to the setting change mode start ( It is preferable that the setting change start command) is transmitted, and immediately after the setting change ends, a command relating to the setting change end (setting change end command) is transmitted. Further, at the start of the game (for example, the transmission timing of the fluctuation start command), at the end of the game (for example, the stop timing of the fluctuation stop command), when the hold occurs (for example, the read-ahead read / write command or the read-ahead change mode described later). The command relating to the set value may be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S at a timing such as (command stop timing). At this time, the sub-control board S stores the received setting value, compares it with the setting value received in the next game, and if there is a difference, informs it, thereby making it illegal during the game. It can also help discover configuration changes.

<< Summary of Sixteenth Embodiment >>
The processing related to the setting change has been described above, but the summary is as follows. First, when the setting is being changed, the main control means (for example, the CPU of the main control board M), the effect control means (for example, the CPU of the sub control board S) and the payout control means (for example, prize ball payout). A command (setting change start command) indicating that the process of changing the setting is executed in the main control means is transmitted to the CPU of the control board KH), and the random number updating process related to the success or failure, the starting opening sensor, etc. A low-priority abnormality notification such as a game-related input of, for example, a ball plate full tank (an error in which a sensor detecting a full tank detects a game ball by excessively storing the game balls in the upper bowl D20). Try not to do it. Further, the main control means M outputs a signal indicating that the setting is being changed from the external terminal. It should be noted that the abnormality notification having a high priority (for example, an abnormality that is directly connected to the illegality (magnetic detection, radio wave detection, etc.)) is notified even while the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in the effect control means, while notifying that the setting is being changed, it shifts to the maintenance mode, and performs test output in the effect control means, various effect settings, setting of the effective range of the player operation, etc. Configured to be able to. Further, the payout control means is configured to prohibit both the payout process and the launch process.

  If the power is turned off while the low priority error or high priority error is occurring (during detection), and the power is turned off and the setting key switch is turned on, the power is turned on. When the change mode is entered and the set value is changed in the setting change mode (when the set value is confirmed), detection of an error with a low priority or an error with a high priority that has occurred and error notification will end. You may comprise. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected again after the setting value is changed, the error detection and the error notification may be performed. In addition, when a low-priority abnormality is detected during the setting change mode, it may be configured not to perform error notification without determining that it is an error, or a low-priority abnormality during the setting confirmation state. If the error is detected, the error notification may not be executed without determining that the error has occurred.

  When the set value is being displayed on the set value display device, the main control means indicates to the effect control means and the payout control means that the process of displaying the set value is executed by the main control means. While transmitting the command (command during setting display), the same processing as usual such as update processing of random numbers related to winning or hitting, game-related input such as a start opening sensor, abnormality notification, etc. is performed. However, a signal indicating that the set value is being displayed is output from the external terminal. Similarly, the effect control means also notifies that the set value is being displayed, but does not shift to the maintenance mode. Then, the payout control means is configured to temporarily suspend the payout process but not prohibit the operation of the firing process.

  Since the configuration is as described above, in the sixteenth embodiment, in consideration of the fact that the setting change is based on the operation performed only by the administrator, the administrator also in the effect control means (for example, the CPU of the sub control board S). In the main control means (for example, the CPU of the main control board M) and the payout control means (for example, the CPU of the prize ball payout control board KH), the game function is stopped. That is, also in the other control means, a dedicated process is executed when an operation that can be executed only by the administrator is executed in accordance with the setting change process, and the process executed in the normal game progress is not executed. Therefore, starting from the single operation of changing the setting, the plurality of control means can execute the corresponding management processing. On the other hand, at the time of confirmation work called setting display (setting confirmation state), the normal game processing is configured to be maintained as much as possible, so that proper processing is realized without imposing unnecessary control restrictions. be able to.

<< Modification of Sixteenth Embodiment >>
It should be noted that modifications of the sixteenth embodiment (setting change) will be listed below.
≪Change target≫
In the sixteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the main game symbol is set to be different for each set value, but it is possible to change other parameters that affect the payout rate. Specifically, there is an influence on the payout rate, probability change after the big hit transition to the gaming state, selection ratio of big hit type (symbol selection ratio at the time of winning), probability of winning or losing auxiliary game symbols, and electric sapo transition It is possible to combine one or a plurality of parameters such as a ratio, a special symbol, a variation time of the auxiliary game symbol (difference in the relative variation number per hour), an operation speed of a movable object that affects the winning rate. . Further, although the partial parameters are different for each set value, it is possible to configure so that the same payout rate is obtained. Of course, it is also possible to improve each parameter in accordance with the improvement of the payout rate. Further, for example, it may be possible to individually set a plurality of parameters such as the probability of winning or losing the special symbol and the probability of winning or losing the auxiliary game symbol. In this case, the setting key switch that can be changed in two or more steps is used for the setting. It may be configured to shift to the parameter change mode corresponding to the position of the key switch. In addition to the parameters that affect the payout rate, the effect frequency that does not affect may be changed.
≪Confirmation timing of set value data≫
In the sixteenth embodiment, the process of confirming the set value is performed for each special symbol lottery process, but it is also possible to perform the process only at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the information may be checked only once when the setting is changed and when the power is turned on, or may be checked every time the gaming state is changed such as a big hit. Further, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with the entry state display device J10, the confirmation may be made in accordance with its display timing or calculation timing. As a result, the timing for confirming the set value can be reduced, and the burden on other processing can be reduced.
<< Arrangement of setting key switches, etc. >>
In the sixteenth embodiment, the setting key switch, the setting change button, and the set value display device are mounted on the main control board, but a payout control device (for example, prize ball payout control board KH or the like) or a power supply unit (for example, power supply) It may be provided in the unit E) or may be configured as an independent device. It is also possible to disperse various buttons and indicators in a plurality of devices, for example, a setting key switch is provided on the main control board and a setting change button is provided on the payout control board. Since changing the set value may be the target of unauthorized operation, the input function (setting key switch and setting change button) should be installed in a control device with a sealed structure, such as the main control board and payout control board. It is desirable to provide it. In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, an example in which the setting is changed using the setting key switch and the setting change button has been described, but the design can be changed appropriately by using a general input device such as a DIP switch. You can

  Next, FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device SG during the setting change and the setting confirmation.

  Next, the upper part of the figure is an image diagram showing a list of items that can be set during the maintenance mode executed by the sub-control board S in the setting change processing of FIG. 175. In this example, the main control board M side sends a command indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, thereby indicating that the main control board M side is in the process of setting change and the sub control board S side. A maintenance mode (a mode for setting at a store or a mode for manufacturing confirmation) can be executed. Further, in this example, during the maintenance mode, the setting display image SGSHG (in this example, an image showing “4” which is the current setting value) for guiding the current setting value is displayed on the effect display device SG. Is configured to do. Further, as shown in the figure, in the setting change mode, in the effect display device SG, a setting change mode information display image SGHMH (an image for notifying that the setting is currently being changed, In the example, it is configured to be able to display an image for displaying "in the setting change mode".

  As shown in the figure, in this example, a plurality of items can be selected as various settings regarding information output during the maintenance mode. More specifically, in this example, during the maintenance mode, execution of a shipping test mode (for example, a mode for executing a test of a lamp, voice, a liquid crystal display device, input confirmation, etc.) (note that the shipping test mode is , A series of operations are completed, or it may be returned to the main screen by, for example, pressing and holding the sub-input button, etc.), advertisement content setting (that is, advertisement at a specific timing including the demo screen) Is a setting for whether or not to display, and is also a setting for specific advertising content (for example, a store name) when displaying an advertisement}, and whether power saving mode is enabled or disabled (that is, energy saving during a game standby, etc.) It is a setting of whether or not to automatically shift to the mode), and whether the RTC effect (effect to be executed when a predetermined time is reached) is enabled or disabled (RTC effect is set or not). R C effect may be uniformly settable, or plural RTC effects may be individually settable), and selection of whether or not to display the set value in the setting confirmation state (that is, the current set value of the gaming machine) And a setting display mode (display setting) that is a mode in which the current set value of the gaming machine is not displayed on the effect display device SG. Which of which is to be selected}, whether the player volume setting is valid or invalid and the player light amount setting is valid or invalid (in the normal state other than the maintenance mode, the player inputs the sub input button or It is a setting as to whether or not it is possible to perform volume setting and light amount setting using the cross key or the like). In addition, when the end of the maintenance mode is selected, or when the setting change ends (for example, the command indicating the return from the setting change mode (end of the setting change mode) is received from the main control board M side, ) The maintenance mode is terminated, and predetermined screens such as the demo screen, the normal screen, and the dedicated screen are displayed.

  In this example, the change content is configured by selecting an item by operating the cross key and pressing the sub input button. Further, the effect display device SG is configured to be able to display a button operation information image SGHMB (an image for explaining the button operation in the maintenance mode). In the lower part of the setting change display area (for example, the effect display device SG), a subtitle SGHMJ (in this example, "maintenance mode is forced to end when the setting change ends ... Subtitle) is scrolled. The subtitle SGHMJ may be displayed when “End maintenance mode” is selected with the cross key, or may be always displayed during the maintenance mode. Further, the present invention is not limited to such subtitle SGHMJ, and may indicate or guide the maintenance mode end condition or the like by predetermined character information or voice information, or may not provide such guidance or suggestion. Further, the maintenance mode may be automatically terminated on the basis that the sub input button or the cross key has not been operated for a predetermined time, and in this case, the operation of the sub input button or the cross key is specified as the subtitle SGMHM. It may be configured to notify that the time (less than the predetermined time) has not been reached and automatically notify the remaining time until the maintenance mode is ended.

  Next, an example of a display screen during setting confirmation will be described. In the middle of the figure, the sub-control board S side is in the game standby state (the state in which the symbol variation is not executed and there is no hold), and the setting display mode is the setting display mode (display setting) in the maintenance mode described above. ) And the main control board M is displayed during setting confirmation. In the present example, the main control board M side sends a command indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode, so that the sub control board S side indicates that the setting is being confirmed on the main control board M side. The display is configured to be executable.

  Further, in this example, the setting display image SGSHG is present in front of the image related to the demo screen displayed in the game standby state (that is, the setting display image SGSHG is prioritized for display over the image related to the demo screen). It is configured such that the visibility of the setting display image SGSHG is not hindered depending on the image of the demo screen). In addition, in this example, a subtitle SGSMJ (in this example, “setting display mode” in the example, which suggests and guides the ending condition of the setting display mode (display setting) is provided in the lower part of the demo screen display area (for example, the effect display device SG). (Display setting) is in progress. Subtitles saying "Return to normal mode when the setting key is removed" are scrolled.

  Next, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram displayed while the sub control board S side is in a symbol variation state (state in which the symbol variation is being executed), and the main control substrate M side is confirming the setting. In addition, in the figure, as a decorative pattern, a first decorative pattern (a decorative pattern that is mainly displayed in the central portion of the effect display device SG, and the display area is relatively larger than the second decorative pattern) and a second decorative pattern. Two decorative patterns, which are a decorative pattern (a decorative pattern that is mainly displayed in the lower right part of the effect display device SG and whose display area is relatively smaller than the first decorative pattern), are displayed on the effect display device SG. However, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are decorative designs corresponding to the same main game design variation (for example, if the first main game design is fluctuating, the first decorative design and Both of the two decorative symbols correspond to the first main game symbol), and even if the first decorative symbol is hidden during execution of super reach production, etc., the player Is designed so that the decorative design can be confirmed by visually recognizing the second decorative design. It is. Further, in this example, the setting display mode is set to non-display in the maintenance mode described above. More specifically, “7” is temporarily stopped on the left and right symbols to form a reach state, two reservations are displayed on the first reservation display unit SG12, and “red” is displayed as a look-ahead effect for the second reservation. Is displayed, the hold is not displayed in the second hold display section SG13, and the main control is performed in a situation where the display mode of the pseudo hold display is “green” as a reliability suggestion notice corresponding to the fluctuation. It is an example of a display when the board M side shifts during setting confirmation.

  In this example, as described above, since the setting display mode is the non-display setting, “☆” is shown in the setting display image, and the specific setting value cannot be discriminated from the setting display image SGSHG. Or it is difficult. When the setting display mode is the non-display setting, it is not necessary to display the image related to the setting display (for example, the setting display image SGSHG). In this example, the setting display image SGSHG is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern (the setting display image SGSHG hides the first decorative pattern existing in the center of the screen), while the second The visibility of the decorative pattern is secured by the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern arranged at the lower right of the screen). In addition, in this example, the caption SGSMJ (in this example, "in setting display mode (non-display setting) is in progress," indicates and guides the ending condition of the setting display mode (non-display setting) in the upper part of the effect display device SG. When you remove the setting key, it will return to the normal mode. ”Is displayed. During the main game symbol change, the subtitle SGSMJ is configured not to overlap with the main game symbol, the hold display, etc., so that the hold prefetch effect and the visibility of the hold information related to the symbol change are not disturbed. Exist).

It should be noted that the second modified example of the sixteenth embodiment (setting change) will be listed below.
≪Gaming machine that does not require setting change≫
In the sixteenth embodiment, an example in which the winning probability of the special symbol is made different for each set value has been described, but in a gaming machine such as an ordinary machine where it is difficult to electrically set the payout rate, the setting can be substantially changed. In some cases, it does not make much sense to provide a function (setting changing means). However, in developing a gaming machine, designing a gaming machine provided with setting changing means and a gaming machine not having setting changing means separately is not preferable in terms of hardware and software, It is necessary to develop game machines with a wide variety of specifications using the same software and hardware configurations as much as possible in order to suppress development costs. Therefore, the following is an example of how to handle the setting changing means in a gaming machine that does not require setting changes. With such a configuration, even in a gaming machine that does not require the setting changing means, it is possible to develop the gaming machine with the same software configuration and hardware configuration as the gaming machine that performs the setting changing means. Further, the game machine that does not require the setting changing means and the game machine that performs the setting changing means do not necessarily have to have the same hardware configuration / software configuration, and if the same effect is exerted, some There is no problem even if there is a design change.
<1 step setting>
The set value that can be changed by the setting changing means is set to one type. As a result, the process of switching the set value remains the same (for example, by performing the process so that the set value is not changed from “1” even if the setting change switch is operated although the mode is changed to the setting change mode). Similarly, it is possible to realize the same specifications as those of the gaming machine that does not require setting changes. In this case, since there is one kind of numerical value that can be taken as the set value, by displaying “1” as the set value data on the set value display device, it is possible to recognize that the process of displaying the setting is being performed. It may or may not be displayed. If the sub-control board is equipped with a process for displaying information related to set values, a default value (for example, "setting 1") may be transmitted, or there is a virtual set value. A command to the effect that it does not may be transmitted. When the command indicating that the set value does not exist is transmitted, it is desirable that the sub-control board be subjected to a process of displaying that the set value does not exist by receiving the command.
<Common setting value>
All setting values that can be changed by the setting changing means are set as the same setting value. Specifically, when using a 6-step setting (setting 1 to setting 6), for example, by treating all the setting values as “1”, the same setting value can be made to be used regardless of which setting value is selected. You can As a result, the same specification as the one-step setting can be realized without changing the setting value switching process. Further, when reading the set value data, the data of the set value "1" is stored in the addresses of the ROM corresponding to each of the settings 1 to 6, and the set value "1" is stored from the address corresponding to the selected set value. Data may be read out, or the data of the setting value "1" may be stored at an address common to the settings 1 to 6. At this time, the set value display device may display the set values “1” to “6” in response to the operation of the setting change button, but the set value “1” is displayed regardless of which operation is performed. Is suitable for a machine that does not require a setting change, thereby avoiding a false recognition when confirming the set value.
<Software processing that does not refer to set values>
The setting value stored in the RAM (the setting value selected by the setting changing unit) is not processed for reference. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine that adopts a set value, when a winning or failure of a special symbol is drawn by lot, when referring to the winning / probability table, the setting value stored in the RAM as the selected setting value is referred to. A winning probability table corresponding to the set value is selected (described in the eighth embodiment described later). At this time, by omitting the process of referring to the set value from the RAM and determining one predetermined win / loss probability table, it is possible to realize the same specification as that of the gaming machine that does not require setting change.
<Software processing that refers to set values>
As a game machine that does not require setting changes, the soft processing that does not refer to the setting values has been described above, but if only one winning / probability table is provided according to the gaming state regardless of the number of selectable setting values, Not limited to this. Whichever setting value data the selected setting value is, the same win / loss probability table is determined, and as a result, a setting difference due to the setting value does not occur.
<Identification flag>
By providing a flag for distinguishing between the gaming machine that changes the setting and the gaming machine that does not require the setting change, and determining the flag at a predetermined trigger such as the game start timing, the processing in the gaming machine that changes the setting, The processing in the gaming machine that does not require the setting change is changed. Specifically, in the power-on process of FIG. 173, the flag stored in the ROM of the main control board M is referred to before the process of step 1001 is performed, and it is shown that the game machine does not require setting change. When it is a value, it is possible to shift to the process of step 1002 without performing the process of step 1001. In this case, soft changes can occur, but at least hard changes cannot occur.
<Setting the number of settings>
Select the number of settings used to change the settings. For example, three types of one-stage setting, three-stage setting, and six-stage setting are designed so that they can be appropriately selected according to the game specifications. Specifically, a method of setting according to the rotational position of the setting key switch used when changing the setting or a method of selecting using an input switch such as a DIP switch can be considered. As another means, a flag indicating the selectable setting number (one-step setting, three-step setting, six-step setting) stored in the ROM of the main control board M, as in the example using the above identification flag. May be referred to before the processing of step 1001 (sixteenth) in FIG. 173 or before the processing of step 1003-1 in FIG. 175 so that the set number can be selected. By using such a method, the specifications of the current gaming machine are classified into three types: a gaming machine corresponding to one-stage setting, a gaming machine corresponding to three-stage setting, and a gaming machine corresponding to six-stage setting. Therefore, it is possible to easily select a process according to the set number. Further, by this, when the one-step setting is selectively used, it can be made to function as a gaming machine that does not require setting change, and when the three-step setting or the six-step setting is selectively used, it depends on the selected setting step. It can be made to function as a game machine whose settings can be changed. Further, as in the case of using the one-step setting described above, when the process for displaying the setting information is mounted on the sub-control board, a value indicating the selected setting number (for example, “three-step setting”) May be transmitted. As a result, the sub control board S gives a notification such as "the currently selected setting is a three-step setting" according to the value received from the main control board M on the effect display device SG or the speaker D24. It can be carried out.
<Other>
Functions related to setting changes (setting change buttons, etc.) are provided on the sub-board (power supply board, etc.) instead of the main control board, and for game machines that do not require setting changes, signal input to the main control board May not be performed. Specifically, a method that does not connect the harness between the sub-board that has a function related to setting change and the main control board, and that the sub-board does not send a command related to the setting change to the main control board. The method to do, etc. are considered.

<< Configuration during setting confirmation >>
The configuration during setting confirmation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be listed below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that one or a plurality of them may be appropriately combined to cause no problem (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<If the power is cut off while checking the settings>
If a power failure occurs while checking the settings, and then the power is restored,
(1) Resuming the setting confirmation (2) Ending the setting confirmation (If the setting key switch is turned off then on, the setting confirmation is on)
(3) Switch to setting change mode

<Operation during setting confirmation>
The configuration may be as follows during setting confirmation (setting confirmation state).
(1) Entry into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 is invalid. (It is possible that only some of the entrances are invalid, and the other entrances are valid (2) First main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, auxiliary The game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 remain valid (3) The operation of the firing handle D44 is invalid (the game ball is (Cannot fire)
(4) The operation of the firing handle D44 remains valid (the game ball does not become unlaunchable)
(5) Error detection is feasible, but error notification is not displayed on the effect display device SG. (6) Error detection is feasible, and is in front of the display during setting confirmation on the effect display device SG. (7) Do not display the demo screen (Do not shift to the game standby state)
(8) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) do not start changing (9) Auxiliary game symbols do not start changing

<Period where settings cannot be confirmed>
In the following period, the setting cannot be confirmed even if the setting key switch is turned on (the state does not shift to the setting confirmation state).
(1) Special game start demo time (2) Special game end demo time (3) Special game running (4) Main game symbol (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) is changing (5) Auxiliary game While the symbol is fluctuating (6) The normal electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory) is operating (7) The specific performance is being performed (such as the execution of the RTC-related performance)
(8) Time shortening During game state (9) Probability fluctuation During game state (10) Occurrence of specific error (door open detection, magnet detection, etc.)

<When returning from checking settings>
The operation when returning from the setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) (when the setting key is turned off) may be configured as follows.
(1) Volume setting is set to initial setting (2) Light amount setting is set to initial setting (3) Demo screen is displayed (shift to game standby state)

<< Configuration of setting change mode >>
The configuration of the setting change mode applicable to the gaming machine according to this example is listed below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that one or a plurality of them may be appropriately combined to cause no problem (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<When power is cut off in the setting change mode>
If a power failure occurs during the setting change mode and then the power is restored,
(1) The setting change mode is restarted. (2) The setting change mode ends (if the setting key switch is turned off then on, the setting is being confirmed).
(3) Shift while confirming settings

<Operation in setting change mode>
(1) Entry into the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 is invalid. (It is possible that only some of the entrances are invalid, and the other entrances are valid (2) First main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, auxiliary The game start opening H10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, and the second big winning opening C20 remain valid (3) The operation of the firing handle D44 is invalid (the game ball is (Cannot fire)
(4) The operation of the firing handle D44 remains valid (the game ball does not become unlaunchable)
(5) Error detection is feasible, but error notification is not displayed on the effect display device SG. (6) Error detection is feasible, and is in front of the display during setting confirmation on the effect display device SG. (7) Do not display the demo screen (Do not shift to the game standby state)
(8) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) do not start changing (9) Auxiliary game symbols do not start changing

<When returning from the setting change mode>
The operation when returning from the setting change mode may be configured as follows.
(1) Volume setting is set to initial setting (2) Light amount setting is set to initial setting (3) Demo screen is displayed (shift to game standby state)

(17th Embodiment)
Next, as a modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, the processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine provided with set values will be described as the seventeenth embodiment.

<Processing in the first ROM / RAM area>
First, FIG. 178 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the seventeenth embodiment. The characteristic processing in FIG. 178 is step 1001 (17th), step 1003 (17th), step 1000 (17th), step 1005 (17th), step 1001-1 (17th), step 1001-2. (17th). First, after the power is turned on, in step 1001 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is off. If Yes at step 1001 (17th), the process proceeds to step 1000 (17th). If Yes in step 1001 (17th), the set value backed up in the first RAM area at the time of power interruption is restored. On the other hand, if No in step 1001 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M executes the setting change process in step 1003 (17th), and shifts to the process in step 1006. Next, in step 1000 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M calls the second RAM area confirmation processing when the power of the second ROM / RAM area is turned on, as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area.
<Processing in second ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 1005 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M refers to the setting value stored in the first RAM area by the program of the second ROM and sets the second RAM area corresponding to the setting value. (For example, when "1" is set as the setting value, the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" of the second RAM area is used). Next, in step 1001-1 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the second RAM area as processing in the first ROM / RAM area or processing in the second ROM / RAM area. (For example, when “1” is set as the set value, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the storage area corresponding to the setting “1” of the second RAM area).
<Processing in First ROM / RAM Area / Processing in Second ROM / RAM Area>
If Yes in step 1001-1 (17th), in step 1001-2 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M clears all data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area (for example, the first RAM area). Data and the setting value "1" is set, the data in the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" in the second RAM area is cleared). Since the first RAM area is updated only by the first ROM / RAM control and the second RAM area is updated only by the second ROM / RAM control, the first RAM area is cleared by the first ROM / RAM control. The processing in the RAM control is performed, and the clearing of the second RAM area is performed in the processing in the second ROM / RAM control.

  Here, the second RAM area will be described with reference to the image diagram of the second RAM area in the upper right of FIG. 178. The second RAM area is provided so as to correspond to the set value, and the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 1, the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 2, the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 3, and the like are provided. . That is, in the second RAM area corresponding to the setting 1, the initial flag, the display data switching flag 1, the display data switching flag 2, the normal prize ball number counter value, the normal out number counter value, the total out number counter value, etc. Similarly, an initial flag, a display data switching flag 1, a display data switching flag 2, a normal prize ball number counter value, a normal out number counter value, and a total value are stored in the second area corresponding to the settings 2 and 3 as well. The out number counter value and the like are stored.

  In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on or off, the information in the second RAM area is confirmed (step 1001-1), and the RAM is cleared if necessary. Although the (initialization) process (step 1001-2) is performed, the initialization process is provided after the power is turned on (before step 1001), the RAM check process is first performed in the initialization process, and then each port register is processed. It may be configured to perform setting processing. In this case, for example, in the RAM check processing, when it is determined that the data at the time of power interruption is not normally stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area using the checksum data of the first RAM area and the second RAM area, , Regardless of whether or not the stored information of the set value is normal (whether it is 1 to 6 in the case of 6-step setting) (without making a judgment), after the necessary storage area is cleared, the default setting is performed. A value (for example, setting 1) is set, and thereafter, setting processing of each port and the like are performed. Note that the setting process of the internal register of the CPU to be executed prior to the start of the program process is performed before the RAM check process.

  As described above, by performing the RAM check before changing the set value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal even if the RAM value is abnormal, but the set value data itself is normal. Then, default setting values can be set, and the operation of the gaming machine based on unexpected settings can be restricted. It should be noted that, in order to suggest that the default setting value has been set, when the power is turned on, a notification of a power startup that is different from the normal one (for example, changing the lighting pattern of the frame lamp or changing the notification time) Is also preferred.

<Setting change mode and setting confirmation mode applicable to this example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 to 188, a setting change method and a setting confirmation method applicable to this example will be illustrated. It should be noted that the setting change and the setting confirmation can be performed by a game store clerk or the like, not by the player. Further, it should be supplemented that the configurations illustrated below may be combined in any way, and that any configuration is applicable to all the above-described embodiments (implementation without a concept of set value). Regarding the form, the following configuration is applicable as having a plurality of setting values).

First, FIGS. 179 and 180 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method (setting change button formula 1) using a setting change button. The setting changing method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game shop clerk opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off and the setting key switch is off, the process proceeds to the next step. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting key switch is on, turn it off and proceed to the next step.
(3) A game shop employee turns the setting key switch by turning it to the right.
(4) When a game shop employee or the like turns on the power switch Ea, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, the set value display device may be configured to display the default set value (for example, the setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability) or the currently set set value. Good. Further, in order to make it possible to recognize that the mode is the setting change mode, a voice of “setting change is in progress” may be output.
(5) The set value (sometimes referred to as set value data or set value candidate) is set to the next set value (set value data) every time the game shop staff presses the setting change button (each time it is turned on from off). And the set value (set value data) is displayed on the set value display device. In the figure, the setting value is incremented by 1 and changed to the setting value 2, but the setting is a jump number (for example, setting 1 → setting 3 → setting 5, setting 2 → setting 4 → setting 6, etc.). Even if it is configured, it is preferable to configure it to have the following set value (for example, set value 1 is changed to set value 3). Further, the setting may be -1 when the game shop clerk presses the setting change button once. In this case, it is desirable that the setting 6 has the lowest jackpot probability and that the default setting value is 6. Further, as the setting, a character or a symbol that can be displayed on the set value display device of the 7-segment display may be used, and for example, L (LOW) or H (HIGH) can be used. It should be noted that, here, the display of the set value and the selection candidates of the set value can be changed, and the setting is confirmed when the confirmation condition is satisfied. That is, the display of the set value display device shows "1" at the time of shifting to the setting change mode, and the display is switched to "1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2" every time the setting change button is operated. The setting value is set (determined) to 2 when the determination condition is satisfied when the display of the setting value display device is "2".

<Example of operation in setting change mode>
Here, as an example of the operation in the setting change mode applicable to this example, the following configuration can be exemplified.
(A) “The display of the set value display device when the mode is changed to the setting change mode is the default value“ 1 ”→ The display of the set value display device is“ 2 ”because the setting change button is operated once → Turn off the power switch → Turn on the power switch → The set value display will show the default value "1""
(B) “The display of the set value display device when the mode is changed to the setting change mode is the default value“ 1 ”→ The display of the set value display device is“ 2 ”because the setting change button is operated once → Turn off the power switch → Turn on the power switch → The set value display shows “2” before the power was turned off
It may be configured as described above.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 179 and 180,
(6) The setting is fixed by the game shop clerk or the like pressing the RAM clear button during the setting change mode (for example, 0.5 second ON → OFF). Alternatively, the RAM clear button may be long-pressed to confirm the set value. In this case, rather than simply pressing the RAM clear button (for example, 0.5 second ON → OFF), It is difficult for malfunctions to occur when the settings are finalized. When the setting is confirmed, the set value displayed on the set value display device may remain displayed (in this case, it is deleted in the next step), and after the setting is confirmed, The word may be erased after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or may be erased at the timing when the setting is fixed. In the figure, the set values are still displayed.
(7) When a game shop employee or the like turns the setting key switch to the left to turn it off (returns to the original position), the setting change mode ends. Here, since the set value is still displayed in the previous procedure, the display of the set value is erased in the procedure. If the game shop staff does not press the RAM clear button and the setting key switch is turned off without confirming the setting, the setting is the default setting or (the setting was not changed in the setting change mode. Therefore, it is preferable that the setting is performed before the setting change mode (the same operation as the setting display mode described later).
(8) A game shop clerk closes the front frame D14. As a result, the gaming machine is ready to play. When the setting is changed, the RAM other than the setting storage area is cleared, so that the decorative pattern is displayed on the effect display device SG as “331” as the display mode when the RAM is cleared. As shown in the figure, at the time of executing the RAM clear accompanied by the setting change, the setting change is executed by configuring the decorative symbol display mode to be a predetermined display mode (combination) such as "331". Becomes clear, and it becomes easier for the manager such as a game shop clerk to manage the gaming machine. Although not shown, when the setting change mode ends, information about the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the sub control board S side. Further, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) (for example, “changed setting” is output). The game may be started from the timing when the setting key switch detailed in (7) above is turned off.

Next, FIGS. 181 and 182 are transition diagrams showing another setting change method (setting change button type 2) using the setting change button. Since the setting change button formula 2 has a configuration similar to that of the setting change button formula 1, only different steps will be described.
Descriptions of (1) to (5) will be omitted because they have the same operation as the configuration of the setting change button type 1.
(6) The game store clerk or the like turns the setting key switch to the left to turn it off to confirm the setting (end of the setting change mode), and the set value displayed on the set value display device of the gaming machine is displayed. Erased. The set value may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the setting is confirmed.
(7) The front frame D14 is closed. It should be noted that the game may be executed when the setting is confirmed, or the game may be executed when the front frame D14 is closed.

  In the setting change button formula 2, the setting is fixed only by turning off the setting key switch (without operating the RAM clear button) by a game shop clerk, etc. Therefore, the setting can be fixed more easily than the setting change button formula 1. It is possible.

  When the setting change method is configured as shown in the figure, since there is no operation to confirm the set value like the start lever in the rotating type gaming machine, the setting key switch is turned off. When the value is fixed and the display of the set value is erased, there is a concern that the administrator forgets which set value was selected (fixed). Further, in such a situation, if the user wants to confirm the set value, the power must be turned off → on again. For this reason, when the setting value can be fixed by turning off the setting key switch, the setting key switch is turned off and the setting value is fixed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the meantime, it is preferable that the set value confirmed is displayed on the set value display device (or the entering state display device J10). In such a configuration, when the setting key switch is turned off and the setting value is confirmed, the speaker may output the voice of "the setting value is confirmed". Further, when the set value is not confirmed in the setting change mode, the display of the set value blinks, and then, when the set value is confirmed, the set value is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The display may be turned on. It should be noted that such a configuration is applicable to any configuration capable of displaying the set value according to this example.

Next, FIG. 183 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method in a configuration including a setting change button. The setting confirmation method is performed by the following procedure.
(1) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) The power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on and the setting key switch is off.
(3) When a game shop employee turns the setting key switch to the right to turn it on, the gaming machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode (sometimes referred to as setting display mode), and the setting value display device displays the current setting value. Is displayed. At this time, in order to make it possible to know that it is in the setting confirmation mode, a voice of "setting confirmation" may be output, and while the game is in progress, game sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output (the output of the game sound is stopped), and only the voice of "Checking the settings" may be output. Also, the game sound and "Checking the settings" are output at the same time. May be configured.
(4) When a gaming shop employee turns off the setting key switch, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode and the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. At this time, it may be configured to output the sound of "the setting confirmation is completed".
(5) A game shop clerk closes the front frame D14. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game (variation of special symbols, etc.) is continued without pausing, so even if the front frame is closed while the special symbols are varying, in the effect display device SG The variation of the decorative pattern and the effect display are still maintained. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped. In this case, when the setting key switch is turned on, the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, and the setting key switch is turned on. When it is turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends, the temporary stop is released, and the game continues.

Next, FIG. 184 and FIG. 185 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using a setting switch. The setting changing method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the gaming shop clerk opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off and the setting switch is off (the arrow of the setting switch is pointing upward), the procedure proceeds to the next step. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting switch is on, all of them are turned off and the process proceeds to the next step.
(3) A game shop employee turns the setting switch to the left by turning it to the left.
(4) When the game shop employee or the like turns on the power switch Ea while keeping the setting switch in the left direction, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, the set value display device may be configured to display the default set value (for example, the setting 1 having the lowest jackpot probability) or the set value of the currently set setting. You may comprise. In addition, in order to make it possible to recognize that the mode is the setting change mode, a voice of "setting change is in progress" may be output.
(5) As described above, the setting switch returns to the original position (initial position) when the operator such as a game store operator releases the setting switch itself in the operated state (twisted to the left or right). It is configured. Since this procedure is a description of the configuration of the setting switch, it is possible to skip and move to the next procedure.
(6) When a game shop employee or the like rotates the setting switch to the right (also referred to as twist), the set value (also referred to as set value data or set value candidate) is changed to the next set value. . Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and the setting value 2 is changed. That is, each time the setting switch is rotated to the right (every time from OFF to ON), the setting value is changed to the next setting value. Further, it may be changeable (configured to be -1) as described in "Setting change button type 1 (5)". Note that, here, the display of the set value can be changed, and the setting is configured to be changed when the confirmation condition is satisfied.
(7), (8) An operator such as a game shop operator releases the setting switch, and the setting is confirmed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses with the setting switch in the original position (end of the setting change mode). If the setting switch is rotated rightward again before the predetermined time has elapsed, the setting value is changed to the next setting value. Specifically, the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the set value 1 is displayed → The setting switch is rotated to the right within 5 seconds → The setting value is changed to 2 → The setting switch is rotated to the right within 5 seconds → Setting Change to value 3 → 5 seconds elapse → Confirm setting 3 (end of setting change mode). When the setting is confirmed (a predetermined time has elapsed), the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased.
(9) A game shop clerk closes the front frame D14. As a result, a game is possible. When the setting is changed, the RAM other than the setting storage area is cleared. Therefore, the effect display device SG displays the decorative pattern as “331” as the display mode when the RAM is cleared. Further, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

Next, FIG. 186 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using a setting switch. The setting confirmation method is performed by the following procedure.
(1) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When a game shop employee opens the front frame D14 when the power switch Ea is on, the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on and the setting switch is off (initial position).
(3) When a game shop employee or the like turns the setting switch to the left by turning it on, the gaming machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value of the current setting is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to know that it is in the setting display mode, a voice of "setting confirmation" may be output, and while the game is in progress, game sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output, and only the voice of “setting confirmation” may be output, or the game sound and “setting confirmation” may be output at the same time. In addition, it is preferable that the administrator can distinguish between the setting change mode and the setting display mode, and the setting change mode is currently set depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp and the display mode of the effect display device SG. Alternatively, it may be configured such that it is easy to determine whether it is in the setting display mode. Although not shown, when the setting change mode is started (shifted to the setting change mode), information about the setting change mode being started is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. When the setting display mode is started (shifted to the setting display mode), the main control board M side is configured to transmit information regarding the start of the setting display mode to the sub control board S side.
(4) When a gaming shop employee turns off the setting switch (initial position) and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode and the set value displayed on the set value display device. Is erased. If the game shop employee turns on the setting switch again (twisting to the right or twisting to the left) before the elapse of the predetermined time, the display timer for the set value is reset at that time. When the setting switch is turned on again after the lapse of the predetermined time, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device because the procedure of (3) is performed.
(5) A game shop clerk closes the front frame D14. The game progress status at this time is as described in "Setting confirmation method (5) in the configuration including the setting change button".

Next, FIG. 187 is a transition diagram showing a setting change method using the RAM clear button. The setting changing method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game shop clerk opens the front frame D14 and the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off, the process proceeds to the next step. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on, turn it off and proceed to the next step.
(3) When the game shop employee presses the RAM clear button and turns on the power switch Ea while keeping it on, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, the set value display device may be configured to display the default set value (for example, setting 1 having the lowest jackpot probability), or the set value displayed before the power is turned off. Alternatively, the display regarding the set value may not be displayed. Further, in order to enable the administrator to know that the setting change mode is in effect, a voice of "setting change in progress" may be output.
(4) The set value is changed to the next set value each time the game shop employee presses the RAM clear button (every time it is turned on). Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and the setting value 2 is changed. That is, each time the RAM clear button is pressed (from OFF to ON), the setting value is changed to the next set value. Further, the set value may be changed (configured to be -1) as described in "Setting change button type 1 (5)". If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without a setting change operation (operation of the RAM clear button), the setting is confirmed (setting change mode ends), and the RAM is re-reproduced before the predetermined time elapses. When the clear button is pressed, it is changed to the next set value. Specifically, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value 1 is displayed → The RAM clear button is pressed within 5 seconds → The setting value 2 is changed → The RAM clear button is pressed within 5 seconds → The setting value 3 is changed → 5 seconds have passed → Setting 3 is confirmed (setting change mode ends). That is, when the RAM clear button is pressed (turned on) again before the elapse of the predetermined time, the display timer of the set value is reset at that time. When the setting is confirmed (a predetermined time has elapsed), the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. Note that, here, the display of the set value can be changed, and the setting is configured to be changed when the confirmation condition is satisfied.
(5) A game shop clerk closes the front frame D14. As a result, a game is possible. When the setting is changed, the RAM other than the setting storage area is cleared. Therefore, the effect display device SG has the display mode when the RAM is cleared, and the decorative pattern is displayed as “331”. Further, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM clear has occurred is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

  In the case of the configuration as shown in FIG. 187, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear button turned on, the mode changes to the setting change mode. However, when the RAM clear button is turned off thereafter, the setting is changed. The set value may be displayed on the value display device (the set value is not displayed on the set value display device when the setting change mode is entered).

Next, FIG. 188 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using the RAM clear button. The setting confirmation method is performed by the following procedure.
(1) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) A game shop employee or the like opens the front frame D14 when the power switch Ea is on, and the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on.
(3) When a game shop clerk presses the RAM clear button, the gaming machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value of the current setting is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to know that it is in the setting confirmation mode, a voice of "setting confirmation" may be output, and while the game is in progress, game sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) May not be output, and only the voice of “setting confirmation” may be output, or the game sound and “setting confirmation” may be output at the same time. Further, similar to the above-described configuration, the progress of the game may be stopped during the setting confirmation mode.
(4) When the game shop clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button again, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode and the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after displaying the set value, the gaming machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. Of course, in this case, if the game shop staff or the like presses the RAM clear button again before the predetermined time elapses, the display timer of the set value is reset at that time. If the RAM clear button is pressed again after the predetermined time has elapsed, the setting value is displayed because the procedure of (3) is performed.
(5) A game shop clerk closes the front frame D14. The game progress status at this time is as described in "Setting confirmation method (5) in the configuration including the setting change button".

<Other configurations related to set values>
In the above-described fifteenth embodiment, sixteenth embodiment, seventeenth embodiment, etc., various examples of changing and confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine configured to have the set value have been illustrated. The configuration related to the setting values applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example may be the configuration described in detail below. Note that one or more of the configurations described in detail below can be applied to any of the above-described embodiments.

<Structure 1>
The configuration may be changed to the setting change mode when "the power switch is turned off → the setting key switch is turned off → the power switch is turned on in the setting change mode (setting key switch is on)".

<Structure 2>
Configured to switch to the setting change mode when the power switch is turned off → the setting key switch is turned off → the setting key switch is turned on → the power switch is turned on in the setting change mode (setting key switch is on) Good.

<Structure 3>
Switch to the setting change mode when "In the setting change mode (setting key switch is on), turn off the power switch with the RAM clear button turned on → turn on the power switch with the RAM clear button turned on" It may be configured as follows.

<Structure 4>
The setting change mode when the power switch is turned off while the RAM clear button is on while the normal game is active (not the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode) → the power switch is on while the RAM clear button is on May be configured to shift to.

<Structure 5>
"While in the setting change mode (setting key switch is on), turn off the power switch with the RAM clear button turned on → Turn off the setting key switch with the RAM clear button turned on → Power on with the RAM clear button turned on It may be configured to shift to the setting change mode when the switch is turned on.

<Structure 6>
If you open the front frame D14 with the power switch off → turn on the setting key switch → turn on the power switch, it shifts to the setting change mode and outputs the voice of "is in the setting change mode", If you set the setting key switch to ON while the power switch is off and the front frame D14 is closed, then turn on the power switch, the system will switch to the setting change mode and the message "Abnormal operation has been detected." May be output.

<Structure 7>
If you open the front frame D14 with the power switch off → turn on the setting key switch → turn on the power switch, it shifts to the setting change mode and outputs the voice of "is in the setting change mode", If the setting key switch is turned on → the power switch is turned on when the power switch is off and the front frame D14 is closed, the "abnormal operation is detected" is not sent to the setting change mode. It may be configured to output sound.

<Structure 8>
During the setting change (setting change mode), each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, left general winning opening P10, Even if the game ball enters the right general winning opening P20), the prize ball is not paid out, and the game ball enters each starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10). Even if the change of the special symbol is not started, and during the setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, second) When the game balls enter the large winning opening C20, the left general winning opening P10, and the right general winning opening P20, the prize balls are paid out, and each starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game) When a game ball enters the starting opening B10), the special symbol starts changing. It may be.

<Structure 9>
The game ball may not be fired even if the firing handle D44 is operated during the setting change, and the game ball may be fired by operating the firing handle D44 during the setting confirmation.

<Structure 10>
It is configured not to notify the error by disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection, magnetism detection, radio wave detection, impact detection, etc. while changing the setting, and disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection, magnetism detection, radio wave detection, impact detection during setting confirmation It may be configured such that an error notification can be performed by such as.

<Structure 11>
While the setting is being changed, the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is invalid (volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc. are not possible), and while the setting is being confirmed, the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is performed. May be effective (volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc. are possible). In addition, the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB may be invalidated during either the setting change or the setting confirmation.

<Structure 12>
During the setting change, the operation of the sub input button SB is disabled, the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 is enabled (volume adjustment is possible), and the left or right button of the cross key SB-2 is enabled. When the button is operated, the volume is changed based on the operation of the left button or the right button of the cross key SB-2, but the image display showing the current volume is not performed on the effect display device SG. It may be configured as follows. During the setting confirmation, the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is effective, and the button operation effect (a new image is displayed on the effect display device SG by causing the player to operate the sub-input button SB). When the sub input button SB is operated in the effect of displaying or changing the displayed image or gauge), the effect is executed based on the operation of the sub input button SB, and the cross key SB- When the left button or the right button of 2 is operated, the volume is changed based on the operation of the left button or the right button of the cross key SB-2, and the image display showing the current volume is displayed on the effect display device. It may be configured to be performed in SG.

<Structure 12>
While the setting is being changed, the operation of the sub input button SB is disabled, the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 is enabled (the light intensity can be adjusted), and the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are enabled. When the button is operated, the light amount is changed based on the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, but the image display showing the current light amount is not performed on the effect display device SG. It may be configured as follows. During the setting confirmation, the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is effective, and the button operation effect (a new image is displayed on the effect display device SG by causing the player to operate the sub-input button SB). When the sub input button SB is operated in the effect of displaying or changing the displayed image or gauge), the effect is executed based on the operation of the sub input button SB, and the cross key SB- 2 when the up button or the down button is operated, the light amount is changed based on the operation of the up button or the down button of the cross key SB-2, and the image display showing the current light amount is displayed on the effect display device. It may be configured to be performed in SG.

<Structure 13>
During the setting change, it is possible to recognize that the game is not in the game (or the game impossible state) on the effect display device SG, and it is displayed that the setting change is recognizable. During the setting confirmation, the game is in progress. (Or a playable state) can be recognized, and further, a display that can recognize that the setting is being confirmed may be displayed. For example, while the setting is being changed, the background image of the effect display device SG is black, and the characters "Setting is being changed" are displayed. During the setting confirmation, the stage background image, the big hit background image, the game standby demo image, etc. May be displayed, and further, the characters “setting confirmation” may be displayed.

<Structure 14>
In the seventh embodiment, the process related to the display on the incoming-ball state display device J10 is configured to be executed as the process in the second ROM / RAM area. , Etc.) may also be executed as a process in the second ROM / RAM area. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the first ROM area and the first RAM area necessary for executing the processing related to the set value. In the case where the set value is displayed on the incoming state display device J10, the process and the set value relating to the information (for example, base value) regarding the incoming ball to be displayed on the incoming state display device J10. Any of the processing relating to the above can be comprehensively executed as the processing in the second ROM / RAM area.

<Structure 15>
Further, like the configuration 14, the processing relating to the display on the entry state display device J10 and the processing relating to the set value (the above-mentioned setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.) are executed as processing in the second ROM / RAM area. In the case where the RAM clear process based on the transition of the setting change mode is executed,
(1) All ranges of the second RAM area and the first RAM area related to the second RAM area related to the display on the incoming state display device J10 and the processing related to the set value (the above-described setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.) (2) RAM clearing may be configured to clear the entire range of the second RAM area and the first RAM area for the processing related to the set value (the above-described setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.).
Further, when the RAM check processing (the processing of step 1008) is executed and it is determined that the RAM is not normal, the second RAM area relating to the processing relating to the display on the entry state display device J10 and the processing relating to the set value (described above). , Setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.), the RAM may be cleared in the entire range of the second RAM area and the first RAM area.
By configuring as described above, it is possible to execute the RAM clear in an appropriate range and appropriately execute the subsequent game progress.

<Structure 16>
In the case where it is configured to be able to shift to the setting display mode during the execution of the game (a situation other than immediately after turning on the power, for example, during the big hit execution, during the symbol change, and the symbol stop),
(1) When the setting display mode is entered during the big hit execution, after the setting display mode is finished, the big hit execution is restarted from the situation before the change to the setting display mode.
(2) In the case of shifting to the setting display mode during the stop display of the symbol and the fixed variation time, after the setting display mode ends, the measurement of the fixed variation time is restarted from the situation before shifting to the setting display mode. Specifically, in the case where the variation fixed time is 3 seconds, if the transition to the setting display mode occurs 1 second after the variation fixed time starts, the variation fixed time ends when 2 seconds elapse after the setting display mode ends.
(3) When the mode is changed to the setting display mode during the variable display of the symbols, after the setting display mode is finished, the timing and the display of the variable display of the symbols are restarted from the situation before the shift to the setting display mode. Specifically, during the variable display of the symbol whose variation time is 30 seconds, if the transition to the setting display mode is made 10 seconds after the symbol variation starts, after the setting display mode is finished, the symbol is stopped after 20 seconds have elapsed. indicate. In addition, when the symbols in the left column are stopped and displayed, and the symbols in the middle column and the symbols in the right column are being variably displayed, if the setting display mode is entered, after the setting display mode ends, The symbols in the row may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol fluctuation may be restarted from the situation where the symbols in the middle row and the symbols in the right row are being variably displayed.
(4) The configuration display mode may not be entered during an error regardless of the type of the error.
(5) The progress of the game is stopped (ball entry into the first main game starting opening A10 is invalid, symbol fluctuation does not start, etc.) While the error occurs, the mode does not shift to the setting display mode, while the game It may be configured to be able to shift to the setting display mode while an error that does not stop the progress (a bowl full tank error, etc.) occurs.
(6) Even when an error occurs, the setting display mode may be set regardless of the error type.
(7) It may be configured to shift to the setting display mode during the occurrence of an error and display of the error and restart the display of the error when the setting display mode ends.
(8) If an error occurs and the display related to the error is being executed, the mode is changed to the setting display mode, and when the setting display mode is ended, it is determined again whether the error has occurred and the error is resolved. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the display related to the error may not be displayed, and if it is determined that the error has occurred, the display related to the error may be displayed (restarted).

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start mouth ball entry determination means MJ11-B second main game start mouth ball entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start Mouth entrance determination means MJ11-C10 First prize winning entrance determination means, MJ11-C20 Second prize winning entrance determination means MJ11-P General award entrance determination means, MJ11-C80 Out entrance determination means MJ11-C90 Total discharge confirmation means, MJ11c-90 Total discharge confirmation number counter MJ10b Entrance related information temporary storage means, MJ12c Start mouth entrance number counter MJ13c General entrance count counter, MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-A No. 1 main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 hold control means MJ31 hold digestion control means, MJ31j variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 symbol hold means, MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-B No. 2 main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding information MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determining means MN10 winning and drawing lottery means, MN11-A First main game win / loss lottery means MN11ta-A First main game win / win lottery table, MN11-B Second main game win / win lottery means MN11ta-B Second main game win / win lottery table, MN11-H Auxiliary game win / loss Lottery means MN11ta-H auxiliary game win / loss table, MN40 symbol content determination means M N41-A 1st main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary Game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variation mode determination means, MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2 main game variation mode determining means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determining lottery table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determining lottery table, MP game progressing means MP10 display control means , MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C first and second main game diagram Variation management timer, MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B second main game start port electric auditors opening and closing control means MP21-B second main game start port electric role Object opening / closing condition determining means, MP22t-B second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP22t2 second main game starting opening entrance waiting timer, MP30 special game controlling means MP31 condition determining means, MP32 special game content determining means MP32ta special Game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C first and second special winning opening electric auditors opening and closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP34t2 open timer, MP34t3 large Prize winning entrance waiting timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 probability change Completion condition determination means MP52 time saving end condition determination means, MP52c time saving counter MB game state temporary storage means, MB10-C first / second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C first / second main game symbol information temporary storage Means, MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b special game related information temporary storage means MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means, MO maintenance mode control means ME fraud detection information management means MEb Fraud-related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer MG external signal output control means, MH prize ball payout determination means MHsj payout information transmission / reception means, MHsjb payout command temporary storage means MHc prize ball number counter, MHb Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means A 1st main game peripheral equipment, A10 1st main game start mouth A11s 1st main game start mouth entrance detection device, A11s2 1st main game start mouth confirmation sensor A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol Display part A21h 1st main game symbol reservation display part, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game starting port, B11s 2nd main game starting port entrance detection device B11d 2nd main game starting port Electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display section, B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display section C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral equipment, C10 1st prize hole C11s 1st prize hole prize Detection device, C11d 1st special winning opening electric prize C20 2nd special winning opening, C21s 2nd special winning entrance winning detection device C21d 2nd special winning electric prize, P10 general winning opening P11s general winning entrance winning detection device , J10 entrance state display device C80 out mouth, C80s out mouth entrance detection device C90s total discharge confirmation sensor H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game starting port H11s auxiliary game starting port entrance detecting device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative symbol display control means SM21n design drawing display content determination means, SM21ta design drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b temporary design related information temporary storage means , SM21t Design variation time management timer SM22 Design suspension information display control means, SM22b Design suspension information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means, SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means, SM24 Notice Effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means, SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 Reach effect display control means, SM25n Reach effect display content determination means SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means, SM30 error Notification control means SM31 Error occurrence determination means, SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Production display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Production display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section SB sub input button, SBs sub input button input detection device KH prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device MHc-2 Normal prize Ball counter, SM32 Maintenance mode display control means MJ11c-C91 Normal total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ11c-C92 Total discharge maintenance counter MHc-3 Prize ball maintenance counter, SN10c Sub side Normal prize ball number counter SJ10c Sub side Total discharge check A few cows SM32t Base measurement timer SJ11c Sub-side starting opening ball number counter, SJ13c Sub-side general ball number counter SRc RAM clear count counter, MHc-4 non-use object counter MHc-5 role object counter, MHc-6 continuous role Material counter MJ11c-91 Non-time saving total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ11c-92 Time saving total discharge confirmation number counter MHc-7 Non-time saving non-effects counter, MHc-8 Non-time saving effect counter MHc-9 Time saving non-effects counter, MHc -10 Hourly saving part counter HJ11c-91 Payout non-time saving total discharge confirmation number counter, HJ11c-92 Paying time saving total discharge confirmation number counter HHc-7 Payout non-working time non-working item counter HHc-8 9 Short time non-use goods counter for payout, HHc-10 Short time non-use goods counter for payout MJ11c- 90 Short-term total emissions confirmation number counter, TMHc short-term prize ball counter DRt payout rate timer

Claims (2)

A gaming machine including a ROM, a RAM, and a CPU,
The ROM stores a program that controls commands to the CPU, and data read according to the program,
The ROM is
A first control area in which a program is stored,
A first data area in which data is stored,
A second control area in which a program is stored,
A second data area in which data is stored,
The RAM is
A first information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the first control area,
A second information storage area for storing the processing result data by the program stored in the second control area,
Data stored in the register can be saved, the first stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the first control area,
The data stored in the register can be saved, and the second stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the second control area
Is equipped with
Of the processing by the program stored in the first control area and the processing by the program stored in the second control area, the program stored in the first control area to the program stored in the second control area is a is Ru processing performed when it is called, in a series of processing route including the saving of a predetermined register used in the first control area is stored a program by the program stored in the second control region pachinko machines, characterized in that the amount of the second stack region is configured to be maximized only if the processing.   A gaming machine including a ROM, a RAM, and a CPU,
  The ROM stores a program that controls commands to the CPU and data read according to the program,
  The ROM is
  A first control area in which a program is stored,
  A first data area in which data is stored,
  A second control area in which a program is stored,
  A second data area where data is stored
Have
  The RAM is
  A first information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the first control area,
  A second information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the second control area;
Have
  Data stored in the register can be saved, the first stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the first control area,
  The data stored in the register can be saved, and the second stack area used in the processing in the program stored in the second control area
Is equipped with
  Of the processing by the program stored in the first control area and the processing by the program stored in the second control area, the program stored in the first control area to the program stored in the second control area is A process that is performed when called, and is performed by a series of process routes including saving of a predetermined register used by the program stored in the first control area by the program stored in the second control area Is configured to maximize the usage of the second stack area only when executing
A rotating-type gaming machine characterized by that.